Xpanel

2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
CIMON-Xpanel
Note:
To change the product logo for your own print manual or
PDF, click "Tools > Manual Designer" and modify the
print manual template.
Title page 1
Use this page to introduce the product
by KDT SYSTEMS Co.,LTD.
This is "Title Page 1" - you may use this page to
introduce your product, show title, author, copyright,
company logos, etc.
This page intentionally starts on an odd page, so that it
is on the right half of an open book from the readers
point of view. This is the reason why the previous page
was blank (the previous page is the back side of the
cover)
All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic,
or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems -
without the written permission of the publisher.
Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author
assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information
contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event
shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or
alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document.
Printed: 11 2011 in (whereever you are located)
CIMON-Xpanel
Publisher
Special thanks to:
All the people who contributed to this document, to mum and
dad and grandpa, to my sisters and brothers and mothers in
law, to our secretary Kathrin, to the graphic artist who created
this great product logo on the cover page (sorry, don't
remember your name at the moment but you did a great work),
to the pizza service down the street (your daily Capricciosas
saved our lives), to the copy shop where this document will be
duplicated, and and and...
Last not least, we want to thank EC Software who wrote this
great help tool called HELP & MANUAL which printed this
document.
Managing Editor
Technical Editors
Cover Designer
...enter name...
...enter name...
...enter name...
...enter name...
...enter name...
Production
...enter name...
Team Coordinator
...enter name...
CIMON-Xpanel 4
Table of Contents
Foreword 11
Part I Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel
13
Part II XPanelDesigner Update : V2.10
16
Part III Ethernet Loader
20
................................................................................................................................... 20 1 How to use Ethernet Loader
................................................................................................................................... 22 2 How to update Ethernet Loader
.......................................................................................................................................................... 22 V2.10
Part IV Installation Guide
28
................................................................................................................................... 28 1 Essential Safaty Precautions
................................................................................................................................... 30 2 General Safety Precautions
................................................................................................................................... 32 3 Package Contents
................................................................................................................................... 33 4 Specification
................................................................................................................................... 34 5 Installation / Dimensions
................................................................................................................................... 37 6 Interfaces
................................................................................................................................... 40 7 Wiring
................................................................................................................................... 41 8 Developing Environment Setup
Part V SYSTEM Overview
49
................................................................................................................................... 49 1 Peripherals
................................................................................................................................... 50 2 Network
................................................................................................................................... 51 3 Xpanel Designer
................................................................................................................................... 52 4 Xpanel Unit
Part VI Configuration Tools
56
................................................................................................................................... 56 1 System Log : System Activity Log
................................................................................................................................... 57 2 Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor
................................................................................................................................... 58 3 Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation
................................................................................................................................... 62 4 Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations
................................................................................................................................... 63 5 Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration
................................................................................................................................... 64 6 Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot
................................................................................................................................... 64 7 Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock
................................................................................................................................... 65 8 SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard
................................................................................................................................... 65 9 Printer : Printer Setup
................................................................................................................................... 69 10 System Shutdown
5 Contents
5
................................................................................................................................... 70 11 Exit
Part VII Xpanel Designer
72
................................................................................................................................... 72 1 How to download project data
................................................................................................................................... 82 2 Xpanel Designer Installing and Running
................................................................................................................................... 83 3 Xpanel Designer menu
................................................................................................................................... 87 4 Project setup and download
Part VIII TAG Database
93
................................................................................................................................... 93 1 Overview
................................................................................................................................... 94 2 Database Window
................................................................................................................................... 95 3 How to use Database
................................................................................................................................... 99 4 Group TAG
................................................................................................................................... 100 5 Digital TAG
................................................................................................................................... 100 6 Analog TAG
................................................................................................................................... 103 7 String TAG
................................................................................................................................... 104 8 Database edit using EXCEL
Part IX I/O Device
109
................................................................................................................................... 109 1 I/O Device Basic
................................................................................................................................... 110 2 I/O Device Ethernet
................................................................................................................................... 113 3 I/O Device Serial
Part X Alarm
118
................................................................................................................................... 118 1 Alarm Group
................................................................................................................................... 119 2 Alarm Configuration
................................................................................................................................... 124 3 Alarm Summary
Part XI Graphic Page Editor
130
................................................................................................................................... 131 1 Page Properties
................................................................................................................................... 135 2 Frame Editor
................................................................................................................................... 139 3 Library
.......................................................................................................................................................... 140 Wizard Object
.......................................................................................................................................................... 151 User Library
................................................................................................................................... 154 4 Object Properties
.......................................................................................................................................................... 156 Style
.......................................................................................................................................................... 157 Visible
.......................................................................................................................................................... 158 Blink
.......................................................................................................................................................... 158 V-Size
.......................................................................................................................................................... 159 H-Size
.......................................................................................................................................................... 160 V-Move
.......................................................................................................................................................... 161 H-Move
.......................................................................................................................................................... 163 Color
CIMON-Xpanel 6
.......................................................................................................................................................... 163 Rotate
.......................................................................................................................................................... 165 Touch
.......................................................................................................................................................... 167 EntryData
.......................................................................................................................................................... 168 Switch/Lamp
Part XII Keypad Page
181
................................................................................................................................... 181 1 Make Keypad Page
Part XIII Key Input Window
185
................................................................................................................................... 185 1 Key Input Setting
Part XIV Data Logging
189
................................................................................................................................... 189 1 Data Logging Configuration
................................................................................................................................... 193 2 Using Data Logging
Part XV Data Bridge
196
................................................................................................................................... 196 1 Edit Data Bridge Model
Part XVI Modbus Slave
202
................................................................................................................................... 203 1 Modbus Slave Setting
Part XVII Recipe
208
................................................................................................................................... 209 1 Model Configuration
................................................................................................................................... 213 2 Recipe Operator Interface
Part XVIII System Memory
217
................................................................................................................................... 217 1 Using System Memory Tag
................................................................................................................................... 219 2 Example of using system memory about opened page log.
................................................................................................................................... 226 3 Editing recipe data using system memory
Part XIX Trend
234
................................................................................................................................... 234 1 YT Trend
................................................................................................................................... 241 2 Scope Trend
................................................................................................................................... 247 3 SPC Trend
................................................................................................................................... 254 4 ST Trend
................................................................................................................................... 261 5 LOG Trend
................................................................................................................................... 267 6 XY Trend
Part XX String Editor
276
................................................................................................................................... 276 1 String Construction
Part XXI Using Multiple Language
283
................................................................................................................................... 283 1 Multiple Language setup
7 Contents
7
................................................................................................................................... 286 2 Multiple language string display
................................................................................................................................... 288
3 Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by
using multiple language table)
Part XXII Network Data Server
295
................................................................................................................................... 295 1 Data Definition in Xpanel
................................................................................................................................... 296 2 The Configuration of CIMON SCADA
Part XXIII Security
302
................................................................................................................................... 302 1 User Registration
................................................................................................................................... 304 2 Access Privilege
................................................................................................................................... 306 3 User LogOn / LogOff
Part XXIV Script
309
................................................................................................................................... 309 1 Structure of Program
................................................................................................................................... 313 2 Operator
................................................................................................................................... 315 3 Scripts for command and condition
................................................................................................................................... 317 4 Statements
.......................................................................................................................................................... 318 IF-ELSE Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 318 WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 319 FOR Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 319 SWITCH-CASE Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 320 GOTO Statement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 320 CONTINUE Keyword
.......................................................................................................................................................... 321 RETURN Keyword
.......................................................................................................................................................... 322 RUNSCRIPT Keyword
................................................................................................................................... 322 5 Internal Functions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 327 PageOpen(S1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 327 FrameOpen(S1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 328 StringTable(R1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 328 GetTime(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 329 TimeStr(R1, S2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 329 RunApp(S1, S2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 330 MakeCsv(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 331 MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 331 MakeLogCsv(S1,R2,R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 332 DataLog(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 333 RcpDownload(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 333 RcpUpload(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 334 RcpStop(S1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 334 RcpFileStore(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 335 RcpFileRead(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 335 RcpMemDown(S1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 335 RcpMemUp(S1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 336 RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337 RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 338 RcpConfig()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 339 TrendCsvWr(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 340 ScrCapture(S1, R2)
CIMON-Xpanel 8
.......................................................................................................................................................... 341 Sleep(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 341 HardCopy()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 341 OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 342 ClosePort(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 343 SendByte(R1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 343 SendString(R1, S2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 344 ReceiveByte(R1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 345 StrToNum(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 346 NumToStr(R1 , R2 , S3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 347 LogOn(S1, S2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 348 LogOff()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 348 LogOnWin()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 349 GetSecurity()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 349 OpenConfigWin()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 350 SoftKeyboard(R1,R2,R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 351 AlarmPrint(R1,R2,R3,R4,R5)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 352 AlarmCsvWr(R1,S2,R3,R4,R5)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 353 TouchCalib()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 354 ClearAlarmLog(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 354 AddMessage(R1, S2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 355 RemoveMessage(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 355 RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 356 RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 357 GetSysMem(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 358 SysMemMove (R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 359 SysMemFill(R1,R2,R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 359 LcdBrightUp()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 359 LcdBrightDown()
.......................................................................................................................................................... 360 LcdBacklight(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 360 StaticBeepCtrl(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 361 SetSpeed(R1)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 361 SetDate(R1,R2,R3)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 361 SetTime(R1)
Part XXV Scroll Message
364
................................................................................................................................... 365 1 Scroll Message Configuration
................................................................................................................................... 366 2 Apply Scroll Message
Part XXVI Indirect Address
371
................................................................................................................................... 372 1 Using Indirect Tag
Part XXVII Communication Driver
378
................................................................................................................................... 379 1 ASIC Protocol
................................................................................................................................... 385 2 Barcode Scanner
................................................................................................................................... 390 3 Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300
................................................................................................................................... 402 4 DELTA TAU PMAC
................................................................................................................................... 408 5 HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P
................................................................................................................................... 417 6 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)
................................................................................................................................... 425 7 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)
9 Contents
9
................................................................................................................................... 433 8 KDT Systems Xpanel Master
................................................................................................................................... 439 9 Keyence KV Mode
................................................................................................................................... 444 10 KOYO DirectNet
................................................................................................................................... 449 11 LSIS GLOFA Cnet
................................................................................................................................... 457 12 LSIS GLOFA Enet
................................................................................................................................... 464 13 LSIS GLOFA Loader
................................................................................................................................... 469 14 LSIS XGT Cnet
................................................................................................................................... 477 15 LSIS XGT Enet
................................................................................................................................... 484 16 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
................................................................................................................................... 489 17 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
................................................................................................................................... 495 18 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
................................................................................................................................... 501 19 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet
................................................................................................................................... 509 20 LSIS Inverter Starvert
................................................................................................................................... 513 21 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500
................................................................................................................................... 516 22 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)
................................................................................................................................... 526 23 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)
................................................................................................................................... 531 24 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
................................................................................................................................... 537 25 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII
................................................................................................................................... 543 26 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)
................................................................................................................................... 548 27 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series
................................................................................................................................... 553 28 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)
................................................................................................................................... 558 29 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)
................................................................................................................................... 566 30 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)
................................................................................................................................... 571 31 MODBUS RTU protocl
................................................................................................................................... 576 32 MODBUS TCP protocl
................................................................................................................................... 581 33 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)
................................................................................................................................... 586 34 OMRON HostLink
................................................................................................................................... 592 35 SAIA S-BUS
................................................................................................................................... 600 36 SIEMENS RK512/3964R
................................................................................................................................... 605 37 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
................................................................................................................................... 610 38 SIEMENS S7 MPI
................................................................................................................................... 616 39 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct
................................................................................................................................... 623 40 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link
................................................................................................................................... 631 41 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet
................................................................................................................................... 639 42 ALLENBRADLEY DF1
................................................................................................................................... 645 43 METRONIX APD
................................................................................................................................... 654 44 FARA N70/700 PLUS
................................................................................................................................... 658 45 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series
CIMON-Xpanel 10
Part XXVIII FAQ
665
................................................................................................................................... 665 1 Xpanel Page Update and Speed
................................................................................................................................... 670 2 Xpanel IP Setting
................................................................................................................................... 675 3 How to use Xpanel Printer
................................................................................................................................... 680
4 How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port
under Windows Vista?
................................................................................................................................... 681
5 How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my
device?
................................................................................................................................... 683
6 How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft
Excel or other 3rd vender program?
................................................................................................................................... 685 7 Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download
................................................................................................................................... 688 8 When Ethernet Loader is not operated
Index 698
Foreword
This is just another title page
placed between table of
contents and topics
11 Foreword
Top Level Intro
This page is printed before a
new top-level chapter starts
Part
I
Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel 13
1 Welcome to CIMON-Xpanel
CIMON-Xpanel Windows CE based New Touch
Embedding-High perfomance
mobile CPU (PXA255 400MHz)
High color graphic display
(65536 colors)
Various external data
interfaces (USB, SD memory)
The best HMI panel for various
industrial automation
applications
Powerful device
communication : 1 Ethernet, 2
RS232/RS422/RS485
Sufficient internal memory for
large scale HMI system
High resolution 4wire resistive
touch screen
Xpanel Designer Easy and powerful design tool
Fast data downloading by USB
Supports high color graphic image(up to 16 bits)
Supports animation GIF format
Frame function provides easy solution for simultaneous displaying multiple monitoring pages
Tag database can be exported (imported) to (from) MS EXCEL
Alarm function supports acknowledge mechanism and historical reviewing of designated group
Provides various graphic wizard object which make easy to link TAG and graphic object
Logged data by data-logger function can be visualized by trend object
Provides C-style script language and various embedded sub-routines for flexible design
See :
Installation Guide
SYSTEM Overview
Data Logger
Recipe
Network Data Server
Security
CIMON-Xpanel 14
Configuration Tools
Xpanel Designer
TAG Database
Graphic Page Editor
System Memory
Trend
String Editor
Using Multiple Language
Script
Communication Driver
FAQ
Top Level Intro
Part
II
CIMON-Xpanel 16
2 XPanelDesigner Update : V2.10
The new version of XPanelDesigner was released on 9th March.
This version of XPanelDesigner includes new features of the following.
Cross Reference window enhanced to display tag address.
Added project convert function.
Added new Script function (SetDate, SetTime).
Complement function the alarm to remove log.
Complement function to check error of Alarm log file.
Communication Driver
n
Added BLDC Motor controller communication driver
n
Improved performance Modbus Rtu communication driver
n
Improved performance DASA iM-Sigma communication driver
[Cross Reference]
Cross reference window modified to display tag address.

XPanelDesigner Update : V2.10 17
[Project convert]
Between Xpanel , project converting function added.
When project convert, Source project is backed up by another name

[Script]
Added script function to change date and time in Xpanel.

CIMON-Xpanel 18
n
SetDate(2010,2,8) : Xpanel date will be changed February 8, 2010.
n
SetTime(10,20,30) : Xpanel time will be changed 10:20:30.
[Alarm]
Four kind function to remove alarm log have been added.

n
Clear all log message ,except it is not recovery state. (num0 key action)
n
Clear all recovery state message. (num1 key action)
n
Clear all acknowledged state message, except it is not recovery state (num2 key
action)
n
Clear all occurred state message, except it is not recovery state (num3 key action)
Complement function to check error of Alarm log file.

[Communication Driver]
Added BLDC Motor controller communication driver

.
Improved performance Modbus Rtu communication driver

.
Improved performance DASA iM-Sigma communication driver

.
Top Level Intro
Part
III
CIMON-Xpanel 20
3 Ethernet Loader
Ethernet loder is an embedded program in xpanel to up/download projects via enthernet and support
the project update with an USB.
3.1 How to use Ethernet Loader
Xpanel IP Setting
Touch the new setting parts of (1).
Delete contents by the key BS of (2) and
input others to change using number key.
Click the [Apply this new setting] of (3).
Project Update
Click - [Online] -> [Copy Project To
Removable Memory]
(Refer to the manual "How to download the
project")
Connect this USB to Xpanel.
Click - [Update project from removable
storage] .
"Project Update" is displayed.
Ethernet Loader 21
Click - [Refresh]
Project list is displayed to (4).
Click the Project of (4) and [Project update]
of (3).
Project Update content is displayed to (5).
The massage [All file update: OK] is displayed
as it completes.
Close the page [Project update] by clicking
X
Remove the USB and practice the Project
update into the Xpanel.
Watchdog
It is a function to automatically reset the software when project data is failure.
It is supported the enthernet loader 1.4 version. Download the xpaneldesigner v2.10 version or late.

Click the [Confige] to Ethernet Loader.
Check-mark the [Watchdog Time(Sec)]
checkbox.
When you change the set time, choose (3)
and change it using the buttons Up and Down of
(4). Its range is from 10 to 65535.
Click the [OK] to Confige.
CIMON-Xpanel 22
3.2 How to update Ethernet Loader
3.2.1 V2.10
Only in online ( USB, Ethernet)
1. Practice the XpanelDesigner V2.10.
2. Open a project or make a new project.
3. Click - [Online]-> [Setup Link]
4. Click - [Online]-> [UpgradeXPANEL Application Program]
5. Move to Xpanel as it completes
6. Close the project on the page Xpanel Config if it is running.
Ethernet Loader 23
7. Close the Ethernet Loader.
8. Two touchthe [My Device]of this screen.
9. Two touchthe [Xpanel]
CIMON-Xpanel 24
10. Two touchthe [Bin]file.
11. Touch the [Eldr.exe]file. [Edit]-> [Copy].
Ethernet Loader 25
12. Move to the 'Xpanel' by .
CIMON-Xpanel 26
13. [ Edi t ] -> [Paste]. Touch the "Yes" in the [ConfirmFile Replace].
14. Practice Ethernet loader.
15. Check its version for a normal update.
Top Level Intro
Part
IV
CIMON-Xpanel 28
4 Installation Guide
Read the manual before you operate the Xpanel.
Xpanel Installation Guide
Essential Safaty Precautions
General Safety Precautions
Package Contents
Specification
Installation / Dimensions
Interfaces
Wiring
Developing Environment Setup
4.1 Essential Safaty Precautions

WARNING

System Design
Do not create Xpanel graphic objects that could possibly endanger the safety of equipment and personnel.
Damaged Xpanel provides signal output ON or OFF continuously, can cause an major accident. We
recommend you to design the monitoring circuits by limit
switch to detect incorrect device movement.
Do not create the Xpanel graphic objects to control the safe operation of device (Such as an emergency
stop).
The switches to control the safe operation of device should be installed separately.
Design your system properly to remove communication function error between the Xpanel and the
controller of a device.
Do not use the Xpanel as a warning device for critical alarms that can cause serious operator injury,
machine damage or production stoppage.
Xpanel is not appropriate to use in places require extremely high stability and reliability such as aircraft
Installation Guide 29
control device, aerospace equipments, central trunk data transmission (communication) devices, unclear
power control devices, or medical life support equipment.
Proper stability and reliability are especially required for medical usages and that system should be
designed to alternate or replacement except transportation vehicles (trains, cars and ships), diaster and
crime prevention devices, various type of safety equipment, non-life support related medical devices, etc.
Even if the backlight of the Xpanel burns out, the Xpanel is still operating in device. If operator touched the
front panel without this concern, the device meght be failure and cause malfunction. For this reason, we do
not recommend the use of Xpanel graphic objects to control device such as emergency stop switches for
prohibiting the accident or device damage.
Whe LCD backlight suddenly turns off, please follow the procedure to confirm whether the backlight was
burned out.
Step1. Check the "standby Mode On" set and screen for images.
Step2. LCD touch available on the screen against set "standby Mode On" running.
Installation
Please do not disassemble Xpanel. An electric shock can happen when the high-voltage goes through
inside.
Please do not modify the Xpanel unit, It cause fire or electric shock.
Do not use the Xpanel at place flammable gases, It causes explosion.
Wiring
To prevent an electric shock, confirm that the power certainly turned-off from Xpanel for connecting
others.
Do not use power beyond the specified voltage range of the Xpanel. Doing so may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
Maintenance
The Xpanel uses a lithium battery to back up the internal clock data. If the battery is incorrectly built-in,
then the battery exploded.
To prevent this, please do not replace the battery by yourself. When the battery needs to be replaced,
please contact your local service center.
CAUTIONS

CIMON-Xpanel 30

Installation
Be sure to securely connect all cable connectors to the Xpanel. A loose connection may cause incorrect
input or output.
Wiring
Ground the FG line of the Xpanel separately from FG lines of other units. Putting these FG lines too
close may cause an electric shock or unit malfunction.
Be sure to use a grounding resistance of 100 or less and a 2 or thicker wire, or applicable standard
of your country.
Correctly wire the Xpanel, be sure that the rated voltage and terminal layout are within the designated
range. If the voltage supplied differs
from the rated voltage, or incorrect wiring or grounding is performed, it may cause a fire or unit
malfunction.
Use only the designated torque to tighten terminal block screws of the Xpanel.
If these screws are not tightened firmly, it may cause a short circuit, fire or Xpanel malfunction.
Be careful that the metal filings and wiring debris do not fall into the Xpanel, since they can cause a fire,
Xpanel malfunction or incorrect operation.
Maintenance
The LCD contains a powerful irritant and if for any reason the panel is damaged and this liquid contacts
any part of your body, be sure to wash
that area with running water for 15 minutes. If any of this liquid enters your eye, flush your eye for 15
minutes with running water and contact a physician.
Unit Disposal
When this unit is disposed of, it should be done so according to your country s regulation for similar
types of industrial waste.
4.2 General Safety Precautions
1. Do not strike the touch panel with a hard or pointed object, or press on the touch panel with too much
force,
since it may damage the touch panel or the display.

2. Do not install the Xpanel where the ambient temperature can exceed the allowed range.
Doing so may cause the Xpanel to malfunction or shorten its operation life.

3. Do not restrict or limit naturally occurring rear-face ventilation of the Xpanel, or storing or using the Xpanel
in an
environment that is too hot.

4. Do not use the Xpanel in areas where large, sudden temperature changes can occur.
These changes can cause condensation to form inside the unit, possibly causing the unit to malfunction.

5. Do not allow water, liquids, metal or charged particles to enter inside the Xpanel, since they can cause
either a Xpanel malfunction
or an electrical shock. The allowable pollution degree is 2.

6. Do not store or use the Xpanel in direct sunlight, or in excessively dusty or dirty environments.

7. Do not store or use the Xpanel where strong jolting or excessive vibration can occur.

8. Do not store or use the Xpanel where chemicals (such as organic solvents, etc.) and acids can evaporate,
or where chemicals and acids are present in the air.

9. Do not use paint thinner or organic solvents to clean the Xpanel.

10. Do not store or operate the LCD display in areas receiving direct sunlight, since the sun's UV rays may cause
the LCD display s
quality to deteriorate.

11. If you store the Xpanel in areas where the temperature is lower than allowed level, the liquid of the LCD will
congeal and the LCD can
be damage. Conversely, if the storage area s temperature becomes higher than the allowed level, the liquid
of the LCD will become
isotropic, causing irreversible damage to the LCD. Therefore, be sure to store the panel only in areas where
temperatures are within
those specified in this manual.

12. After turning the Xpanel OFF, be sure to wait a few seconds before turning it ON again. If the Xpanel started
too soon,
CIMON-Xpanel 32
it may not start up correctly.

13. Due to the possibility of unexpected accidents, you must back up the project data of the Xpanel regularly.
4.3 Package Contents
The following items are contained in the package of the Xpanel.
Before using the Xpanel, please confirm that all items listed here are present.
Xpanel Unit Fastener: 8 ea
5P Connector (XT05,XT06,XT10,XT12) Installation Guide
CD Power Plug (XT04 & XT07)
v This unit has been carefully packed, with special attention to quality.
However, should you find anything damaged or missing, please contact your local Xpanel distributor
immediately.
4.4 Specification
[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]
Model CM-XT12CB-A CM-XT10CB-A
CM-XT10CB-
D
CM-XT07CB-D CM-XT06CB-A
CM-XT06CB-
D
LCD SIZE 12.1 inch 10.1 inch 7 inch Wide 6.5 inch
LCD TYPE TFT Color TFT Color TFT Color TFT Color
Colors 262K Colors 262K Colors 16.7M Colors 65,536 Colors
Resolution SVGA 800600 SVGA 800600 WVGA 800480 VGA 640480
Backlight CCFL CCFL LED CCFL
Luminance 400 cd / 400 cd / 350 cd / 400 cd /
Touch Panel 4 wire registive 4 wire registive 4 wire registive 4 wire registive
Memory 128MB SDRAM 128MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM
storage 1 GB 1 GB 32MB Flash 32MB Flash
COM1 RS-232/422/485 RS-232/422/485 RS-232 RS-232
COM2 RS-232 RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-422/485
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T
USB Host 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port
Tool port None None 1 USB Device 1 USB Device
SD CARD 1 Solt 1 Solt 1 Solt None
Rated Voltage AC100~240V AC100~240V DC24V DC24V AC100~240V DC24V
Power
Consumption
20W 19W 6W 8W
OS Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0
Dimension(mm) 33025083 28022047 18512750 20615661
Panel Cut(mm) 319239 267207 177119 192142
Model
CM-XT05SB-A
CM-XT05MB-
A
CM-XT04CA-D+LAN CM-XT04CA-D
CM-XT05SB-D
CM-XT05MB-
D
LCD SIZE 5.7 Inch 4.3 inch wide
LCD TYPE Color STN Mono TFT Color
Colors 256 Colors 16 shaded 16.7M colors
Resolution QVGA 320 240 WQVGA 480 272
Backlight LED LCD
Luminance 350 cd / 200 cd / 300 cd /
Touch Panel 4 wire registive 4 wire registive
CIMON-Xpanel 34
Memory 64MB SDRAM 64MB SDRAM
storage 32MB Flash 32MB Flash
COM1 RS-232 RS-232
COM2 RS-422/485 RS-422/485
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T 10/100 Base-T None
USB Host 1 Port 1 Port
Tool port 1 USB device 1 USB device
SD CARD None None
Rated Voltage -A : AC100~240V / -D: DC24V DC24V
Power
Consumption
6W 4W
OS Windows CE 5.0 Windows CE 5.0
Dimension(mm) 20615661 12810250
Panel Cut(mm) 192142 12094
4.5 Installation / Dimensions
[XT12CB / XT10CB / XT07CB / XT06CB / XT05SB / XT05MB / XT04CA ]


CIMON-Xpanel 36

4.6 Interfaces

XT10/ XT12 - COM1 : RS-232C

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable.
When you use COM1 RS-232C port, you must not use COM1 RS-485/422 port.
Connector Pin No Name Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RD Receive Data
3 TD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 SG Signal Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request To Send
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Ring Indicator

XT10/XT12 - COM1 : RS-422/485

This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-422/485 cable.
When you use COM1 RS-422/485 port, you must not use COM1 RS-232C port.
CIMON-Xpanel 38
1 RDB Receive Data B
2 RDA Receive Data A
3 GND Ground
4 SDB Send Data B
5 SDA Send Data A
If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire), you must connect SDA and SDB lines.
The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode. To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit,
be sure to connect the SG terminal.
XT10/XT12 - COM2 : RS-232C

XT10A and XT12A series units have this interface.
This interface is used to connect the Xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C cable. You can use pin 2, 3,
5 of this interface.
1
2 RD Receive Data
3 TD Transmit Data
4
5 SG Signal Ground
6
7
8
9
The serial port of the Xpanel is not isolated. When the host(PLC) unit is also not isolated.
Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each
other.
When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop is
created when you setup the system.
XT04/ XT07 COM1 : RS-232C / COM2 : RS-422/485
This interface is used to connect the xpanel to the host (PLC), via an RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable. COM1
and COM2 shares pins of one 9 DSUB connector.
If you connect the Xpanel to the host via an RS-485 cable (2wire) you must connect SDA and SDB lines.
The RS-485 of the Xpanel runs under auto toggle mode.
To reduce the risk of damaging the RS-422 circuit, be sure to connect the SG terminal.

Ethernet

This interface complies with the IEEE802.3 for Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX).
RJ45 Connector RJ45 Jack

Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB
Cable No Color Color No Cable
1 Orange/W Orange/W 1
2 Orange Orange 2
3 Green/W Green/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Green 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8

CIMON-Xpanel 40
Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host
1 Orange/W Green/W 1
2 Orange Green 2
3 Green/W Orange/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Orange 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8

4.7 Wiring
WARNINGS
To avoid an electric shock, when connecting the Xpanel power cord terminals to the power terminal
block,
confirm that the Xpanel power supply is completely turned OFF, via a breaker, or similar unit.
Since there is no power switch on the Xpanel unit, be sure to attach a breaker-type switch to its power
cord.
Point
To avoid a short caused by loose ring terminals, be sure to use ring terminals with an
insulating sleeve.
When the FG terminal is connected, be sure the wire is grounded.
Not grounding the Xpanel unit will result in excess noise and vibration.
Connecting the Xpanel Power Cord
When connecting the power cord, be sure to follow the procedures given below.
Confirm that the Power Cord is unplugged from the power supply.
Unscrew the screws from the middle three (3) terminals, align the Ring Terminals and re-attach the
screws.
Point
Confirm that the ring terminal wires are connected correctly.
The torque required to tighten these screws is 0.5 to 0.6 N m.
Power Supply Caution
Please pay special attention to the following instructions when connecting the power cord terminals to the
Xpanel unit.
If the power supply voltage exceeds the GP's specified range, connect a voltage transformer.
Between the line and the ground, be sure to use a low noise power supply. If there is still an excessive
amount of noise, connect a noise reducing transformer.
The power supply cord should not be bundled with or kept close to main circuit lines (high voltage,
high current), or input/output signal lines.
Connect a surge absorber to handle power surges.
To reduce noise, make the power cord as short as possible.
Grounding Caution
When grounding to the rear face FG terminal of the Xpanel, (on the Power Input Terminal Block), be sure
to create an exclusive ground.
Inside the Xpanel unit, the SG (Signal Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals are connected to each
other.
When connecting an external device to the Xpanel with the SG terminal, ensure that no short-circuit loop
is created when you setup the system.
4.8 Developing Environment Setup

Install XpanelDesigner

Following procedure assumes that the XPanelDesigner was installed first.
You can find the setup program of XPanelDesigner in CD or internet web page ( http://www.kdtsys.com/ )

ActiveSync Setup

Install ActiveSync using afforded CD when you purchased Xpanel. If you lost afforded CD, you can
download it by internet.
You can do installation as the following figure.
CIMON-Xpanel 42

If you could see the dialog box above, then select Next .

Click the check box as the above figure, then select Next .

Input User Name and Organization in the blank and then select Next .

Select Destination Folder in your hard disc, and then select Next .
CIMON-Xpanel 44

If you could see the dialog box above, then select Finish and then restart your computer.

Install the Device Driver

Connect the XPanel unit and PC with USB cable after installation of ActiveSync. And then, you have to
reboot the Xpanel.
If it was the first time connecting with Xpanel then your PC requires device driver configuration as shown in
the following dialog box.

Select Check button as the above figure then Next .

Insert CD provided with XPanel unit, and then select Next .
If you don t have CD, then you can choose the location of device driver manually as shown in the following
dialog box.
This assumes that XPanelDesigner was installed in your PC already.
CIMON-Xpanel 46

Give the location as shown in the above dialog box. Typically, the device driver can be found in C:
\Program Files\XPanel\XPanel_Driver folder.

If the device was searched successfully, then the above dialog box would be shown. Click the Finish
button.

Connect the Xpanel unit and PC with USB cable

Whenever your computer or XPanel was restarted, you would see the following dialog box.

Select check button as above the figure and then select Next .
Then you can see as the following figure it means ActiveSync installation success.

Top Level Intro
Part
V
SYSTEM Overview 49
5 SYSTEM Overview
Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals.
Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.
Xpanel Designer is a free software. It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as
Windows XP.
Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.
System Overview
Peripherals
Network
Xpanel Designer
Xpanel Unit
5.1 Peripherals

Xpanel supports various kinds of peripherals. For those peripheral connection, Xpanel provides following
interfaces :

USB Client This interface is used for Xpanel Designer interface. By using this port, all configuration
data files including the
screen drawings can be up and downloaded. Xpanel Designer software is a free software.
CIMON-Xpanel 50
It is provided by CD
and can be downloaded through the internet. (http://www.kdtsys.com)
Xpanel Designer is a Microsoft Windows based software. And for connection with Xpanel, it
uses another software on
PC, the Microsoft ActiveSync. The ActiveSync is provided by CD, but also can be
downloaded from Microsoft web sites.
USB Host This interface can be used for many kinds of peripherals such as printers, memory sticks,
barcode scanners and
keyboards. For connection of multiple of them, the USB hub can be utilized.
SD/MMC
Memory Slot
SD/MMC memory slot can be used for storage expansion and/or upgrading project files.
The Xpanel provides standard 8MB internal flash memory. If this storage was not enough
for storing all project data
files, external SD/MMC or USB memory can be used.
Xpanel detects SD/MMC or USB memory automatically. And if there are required folder and
files in external memory,
Xpanel will load the project files from that external memory at startup. In this case, the
project files of internal flash
memory will be ignored.
5.2 Network

Xpanel supports not only 1:1 network but also multi-drop topology.
And more, Xpanel can communicate with several different devices and networks on the same time.

SYSTEM Overview 51
Ethernet
Communication
Port
Ethernet communication facility of Xpanel is used in various purposes.
The main usage of Ethernet port is for communicating with devices. Many different kinds
of devices can be linked with
Xpanel in the same network at the same time.Other usage of Ethernet is network with
SCADA system. Xpanel can be
a data server for SCADA on Ethernet. The OPC server will be provided free. And one
more usage of Ethernet is file
sharing with PCs which are located in the same network. Xpanel supports the MS
Windows network.
That means the Xpanel can access the shared files of PCs on Windows network. This
functionality is very useful when
exporting the CSV formatted file from Xpanel.
RS232C
(RS422/485)
Communication
Port
Xpanel provides a standard RS232C/RS422/485 communication port.
And the mode (RS232C or RS422/485) of port is switched by only software configuration.
This port supports full signal lines for standard modem connection.
Additional
RS232C
Communication
Port
Xpanel provides additional one RS232C port. This port supports null modem connection.
5.3 Xpanel Designer
Xpanel Designer is a free software.
It can be run on the standard Microsoft Windows platform such as Windows XP.
By using Xpanel Designer, following works can be carried out :

Device
Configuration
According to the connected devices, all the communication parameters can be configured
such as communication
media, port, baudrate, station number etc. Every configured devices on network are given
it s own name, and this
name will be used in TAG database configuration.
TAG Database The TAG is the basic unit of data processing in Xpanel. Three types of TAGs are provided
according to the data type.
The first type of TAG is the digital TAG. Digital TAG represents two different states and
can be used for general 1 bit
input or output point of the device. The second type of TAG is the analog TAG. This type
of TAG represents a number.
A number can be a binary word, BCD or floating point value and some additional data
processing can be accomplished on this type of TAG such as scaling.
Any type of TAG could be assigned a physical address of device. This kind if TAG is
called as 'Real TAG' and Xpanel unit polls the value of this TAG from device by
communication, when it is needed. A TAG which is not assigned the physical address of
CIMON-Xpanel 52
device is called as 'Virtual TAG'. Virtual TAG is used for internal data calculation, script
programming and string data manipulation.
Screen Editor Xpanel Designer provides it s own graphic editor. It is an object based graphic editor.
Each graphic object can be configured with some animation controls. There are many
kinds of animation controls
supported such as blinking, visualizing, coloring, moving, rotating, digitizing, zooming and
more.
These all animations are triggered by the value of designated TAG in Xpanel unit.
The Xpanel provides abundant graphic libraries and supports true type fonts, also.
Script
Programming
Xpanel provides C style script language of it s own.
This script language supports inherent C language keywords such as switch-case
statement.
And more, Xpanel unit provides priority controlled multi-threading environment for that
script program.
This script language can be used not only for data processing but also for device control.
Xpanel
Unit Upgrade
Every Xpanel Designer releases have it s own version of binary files for Xpanel unit. And
when connected first time
with Xpanel unit, the Xpanel Designer detects the version of Xpanel unit, and if needed,
upgrade the binary files in
Xpanel unit automatically.
Xpanel Designer provides a tool for making memory image of SD/MMC or USB. This
image includes project folders
and files for Xpanel unit. On start-up, Xpanel unit searches this image in external memory.
If it was found, Xpanel unit
uses this image as a project data, and the one in internal flash memory will be ignored.
This is useful when a user do
not want to use a PC or notebook for project data update. The user can change the
configuration or the design of
screen with a memory card only.
Configure
Other
Functions
Xpanel provides many special functions for Xpanel application such as data logger, alarm,
trend, recipe and
network service. All these functions can be configured in Xpanel Designer.
5.4 Xpanel Unit
Xpanel unit always searches a project files for execution at start up.
Following diagram shows the order of that search. If the project files are found at one of three locations, Xpanel
unit load those project files to execute.
SYSTEM Overview 53

After the loading of project files, all configured tasks are executed concurrently.
The task execution in an Xpanel unit is performed by time-sharing and multi-threading with priority.
Graphic processing and file manipulation in Xpanel are processed by time sharing. But, almost other tasks
are executed by means of multi-threading.
The priority based multi-threading makes it possible to process real-time data. Communication and script are
good examples for priority based multi-threaded task.
On the other hand, Xpanel provides some tools for maintenance during runtime. These tools can be
visualized by three step touch screen operations.
Following picture shows these operations of touch screen.

After these touch operations, a dialog box will be appeared on screen and you can see the following
services for maintenance.

System Log An Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime.
This service makes you can see those logged messages.
Comm.
Monitor
Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be visualized with this
service.
Comm.
Port
Configuration
Communication parameters can be configured by this service.
IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the
dialog box, and can be
changed by common control interfaces of Windows.
CIMON-Xpanel 54
Misc.
Configurations
LCD backlight and beep sound can be configured by this service.
Touch
Calibration
This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.
Clock Setting The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.
Software
Keyboard
The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface. This service visualizes or hides the
software keyboard on screen.
Xpanel
Shutdown
This service shutdowns the Xpanel program on Xpanel unit.
Suspend This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.
When the IP address is changed, this service must be activated. After the system
shutdown, the system
will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned off and on again
for system restart.

Top Level Intro
Part
VI
CIMON-Xpanel 56
6 Configuration Tools
Xpanel provides several online configuration tools.
The configuration tools can be visualized by pressing three corners of touch area as shown in left picture.

After pressing each corner one by one, the following dialog box is popped up. All the configuration tools are
shown in this dialog box.
System Log
Comm Monitor
Comm. Config
Misc. Config
Touch Calibrate
Screen Capture
Date/Time
SW Keyboard
Printer
System Shoutdown
Exit
6.1 System Log : System Activity Log
The Xpanel logs the system activities in memory during its runtime. This service makes you can see those
logged messages.
Configuration Tools 57
6.2 Comm. Monitor : Communication Frame Monitor
Communication frames between the Xpanel and devices can be monitored with this service.
Start / Pause Starts or pauses the communication frame logging job.
The frame marked as [ TX] is the frame transmitted from Xpanel.
And the frame marked as [ RX] is the frame received from a device.
Clear Clears all logged frame from the list.
ASCII / BIN Sets the data coding format of the frame. When the ASCII format is chosen, only the data
between 20h to 7Fh
are displayed correctly. Other data will be seen as broken character. And when the BIN
CIMON-Xpanel 58
format is chosen,
all the data is displayed in hexa-decimal number.
Resize Changes the window size. Xpanel provides two differently sized windows.
One is full-window sized and the other is small sized window.
(The small sized window is the best fitting size for 5.6 inch LCD)
6.3 Comm. Config : Communication Port Configruation
Communication parameters can be configured by this service.
IP address, baudrate and other parameters of communication port are listed on the dialog box, and can be
changed by common control
interfaces of Windows. When the Comm. Config tool is activated, following dialog box is popped up.
First of all, the communication port to be configured must be selected. As shown in the above picture, the
operator can select one of ports being used.
The port combo-box lists the names of device which are registered in current project.
Serial Port (COM1 / COM2)

When a serial device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.
All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.

Xpanel s COM1 port can be used for three kinds of network type. Available network types are RS232C,
RS422A and RS485.
One of them can be chosen by using this tool as shown in right-hand picture of above.
The actual terminal block for COM1 is decided according to this configuration.
The modem parameters are prepared for special purpose application. It is dependent on the
communication driver used.
Following pictures shows the parameters for dial-up modem application.

Ethernet Port

When an Ethernet device is chosen for port configuration, following parameters can be configured.
All the parameter modifications are applied immediately to the current running project.
CIMON-Xpanel 60

But for storing the new configuration permanently, "System Shutdown" is needed. Refer to the section
11 of this chapter.
Another Method for Ethernet Configuration

The standard WinCE operating system provides another way to configure Ethernet. It can be done in
desktop window.
The desktop window can be accessed only when the Xpanel program is closed.
For closing the Xpanel program, use the Exit button. (The Exit button is described in the section 12 of
this chapter)
1. First of all, execute and put a software keyboard on the desktop window.
This keyboard will be used during the network configuration. For doing this, make the task bar visible
as shown in the following picture.

2. Execute the software keyboard by touching the icon at the right corner of the task bar, and select
LargeKB menu.
The software keyboard will be popped up as shown in following picture.
3. The next step is executing the LAN configuration tool. Follow the icons listed below, started from the
desktop window.

The setting dialog box of above can be accessed by the software keyboard which is prepared at the
previous step.
CIMON-Xpanel 62
4. For storing the network settings permanently, it is needed to suspend the operating system.
This can be done by the Suspend menu of Start tool as shown in the following picture.

6.4 Misc. Config : Miscellaneous Configurations
LCD backlight
OFF
It provides a sleeping function for LCD backlight.
The time span is based on the unit of minute. If there is no touch operation during this
time span,
the backlight of LCD is turned off automatically. The backlight will be turned on when there
is any touch operation.
Mouse cursor
enable
Mouse cursor display is dependent on this option. This option is effective only on the
following version of OS and XpanelDesigner.
OS : V1.15
XpanelDesigner ; V1.30
LCD Brightness Operator can control the LCD brightness by this function. Up to 32 brightness levels are
provided by hardware. This function is supported by following version of OS.
OS : V1.17
6.5 Touch Calibrate : Touch Panel Calibration
Touch
Calilbrate
This service provides a chance to calibrate touch panel of Xpanel.
Follow the instruction message shown at the top of the screen.
Point
For storing the new calibration data permanently, System Shutdown is needed. Refer to the section 11 of
this chapter.
If the System Shutdown was not executed, the new calibration data will be discarded and the previous one
will be restored
when the system is restarted.
CIMON-Xpanel 64
6.6 Screen Capture : Make a Screen Snapshot
Screen Capture This service makes a screen capture file of current display. Generated file has bitmap
(BMP) formatted file and located in the "\ Xpanel \ " folder. File name is given automatically,
and has following format which is derived
from clock.
6.7 Date/Time : Adjust the System Clock
Date / Time The real time clock can be adjusted by this service.
6.8 SW Keyboard : Pops-Up the Software Keyboard
Date / Time The Xpanel has a software keyboard interface.
This button visualizes or hides the software keyboard on screen. Following picture shows
the software keyboard.
For removing the software keyboard from screen, use the SW Keyboard button again.
6.9 Printer : Printer Setup
Printer Xpanel supports the PCL. The laser or inkjet type printers supporting PCL can be
connected with Xpanel through the USB or network.
CIMON-Xpanel 66
Point
For storing the setup permanently, System Shutdown is needed after this setup procedure. Refer to the
section 11 of this chapter.
If the System Shutdown was not executed, the setup data will be discarded and the previous one will be
restored when the system is restarted.
Print Configuration Dialog Box

Following picture shows the print configuration dialog box.
Printer Select the type of connected printer. The type can be one of PCL Inkjet or PCL Laser .
Port Select a port where the printer is connected.
USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel though the USB host port,
select the " LPT1:" The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed only when
the printer is connected.
Network Printer : If a printer can be reached through the network,
select the " Network". In this case, the Net Path field must be configured as
following example.
Format \ \ PC_name\ Pri nt er_name
Example \ \ ki m40\ canoni r 2
The software keyboard would be needed for setting the network path.
The software keyboard can be shown by SW Keyboard service. Please refer to the
previous section
(section 11 : SW Keyboard) of this chapter.
Network Printer Logon

If the Port is chosen as Network , the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up
following logon dialog box.
Enter the authorized user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push the button
in title bar.
Xpanel will pop up following dialog box.
If Yes is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.
Otherwise (in case of No ), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.
How to print a screen?

Xpanel provides the HardCopy() function for printing the screen image. The HardCopy() function is
explained in the Script chapter.
CIMON-Xpanel 68
An example which prints a screen image by a touch operation is provided in this section.
For printing a screen, a touch object should be declared in the graphic page.
This touch object must have the property of Command Expression style and ' HardCopy()' function has to
be declared in its Command input field.
Previous picture shows the situation of configuration with the Xpanel Designer.
Following picture is a snapshot of the Xpanel online screen. Assume that this screen is configured as
described above.
When the operator touches the Screen Print object, the Xpanel prints current displaying screen out.
The operator will be notified the successful printing by following pop-up dialog box, some seconds after.

6.10 System Shutdown
System
shutdown
This service shutdowns the operating system of Xpanel unit.
The system shutdown must be done when there is a change in one of following items.
Ethernet Port Configurations (IP address, Subnet Mask and/or Gateway)
Touch Calibration
Printer Setup
After the system shutdown, the system will not be restarted automatically. The external power must be turned
off and on again for system restart.
Point
CIMON-Xpanel 70
This has the same effect with the Suspend function of Start menu in desktop
window.
6.11 Exit
Exit This service exits the Xpanel program and return to the desktop window as shown in
following picture.
In this desktop window, following jobs can be performed.
File system manipulation with explorer
Some system configurations with control panel (clock, network etc.)
System status checking. (disk and memory status etc.)
To execute the Xpanel again, double touch the icon of desktop.
Top Level Intro
Part
VII
CIMON-Xpanel 72
7 Xpanel Designer
For details on Xpanel Designer, refer to the followingmanual
Xpanel Designer
How to download the project data
Xpanel Designer Installing and Running
Xpanel Designer menu
Project setup and download
7.1 How to download project data
IN THIS TOPIC :
Using USB port Using Ethernet port Using removable memory
This manual explains download method for Xpanel project to Xpanel from Xpanel Designer. Xpanel supports
three ways for download project.
There are three different methods to downloadthe Xpanel project data as summarized here:

Using USB port (supported model : XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB)
Using Ethernet port(supported model : Products that Ethernet port is supported in products of OS Version
2.00 or late)
Using removable storage (supported model : Products that USB Host and SD slot are supported in
products of OS Version 2.00 or late)
Using USB port

This method downloads project using Xpanel s USB Tool port.
Before download project, you must install Xpanel device driver and ActiveSync.
Install the
ActiveSync
Xpanel provides ActiveSync in the including CD but you can also download latest version from
Microsoft homepage ( www.microsoft.com). After Installation, you need to restart your PC.
Install the
Xpanel Device
Dirver
After rebooting, connect the Xpanel with PC by USB cable.

Xpanel Designer 73
Select as like the following figure and click [Next] at the Hardware update wizard.

CIMON-Xpanel 74
Insert provided CD and click [Next].

Xpanel Designer 75
< XT05MA, XT05SA, XT06CA, XT10CA, XT12CA Driver setup screen>

< XT04CA/B, XT07CA/B Driver setup screen>
Click [finish]when the device was searched.
Installed normally, popupwill be activated regardless of partnership.
Next time, it will recognizeXpanel automatically.
When the Hardware Update Wizard is not automatically displayed .
It happens sometime even though connectednormally because of windows configurations.
In this case solve the problem with following directions.You may see Invalid Device in the
device manager.
Select Invalid Device and click mouse right buttonand choose [Update driver].
Select the tab as follows. [Changea setting]->[System]->[Hardware]

CIMON-Xpanel 76
Select as like above the figure, then click [Next].

Xpanel Designer 77
Driver file path will be different according to the OS
version.
- If Xpanel models are XT04CA, XT05MB, XT05SB, XT06CB, XT07CB, this models are
select following path.
Xpanel_Driver\ XT04_Sync_Drv in the XpanelDesigner installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)
- If OS version is below 1.19, it will direct the path folder Xpanel_Driver in the
XpanelDesigner installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Xpanel\Xpanel_Driver)
- If OS version is above 1.19, it will direct the path folder Drivers in the ActiveSync
installed folder.
(Ex : C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\Drivers)
[Windows CE USB device] will be registered in the Device Manager with the massage as setup
is complete.

Setup Link Run XpanelDesigner. Load the project that will be downloaded.Select [Online]->[Connection].

You can execute Project download or Project upload from online menu of the
XpanelDesigner.
* Although you have several USB port in your PC, you can download project via only one of
them.
Using Ethernet port

If Xpanel is connectedwith PC by the Ethernet, you can downloadthe project through Ethernet
without USB cable.
ConnectPC with Xpanel to downloadthe project using Ethernet port and configureIP address.
CIMON-Xpanel 78

* For using this method, it needs OS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner version 1.37 or
late.
Co
nfi
rm
the
IP
of
the
PC
Select [Start]->[Run] on the PC.

Input cmd at the RUN window.

Input ipconfig at the Command window.

Xpanel Designer 79
Ensure the Ethernet IP configurationin your PC.
Next, set Xpanel s IP adaptable with PC.
Go to the Ethernet Loader.(If Xpanel is running, click the [Exit] button at the Xpanel config for
closing Xpanel project.) Confirm the Xpanel s IP.

Touch the new setting
parts.
Delete contents by the key
BS and input others to change
using number key.
Click the [Apply this new
setting].
CAUTION
* Directionsfor the configuration
- Subnet Mask and Gateway must be same with PC s configuration.
- If Subnet Mask is configured (255.255.0.0),then IP Address must be inputtedas like 172.16.
xxx.xxx and it doesn t duplicatedwith other equipments.
- xxx means the number between 0-255.
For application the changed configurations, select the button [Apply the new setting].

If you want to confirm again click the button x or else click OK then it will go on.
Et
he
rn
et
po
Execute the XapnelDesigner. Open the project that will be downloaded and select [Setup Link] at
the on line menu.
CIMON-Xpanel 80
rt
co
nfi
gu
rat
ion
at
the
Xp
an
el
De
sig
ne
r

Select [Ethernet]and then click the button [Xpanel].

The list of Xpanel foundis displayed.
Select Xpanel which will be downloadedthe project and then click [OK].
The informationof selectedXpanel is expressedat the popup window.
To download project, select [Downloadto Xpanel (PC -> Xpanel)]in the online menu.

Using removable memory

Xpanel Designer 81
Xpanel supportsthe download functionfor removable memory.
If you use this function,you can update the Xpanel s project without connectingit directlyby using
like USB memory that is a kind of portable disc drive.
* This functionis required Xpanel model that supportsUSB Host or SD card slot. You need also
OS version above 2.00 and XpanelDesigner
version 1.37 or late.
Copy project
to memory
card
Insert memory card to your PC.
Select [Copy Project To Removable Memory] in the Online menu of
XpanelDesigner.

Select or Input the path to download project.
Download path must be indicated root of disc. If you check the Downloadthe
Editing project ,it includesthe data for upload.

If it is done, complete message box will be poppedup.
Update
project from
removable
storage
to Xpanel.
Insert removable storage to Xpanel which has been downloaded project.

CIMON-Xpanel 82
Click project update button at the Ethernet Loader as shown up.
Then Project Update windowis poppedup and it will display updatable projects
after search.

If you want to search list again, click [Refresh]button.
Select the project will be downloadedat the list and click [Project Update] button.
* When project is updated, it will remove previous project first of all. Please attention.
When the project is downloading, [Project Update] buttonis not executed.
After it is completed download project, you can see the message All file update : OK
and [Project Update] buttonis executed again. Be careful, if you touch it while working,
it would be canceled.
7.2 Xpanel Designer Installing and Running
1. You can downloadXpanelDesigner v2.10 frominternet homepage (http://www.kdtsys.com/ ).
Xpanel Designer Suggestion
Xpanel Designer 83
If the past version of Xpanel Designer is installed, please remove it by Program add/delete .
2. Select window[Start] -> [Xpanel] -> [Xpanel Designer]

7.3 Xpanel Designer menu
IN THIS TOPIC :
File Edit Draw View Online Arrange Tools
File

button descriptions
New Page New Page is displayed.
Open Open the file of Xpanel Designer.
Close Close the present page.
CIMON-Xpanel 84
Close All Page Close the present all page.
New Project New Project is displayed.
Open Project Open the present Project.
Close Project Close the present Project.
Copy Project Copy the present Project.
Save Save the present page.
Save As. Save As. the present page.
Convert to Runtime Project Convert to Runtime Project.
Frame Editor Frame Editor is displayed.
Preview Preview before it prints.
Print Print is displayed.
Edit

button descriptions
Undo It returns before working of the edit.
Redo It cancel before working of the edit.
Cut Cut the object selected.
Copy The object selected is copied with the clipboard.
Paste Paste the object copied.
Paste Special Paste contents of clipboard.
Delate Delate the object selected.
Select All Select All object of page.
Find Find text of page or project.
Replace Replace text of page or picture, project.
Graphic File Paste Graphic File Paste.
Insert Animation Bitmap Insert Animation Bitmap.
Draw

button descriptions
Line Draw Line.
Xpanel Designer 85
Rectange Draw Rectange.
Ellipse Draw Ellipse.
Arc Draw Arc.
Sector Draw Sector.
Chord Draw Chord.
Poly Line Draw Poly Line. It is closed to draw by double clicking.
Polygon Draw Polygon. It is closed to draw by double clicking.
Text Insert Text.
Dynamic Tag Insert Dynamic Tag.
Date Time Insert Date Time.
String Value Insert String Value.
Multi String Insert Multi String.
Trend Graph Insert Trend Graph.
DataLog Insert Trend Graph.
Key Input Window Insert Key Input Window.
Alarm Summary Insert Alarm Summary.
Library Library is displayed.
View

button descriptions
Redraw Redraw page.
Current Page Position To
Runtime
Current Page Position To Runtime.
Main Tool Main Tool is displayed.
Status Tool Status Tool is displayed.
Drawing Tool Drawing Tool is displayed.
Color Tool Color Tool is displayed.
Arrange Tool Arrange Tool is displayed.
Font Tool Font Tool is displayed.
Zoom In/Out Zoom In/Out page.
Online

CIMON-Xpanel 86
button descriptions
Setup Link You can select USB or Ethernet.
Download to Xpanel(PC-
>Xpanel)
Download project to Xpanel.
Upload From Xpanel
(Xpanel PC)
Upload project From Xpanel.
Make Executing Removable
Memory
Make Executing Removable Memory.
Copy Project To Removable
Memory
Copy Project To Removable Memory.
Stop Xpanel Application
Program
Stop Xpanel Application Program.
Run Xpanel Application
Program
Run Xpanel Application Program.
Upgrade Xpanel Application
Program
Upgrade Xpanel Application Program like a Xpanel Designer.
Arrange

button descriptions
Group Make a Group by the objects selected.
UnGroup UnGroup.
ReGroup ReGroup.
Bring To Front Bring To Front.
Send To Back Send To Back.
Arrange Arrange the objects selected.
Rotate Rotate the objects selected.
Flip Flip the objects selected.
Point Change Change shape of Point.
Enable Snap Enable Snap is displayed.
Grid Config Grid Config is displayed.
Make Symbol Make Symbol the object selected.
Break Symbol Break Symbol.
Tools
Xpanel Designer 87

button descriptions
Page Setup Page Setup is displayed.
User Library Edit Edit User Library.
Bitmap Edit Edit the Bitmap selected.
Run Simulator Run Simulator from project edited.
Run Simulator With Active
Page.
Run Simulator and open present page.
Project Project window is displayed.
Database Database window is displayed.
CIMON-Xpanel Setup Setup page and frame of CIMON-Xpanel.
I/O Devices I/O Devices aredisplayed.
Alarms Alarms are displayed.
Security Security is displayed.
Data Logging Data Logging is displayed.
Scripts Scripts are displayed.
String Editor String Editor is displayed.
Data Server Data Server is displayed.
Recipe Recipe is displayed.
Data Bridge Data Bridge is displayed.
Animation Editor Animation Editor is displayed.
7.4 Project setup and download
1. Select [File] -> [New Project]
2. Input "Project Name" and click - [Next>]

CIMON-Xpanel 88
3. Select "Type" of Xpanel and click - [Ok] . The page suitable for Xpanel s resolution is made.

4. Check the condition of the page setup by double click.(or "Tools - page setup")
[Page Property]

Description When the page is opened by pop up, the description is displayed on the page.
Popup Page The position of the popup page in frame should be set of None .
Fixed BackGround For a quick screen update, set unchangeable pictures as background.
Using 256 Bitmap Using 256 Bitmap when it Convert to Runtime Project.
Xpanel Designer 89
Draw Changed
Object Only
The relationship of the object can be changed by the update order.
Display Touch Area If you touch the object, the touch area is displayed.
Enable Multi Touch
Action
As the objects with the touch function are coincided, all touch actions are operated.
Sec. Level
As numbers are higher and higher, Sec. Level is higher. The page higher than the
Sec. Level can t be opened.
Background Change the Background of page.
[Page Position]

Edit Position It is position and size of the present Designer.
Run Position If it is designated as a pop-up page, the action will be available.
=> Copy The run position is changed to the edit position.
Position In Frame The position in frame should be set of None .
[Action]
CIMON-Xpanel 90

On Opening Page Input the Action on opening page.
On Closing Page Input the Action on closing page.
[Project Download]
1. Click - [Online] -> [Setup Link] Select the link type of Xpanel.
2. Click - [Online] -> [ Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel) ]
3. "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)" is displayed.

4. Click the "Download The Editing Project" when you want to download.
The download is impossible when you download it without clicking.
5. Click the "Download The Font File" when you want to download font.
Xpanel Designer 91
When you download it without clicking, basic Font are Kor. Xpanel : and Eng. Xpanel : Tahoma.
6. Click - [Ok]
Top Level Intro
Part
VIII
TAG Database 93
8 TAG Database
This manual explainsTAG database, refer to the followingmanual.

See :
Overview
Database Window
How to use Database
Group TAG
Digital Tag
Analog Tag
String Tag
Database edit using EXCEL
8.1 Overview
The data processing of XPanel is based on the TAG database. It should be registered with the tag shown to
the monitor.
There are three TAG types : analog, digital and string. And XPanel also provides the groupTAG.

Xpanel is repeatedly getting tags value used in the monitor from the machinery. User can save tag's value
provided to the information of tags in the database.
So if the data is changed, the value of each tag will also be changed. When users handle buttons and input
values, following the setting information, it demands to write values in the job machinery. Additionally, as the
process to write values completes, the tag s values are changed by reading the values from the machinery.
TAG
CIMON-Xpanel 94

Tag is a unit to save values in the database.
There are a Real TAG and a Virtual TAG .To read and write the values of real job machinery, the real tag
should be registered and the data of the real tag also should be changed.
All tags are divided into Digital tag, Analog tag and String TAG.
For the operation to handle its values and functions, tags should be registered and set the connection
between tags and values of the machinery.
Xpanel Project and Database
Database is edited by database edit program in Xpanel Designer.
There is no tag in database in new project, so you should add tags to the database.
After Saving edited database and sending the project with database to Xpanel, Xpanel makes the operation
based on the database.
In order to change the database, edit the database of Xpanel project properly and sent the changed project to
the Xpanel.
Xpanel Database Features
Supported data types : Digital / Analog / String
Supports virtual TAG.
Provides the TAG group function. (Hierarchical TAG manipulation structure)
Easy database exporting and importing.
Provides the last value keeping option during power off. (virtual TAG)
Analog TAG provides data scaling option.

8.2 Database Window
Following manual is Database Window.
TAG Database 95

Tree screen (1) This is a tree screen to quickly find the position of tags like window search.
Tag screen (2)
Registered tags are popped up to the tag screen. It gives users different Tag icon
referred to its types for a quick discernment and offers the scrollbar to let users know
easily the all information of each tag.
It can choose different tags with Ctrl key and click first tag and last tag by Shift that
you want to choose all tags.
Database Toolbar
It makes users to quickly add and edit the tags by Mouse.
Point
User can move a division line between tree screen and tag screen by clicking the line, but there is a
minimum area of the tree screen and the tag screen, it is ignored to make smaller window than the
minimum window.
8.3 How to use Database
How to start
Database
Click [File] -> [Open Project] of Xpanel Designer menu.
Click [Tools] -> [Database] of Xpanel Designer menu.
Click -Database icon of Xpanel Designer Toolbar.
CIMON-Xpanel 96
How to register
Tag
Click [Edit] -> [New Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.
Click -New Tag icon of Database Toolbar.
Click <Insert> Key.
Double click the Database page or click the right button of mouse- > "New
Tag".
Insert - New Tag Name. -> Click - [Next].
How to edit Tag
Select the Tag and Click [Edit] -> [Edit Tag] of Xpanel Designer menu.
Select the Tag and Click -Edit Tag icon of Database Toolbar.
Double click the Tag or click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Edit
Tag".
Edit Tag -> Click - [Next].
How to delete Tag
Select the Tag and Click [Edit] -> [Delete] or [Cut] of Xpanel Designer menu.
Select the Tag and Click -Cut icon of Toolbar.
Select the Tag and Click <Delete> Key.
Click the right button of mouse on the tag - > "Delete" or "Cut".
CAUTION - Name of TAG

There are some limitationsand rules on givinga name of TAG as follows:
A TAG name should not be duplicatedwith one of already definedTAGs.
There is no differencebetween capital and small characters.
(Ex) tagname and TAGNAME represent the same TAG.
Almost every symbol characters cannot be used in a TAG name. (only the under line character
can be used in a TAG name)
(Ex) (space) (tab) @ * / + -! ~ #$ % ^ & ( ) = | \{ } [ ] ; : ? > < . ,
Number character (0..9) cannot be used as the first character of TAG name.
(Ex) 123tagname (x), tagname123 (o)
The names of all script functions, keywords, predefined constants and user defined functions
cannot be used as a TAG name.
(Ex) PageOpen, Sleep, LogOn, goto, switch, return ....
If a TAG is located in a group, the final name of this TAG includes the group name. Each group
TAG Database 97
name should be separatedby dot (.)
character from other group or TAG name.

(Ex) Gr1.Gr2.Gr3.pointname
Virtual vs. Real TAG

When the Virtual Tag radio buttonwas chosen as followingthe first dialog box, the TAG does not need
the I/ODevice and I/OAddress
configuration items anymore. That means, the actual value of a virtual TAG is not acquired by
communicationpolling but initialized and
manipulated by the internal functionsof XPanel such as script.
The initial value of a virtual TAG can be defined at the Advance configuration tab as shown in the
second dialog box of following picture.
When the XPanel is powered and starts its operation, the defined value is applied to the TAG s initial
value. Other configuration
items in Advance configurationtab have no meanings in case of virtual TAG.

CIMON-Xpanel 98
The initial value configurationis ignored in case of a real TAG. As describedin previous topic,
XPanel polls the data
of real TAG through communication.XPanel provides several functions for manipulating data
from device.As shown in the
above second dialog box, analog data scalingis one of those functions.The functions provided
are describedmore
preciselyin the following sections.
Basic TAG Configuration

Digital, analog and string TAGs have same basic configuration items. Those items are configured in
General tab as shown in
the following picture.The items in Advanced configurationtab are different between each TAG type.
Those items are explained in the following sections describing each TAG type. In this section, the
configurationitems common
to all TAG types are explained.
Real Tag
/
Virtual
Tag
Choose one of two TAG types. As
described in the previous section, the real
TAG has an actual address of device and
its value is updated via communication.
The virtual TAG has no address, and its
value is calculated and updated by
internal functionssuch as script.
I/O
Device
Give the name of external device and
station to which the TAG belongs. The
device name and station name should be
distinguished by a dot (.) character as
following format.
DeviceName.
TAG Database 99
StationName
Notice that this field has meaning only if
TAG type is a real TAG.
I/O
Address
Give the real point address of the TAG.
The address format is dependent on the
device type. Refer to the device driver
manual of connected device for more
information such as supported address
range, notationand data type etc.
TAG type is a real TAG.
Option :
Save
Last
Status
When
Closing
This option makes the XPanel keep the
last value in flash memory when powered
off. When the power is supplied again,
XPanel restores the last value in flash
memory.
TAG type is a virtual TAG.
a TAG
Name of a TAG
8.4 Group TAG
When users input lots of tags at one screen, it is inefficient under its operation.
So, use a group tag to manage relative tags to make the tree structure similar with the directory in computer.
There is the purpose to make a group of various tags for better management of the project.

Basic Setup

CIMON-Xpanel 100
Name Insert a Name of Tag. (Referto the "CAUTION - Name of Tag".)
Type Select - Type of Tag - > "Group"
Des. Input - Reference matter.

8.5 Digital TAG
XPanel provides the digital TAG type which representsa bit signal (1 or 0). All non-zerovalues are treated
as 1 in digital TAG.

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with
designated value.
Notice that this field has meaning only if TAG type is a virtual TAG. The real TAG ignores initial value
setting.

8.6 Analog TAG
XPanel acceptsvarious data types from devicesas an analog TAG.
All those device data types are convertedto the 64 bits floating point values in XPanel.
TAG Database 101

Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with
designated value.
setting.
Data Type

Choose one of followingdata types.
Type Description Value Range
INT8 Signed 8 bits integer 128 - 127
INT16 Signed 16 bits integer 32768 - 32767
INT32 Signed 32 bits integer -2147483648 - 2147483647
UINT8 Unsigned 8 bits integer 0 - 255
BCD8 Signed 8 bits BCD 79 - 79
UBCD8 Unsigned 8 bits BCD 0 - 99
UBCD16 Unsigned 16 bits BCD 0 - 9999
UBCD32 Unsigned 32 bits BCD 0- 99999999
Float 32 bits real data -3.40282e+038 - 3.40282e+038
This configuration represents the data type of device memory designated by the address defined in
General configurationtab
CIMON-Xpanel 102
and is effectiveonly on the real TAG. The virtual TAG ignores this configurationand manipulatesall TAG
data as a 64 bit real number.

Scale / Range of Engineering Data (V
eng
) / Range of Raw Data (V
raw
)

XPanel provides two different methods to calculatea scaled engineering data. If this option is checked,
XPanel performs Scale/Offset method.
[ Scale / Offset Method ]
The Scale/Offset method uses following formula for calculatingthe engineeringvalue.
V
eng
= V
raw
x Scale + Offset
Vraw : Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.
Veng : Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in XPanel s screen)
(Example 1)
If an analog TAG was configuredas following picture, and the Vraw from deviceis 32768,
then, V
eng
= (32768 x 0.1) 3276.8 = 3276.8 3276.8 = 0
As shown in above example, the engineeringdata configurations(Min Value and Max Value) do not
affect the raw value processing. But, in case of proportional method (if the Scale optionwas
not checked),The engineeringdata Min/Maxvalue configurationsare important factors.
[ Proportional Method ]
The ProportionalMethod processthe raw value twiceby using following formulas :
TAG Database 103
Scale = (V
eng_max
V
eng_min
) / (V
raw_max
V
raw_min
)
Offset = V
eng_min
V
raw_min
V
eng
= V
raw
x Scale + Offset
u V
raw
: Read data from device. Not processed,raw value from device.
u V
eng
: Engineering data. (The data which will be displayedin XPanel s screen)
u V
eng_max
, V
eng_min
: Engineering data range configurations
u V
raw_max
, V
raw_min
: Raw data range configurations
First, it calculatesthe scale and offset values from min/max configurations.
The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as Scale/Offset Method for
acquiring the final engineeringvalue.
(Example 2)
If an analog TAG was configuredas following picture, and the Vraw from deviceis 32768,
then,
Scale = (3276.7- (-3276.8))/ (65535 0) = 0.1
Offset = (-3276.8) 0 = -3276.8
V
eng
= (32768 x 0.1) 3276.8 = 3276.8 3276.8 = 0
Note that above two examples gave the same result.
8.7 String TAG
The string TAG hold a string data. The maximum string length the string TAG can hold is 80 characters. In
order to use as a real TAG,
please refer to the manual of device driver. Most device drivers do not support real stringTAG type.
CIMON-Xpanel 104

Length of String

Give the maximum possible length of string. It can be up to 80 characters.
This configurationhas meaning only on real TAG.
The device driver polls this size of continuousbuffer at every period for readinga string data.
Initial Value

Give the initial value of virtual TAG. The maximum length of initial string is restrictedto 22 characters.
When the XPanel is started up, the virtual TAG is initialized with designatedvalue.
setting.
8.8 Database edit using EXCEL
This manual provides the function for easy edit via copy/paste as lots of tags are edited.
Paste (Database - > EXCEL)

Choose the area for copy at the database.
TAG Database 105
Click - [Edit] -> [Copy], or copyit to the clipboard by <Ctrl+C>.
Open- "EXCEL" file. Click - [Edit] -> [paste], or paste it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+V>.
EXCEL Edit

Referring to the table, edit the rows and columns opposed to the characters.
Columns
Number
Digital tag Analog tag String TAG Explanation
A Name of Tag Name of Tag Name of Tag
B Type of Tag(1) Type of Tag(2) Type of Tag(3)
C Des. Des. Des.
D
Real/Virtual
TAG
Real/Virtual TAG Real/Virtual TAG Real TAG = 1, Virtual TAG = 0
E I/O Device I/O Device I/O Device
F I/O Address I/O Address I/O Address
G initial value initial value initial value
H None None None
CIMON-Xpanel 106
I None
Type of data
0 : INT8
1 : INT16
2 : INT32
3 : UINT8
4 : UINT16
5 : UINT32
6 : BCD8
7 : BCD16
8 : BCD32
9 : UBCD8
10 : UBCD16
11 : UBCD32
12 : Float
String length
J None None None
K None None None
L None None None
M None Scale application None Scale/Offset=1,Max/Min = 0
N None Internal data-Min None
O None Internal data-Max None
P None Real data-Min None Scale application- >Scale value
Q None Real data-Max None Scale application- >Offset value
Paste (EXCEL - > Database)

Choose the area for copy at the EXCEL.
Click - [Edit] -> [Copy], or copy it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+C>.
Open- "Database" file. Click - [Edit] -> [paste], or paste it to the clipboard by <Ctrl+V>.
TAG Database 107
Top Level Intro
Part
IX
I/O Device 109
9 I/O Device
Xpanel provides t he I / O device to communicate with serial communication(RS232/422/485) and Ethernet
communication(TCP/UDP).
For details on I/O Device setting, refer to the following manual
See :
I/O Device Basic
I/O Device Ethernet
I/O Device Serial
9.1 I/O Device Basic
I/O Device Configuration
For creating a new device, use the menu Tools - > I/O Devices Following picture shows the first step of
creating a new device.
Edit
Select the existing device by clicking the button,the dialog box of the device type is
displayed.
New Device Select the new device. "I / O device type selection" dialog box is displayed.
Delete Delete the existing devices.
Close Close the dialog box.
CIMON-Xpanel 110
I/O Device Type Selection

Device Name Input the name of the device is able to distinguish.
Device Type Select the Device Type.
Ok
Register the new device. "Ethernet / Serial Device Communication Settings" dialog box
is displayed.
Cancel Cancel the dialog box.
9.2 I/O Device Ethernet
Communication Port Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the system (Xpanel)
I/O Device 111
Device Type Select the I / O device Type.
Protocol Select from the UDP and TCP.
Time Out Set the Time Out.
Retry No. Specify the Retry No. when communication error occurs
Dual line Set the network dual line
Station Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)
CIMON-Xpanel 112
Add Station Register a new station. When you click on the button "show settings" dialog box is
displayed.
I/O Device 113
Station Name Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.
Station Type select the CPU type of PLC.
Network ID It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.
IP Address Input the basic IP address of PLC.
Socket Port No. Input the Socket Port No. of PLC
16Bit Data Swap This field has no meaning in this driver.
Comm, Error Message
Pop Up
When Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.
Fixed XPANEL Socket
Port
If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by
Xpanel Socket Port No. If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it
occurs communication error.
XPANEL Socket Port No.
If you want to use "Fixed XPANEL Socket Port No. Input XPANEL Socket Port
No.
9.3 I/O Device Serial
Communication Port Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the system(Xpanel)
CIMON-Xpanel 114

Device Type Select the I / O device Type.
Protocol Select from the COM1and COM2.
Baud Rate Select the data baud rate .
Parity Select the Type of Parity Bit
Data Bits Select the Data Bit.
Stop Bit(S) Select the Stop Bit.
RTS/CTS Select the control method of RTS / CTS
Comm. Type Select the RS232C/422/485 communication type.
I/O Device 115
Using
Transmission
Delay
Set "Using Transmission Delay" when you want to send the frame later.
Station Setup

The setting method forthe communication parameters of the I / O Device (PLC)
CIMON-Xpanel 116
Add Station The new station is registered. Click- Add Station. The [station] is displayed.
Station Name Input the name of the station is able to distinguish.
Station Type Select the CPU type of PLC.
Network ID It is used as parameters to distinguish by the I / O devices.
Station No. Input the basic IP address of PLC.
Using
CheckSum
Using CheckSum of the protocol
Comm, Error
Message Pop Up
When Communication error occurs, the message window is displayed.
Top Level Intro
Part
X
CIMON-Xpanel 118
10 Alarm
In case the value of a specifictag is over a set value, an alarm is used to informthe event.
To use this function, a tag should be set up as an alarm tag among optional functions when it is
registered to a database.
There are various kinds of events registered to Alarm Item.
Alarm Occur Event : It is operated one time when tag s value is reaching the alarm
condition
Alarm Release Event : It is operated one time when tag s value is canceled from the
warning condition.
Stamp Event : Without the warning, users register it via the alarm summary voluntarily.
Alarm Ack. : It changes the characters of events by the Ack. and the display color of the
alarm summery event that isn t registered to another event.
See :
Alarm Group
Alarm Configuration
Alarm Summary
10.1 Alarm Group
In the area of the registered alarm, there are ten groups ready that have no relationship between groups.
If there is an Event(Alarm On/Off) at the registered alarm, it is saved to the Alarm List.
Alarm List can save maximum 200 and check it at the Alarm Summery Object in the page.
The Alarm Summery expresses only the Alarm List of specified group, so register the Alarms to the same
group for the easy checking.
Alarm 119

< Alarm Action >
10.2 Alarm Configuration
Set or Edit - "Alarm"
Click - [Tools] -> [Alarms] of Xpanel Designer or Alarms icon of Xpanel Designer Toolbar.

CIMON-Xpanel 120
Alarm Group Select - >Alarm Group.
Group Desc. Input description of selected group.
Using String Table Using string table in the Alarm Configuration.It can specify a index of string table by
checking.
String Group No. It can specify by checking of "Using string table".
Save Alarm When Xpanel power On/Off, alarm items are saved. Max.200 items are saved.
Add Select a Alarm Group. Click -> [Add]
Edit Select a Alarm. Click -> [ Edit]
Delete Select a Alarm. Click -> [ Delete]
Move Up
Selected Alarm is moved up. Select a Alarm. Click -> [ Move Up]
The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.
Move Down
Selected Alarm is moved down. Select a Alarm. Click -> [ Move Down]
The alarm action and registered order are completely unrelated.

Alarm Add, Edit

1. Select a Alarm Group.
2. Click -> [Add]
Alarm 121

3. Input - Tag Name, or click the Tag in the Database list by .
4. Select a Condition( >, =, <).
> : Tag s value is more than competitive Value.
= : Tag s value is equal to competitive Value.
< : Tag s value is Less than competitive Value.
5. Input a competitive Value connected with Alarm condition.
6. Input - Alarm description It is displayed in the Alarm Summary Description.
When "Using string table" is checked in Alarm Group, "Using string table" is also displayed in the Alarm
Configuration. It can specify a index of string table by checking.
It can specify a index of string table by checking "Using string table".
7. Select - Alarm On Action . Alarm On career is saved only by checking <NONE>.
CIMON-Xpanel 122
Alarm On Action

Open Page
The designated page is opened by the Command when the Alarm On.
Input - Name of page in Action Parameter, or click and choose a page only.
If you want to choose several pages, choose the Command and use - PageOpen("Name of page").
When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value
of TEST_ANA00(T ag) is over 0.
At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then open the page file(PAGE1) on the monitor.
In the Alarm On, if tag s value is less than or equal to 0, register the alarm release event to the alarm list
and release the condition of the Alarm On.
Alarm 123
Command
Set up the designated action by the Command when Alarm On.
Input - Command in Action Parameter, refer to Script for the content of the command.
When warning is registered in the way above, it would be in the condition of the Alarm On when the value
of TEST_ANA00(Tag) is 0.
At first, register the Alarm On event to the alarm list and then practice the specified command.
Change the value of TEST_ANA140(Tag) to 0. And increase the value of TEST_ANA130(Tag) as 1 and
open the page file("PAGE1") on the monitor.
Alarm Off Action
At the alarm release, practice a command registered to the alarm release action.
If there is no input content, no action will happen.
Alarm Ack. Action
At the alarm summary, practice a command registered to the alarm ack. action.
CIMON-Xpanel 124
If there is no input content, no action will happen.
Apply Scroll Message
Register/Remove the alarm content at the automatic scroll massage window when the Alarm On.
It should be check the "Using Scroll Messages" of [Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL Setup].
Refer to Scroll Message of help manual.
10.3 Alarm Summary
Alarm Summary is an object to display the alarm occur/release list to the page.
Click - [Draw] -> [Alarm Summary] of Xpanel Designer or Alarm Summary icon of Xpanel Designer
Toolbar.
Click - Page for Alarm Summary

Alarm 125
Alarm Group Select - Alarm Group
Background Select - Background of Alarm Summary
Ack Select - Color of Alarm Ack
Occur Select - Color of Alarm Occur
Release Select - Color of Alarm Release
Alarm Status
Select - Type of alarm event in Alarm Summary
Occur : Alarm Occur Event is displayed.
Release : Alarm Release Event is displayed.
Acked : Acked Alarm Event is displayed.
Display Active Alarm Only : Selected Alarm Occur Event is only displayed.
Display Items
Select - Display Items of Alarm Summary
Buttons : Control Buttons is displayed on the monitor.
Time : Time of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.
Device Name : Device Name of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.
Value : Value of Alarm Occur is displayed on the monitor.
Alarm Status : Alarm Status is displayed on the monitor.
Alarm Description : Alarm Description of registered tagis displayed.
Column Header : Column Header of Alarm Summary is displayed.
Numbers Setup the event numbers to Alarm Summary.
Action
Run Specified Active On Double Click : it can calls to run 'Alarm Ack Action' by
double clicking alarm career of alarm summary screen.
Alarm Summary Screen

CIMON-Xpanel 126
Stop
A real-time update of the Alarm summary is stopped.The update career of the alarm
summary is only stopped.
Stamp Register an unrelated Stamp event with the state of alarm in the alarm career.
Ack
Change the chosen events into the condition of the Alarm Ack. There is a change of
the Alarm Ack Color.
Setup
"Alarm Summary" is displayed on the monitor.it can change the type of alarm event
and alarm group.
Config "Xpanel Configuration" is displayed on the monitor.
Font Changing of Alarm Summary

Select - Object of Alarm Summary to change Font
Click - [View] -> [Font Tool] of Xpanel Designer
Change - Font Size or Display Type in Font Tool.
Make a Control Button of Alarm List Using Key Type.

Select - Object to use by Button
Double click - Object."Object Config" is displayed.
Click - [Touch] -> [Key Input] of Action
Alarm 127
Select - Key Type. Click - [Ok]
Refer to the Key Type.
Button Action Key Type
Stop/Run Tab
Stamp Insert
Ack Space
Setup Home
Move Up Up
Move Down Down
Remove selectionlist Delete
Initialization of List End
CAUTION
* When two more alarm summaries are registered or the trend monitoring, the data logger, and the key
input window object are registered together,
it is possible that the object you don t want is
operated, so touch and choose the object to control before handling.
* In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, even if you delete the list via 'selection list
Delete'/'initialization of List', the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.
Print out the alarm list

Print out the alarm list using AlarmPrint()
[Ex] AlarmPrint(1,0,0,20,_ALMPRT_ALL_);
The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with font size 10. Refer to the Script manual.
Print out the alarm list as CSV file

Print out the alarm list using AlarmCSVWr()
[Ex] AlarmCSVWr( 1, AlarmLog , 0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, 0);
CIMON-Xpanel 128
The most recent alarm list of group 1 will be printed with AlarmLog_XXXXXXXXXXX.CSV File . Refer to the
Script manual.
Clear Alarm List

Clear Alarm List in the designated alarm group using ClearAlarmLog()
In case of the Alarm Group setting to save to the file, the Alarm List is restored when inputting the power.
The content of the warning summery page is updated if the page is opened again.
[Ex] ClearAlarmLog(1);
All alarm list of alarm group 1 will be cleared. Refer to the Script manual.
Top Level Intro
Part
XI
CIMON-Xpanel 130
11 Graphic Page Editor
The graphic page editor of XpanelDesigner provides easy and simple screen editing environment as followings.
Provides easy and simple object based editing environment
Provides various wizard library objects : ready to use button, lamp and switch objects
Object window makes it possible to explore all the graphic objects with a tree view list.
Provides the graphic page security system.
Provides various trend functions.
Various graphic processing speed optimization options.
The screen size of graphic page can be induced from the model code. The table below lists the screen size of
each model.
Model Screen Size Color Specification
XT04C 480 x 272 TFT, 160,000 Colors
XT05M 320 x 240 Mono STN, Black and White, 16 Grays
XT05S 320 x 240 CSTN, 256 Colors
XT06C 640 x 480 TFT, 65,535 Colors
XT07C 800 x 480 TFT, 65,535 Colors
XT10C 800 x 600 TFT, 65,535 Colors
XT12C 800 x 600 TFT, 65,535 Colors
When a new project is created, one of the model codes above should be specified via following dialog box.
According to this configuration,
the XpanelDesigner decides the page size when a new page file is created.

Graphic Page Editor 131

Page Properties
Frame Editor
Library
Object Properties
11.1 Page Properties
Every graphic page has its properties such as background color, position in screen and so on.
Those properties are configured via Page Properties dialog box.
This dialog box can be opened by clicking the right button and Page Setup menu as shown in following picture.
Page Property

CIMON-Xpanel 132

Description Fill in the description of current graphic page.
Popup Page
If this option was checked, the page will be opened in front of previous screen page at
runtime. Otherwise, without this option checking, the previous opened page will be
replaced with this page.
Fixed
Background
This option provides faster graphic processing speed by maintaining another copy of
background image in display memory. All the control-less objects are included in this
background image, and only the controlled objects will be redrawn at every data
updates in run time. If this option was not checked, all the objects would be redrawn at
every new data updates in runtime. This will give a big burden to Xpanel performance if
there are many graphic objects in page.
However, this option has a side-effect. All objects in Xpanel graphic page have their
depth level. Which object will be drawn first at runtime is decided by the depth level.
But, this option can change the depth levels between the objects with and without
control. This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially for the
overlapped objects.
Using 256
Bitmap
Xpanel supports 64K colored bitmap objects. But, these objects consume so much
memory and disk space. This option converts the 64K colored bitmap to 256 colored
automatically. It is very useful when there is not enough disk space or memory. And
also it can be helpful to increase the graphic processing speed at run time.
Draw Changed
Object Only
This option can be used when there is need to get faster graphic processing speed at
run time. When this option was checked, only the object whose value or status was
changed will be redrawn.
However, this option has a side-effect too. When a controlled object was redrawn, the
depth level of the object will be ignored. The controlled object whose status was
changed will be the top most depth and other overlapping objects will not be redrawn.
This phenomenon can be easily shown at run time, especially between the overlapped
controlled objects.
Display Touch
Area
This option can be used to show touch area. When this option was checked, draw
rectangle on toucharea at screen touch.
Enable
Multi Touch
Action
This option can be used when there is need to run many touch actionat one time.
When this option was checked, all touch actions that was wrapt over will be run at
screen touch.
Sec. Level
A graphic page can be assigned a security level between 0 and 10. Only the user who
has the same or higher security level can open and see the graphic page. (zero is the
lowest security level) Please refer to the section of Security for more information about
security system.
Background Designate a background color of this page.
NOTE
To avoid the side effects of Fixed Background and Draw Changed Object Only options, please
follow the recommendations listed below.
Do not overlap two or more animated objects.
Put the animated object to the up-most position in the list of objects, if possible.
When the Draw Changed Object Only option was checked, it is strongly recommended to check the
Fixed Background option together.
Page Position
CIMON-Xpanel 134

'Edit Position'
Group
The new position and screen size can be specified via these fields. After fill in each
position and size of Edit Position group, the Copy button applies the new settings to
the actual position.
'Run Position'
Group
This group presents the current screen position and size.
The Copy button will change these values to the new configuration as specified in Edit
Position group.
Position In
Frame
If current editing page is a element of a frame, specify the actual position in frame.
One of four possible positions can be chosen. The frame will be described more
precisely in next section.
Action

On Open Page This option can be used when there is need to run one actionat page open.
On Closing
Page
This option can be used when there is need to run one actionat page Close.
11.2 Frame Editor

CIMON-Xpanel 136
The frame function is a means to display multiple pages at the same time in a screen.
This function removes repeated and boring tasks from the graphic page designing. The frame editor is
activated through the menu File - Frame Editor .
XPanelDesigner provides 12 styles of predefined multiple page layouts as shown in the above picture.
In this dialog box, the frame can be created, modified and deleted from current project. A frame includes
several pages for its layout elements.
The size and initial pages for each layout element are configured in this dialog box.
Note that the Position in Frame property of each initial page should be matched with the assigned page
number (Page1 .. Page4).
Frame as a starting page

The frame file (.FRX) can be chosen as a starting page as shown in the above picture.
Open a new frame with touch

Following example picture shows the situation of giving a touch operation to a graphic object.
According to this example, touch action is given as Open Page and the frame name is given as a Page
Name . This example will work without any problem.
The touch operation processor can distinguish the name of page and frame.
Open a new frame with command expression

The FrameOpen() function is provided for opening a new frame. Refer to the Script section for more
information about FrameOpen() function.
CIMON-Xpanel 138
Replace a page in frame

When a frame is opened, the pages opened with the frame are replaced by PageOpen() function.
Refer to the Script section for more information about the PageOpen() function.
Every page is given a Position in Frame property as shown in the above configuration dialog box. When a
page is
opened by PageOpen() function or other ways, this property decides the page which will be replaced by the
new one.
The page which has the same position number with the new page designated in PageOpen() function is
replaced.
However, if the new page has no position number (set as None ), the entire frame will be closed and only
the new page
will be opened and displayed in the screen.
Frame closing conditions

A frame is closed at following conditions.
1) When a page without position number is opened.
2) When other new frame is opened by touch operation or function such as FrameOpen() .
11.3 Library
In XpanelDesigner, there are two different types of library objects.
One is called Wizard Object and the other is Library Object . The difference between these two types of
objects is whether the object properties are given or not.
The wizard objects are marked with (w) string in front of their names as shown in the following picture.
CIMON-Xpanel 140
SEE :
Wizard Object
User Library
11.3.1 Wizard Object
Each wizard object has its own configuration dialog box. In this section, all the configuration dialog boxes of
wizards are explained.
IN THIS TOPIC :
BitLamp
Color
TagVal
BitSwitch1
BitSwitch2
TagWrite
DataEntry
MomentWrite
Command
HoriSize
VertSize
Keyinput
KeyInput2
OpenPage
ClosePage

BitLamp

The BitLamp wizard object
shows two different shapes at
runtime according to the state
of assigned digital TAG. The
texts and their colors are
configurable.
Color

The Color wizard object provides
two different display colors
according to the value of a
specified TAG. The TAG can be an
analog TAG as well as a digital
TAG.
TagVal
CIMON-Xpanel 142
The TagVal wizard object
displays the value of specified
TAG. The colors of background
and value text are kept as
option. One of six available
formats can be chosen as display
format. All the available formats
are explained in the following
table.
Format Description
????
Display format will be automatically decided according to the data type of TAG.
If the data type of TAG is Float , then ####. 0000 format will be applied automatically.
Otherwise, # # # # format is applied.
# # # # Decimal integer value display format or string tag value.
# # # # . 0 Floating point value display format with 1 significant digit.
####. 00 Floating point value display format with 2 significant digits.
BitSwitch1
The BitSwitch1 wizard object
shows two different shapes at
runtime according to the state of
assigned digital TAG. And also,
this object provides touch
operation controlling function.
When this object is touched at
runtime, the state specified
digital TAG will be changed via
one of three control types (set,
reset or toggle).
If the Enable Condition check
box is checked, a conditional
expression can be declared. The
evaluated value of this
expression enables or disables
the controlling function. If the
evaluated value is false, then the
controlling function will be
disabled. For more information
about conditional expression,
refer to the section of Script .

BitSwitch2
The BitSwitch2 wizard object shows two different shapes at runtime according to the state of assigned
digital TAG.
And also, this object provides touch operation controlling function. When this object is touched at runtime,
the state specified digital TAG will be toggled.
There are two differences between BitSwitch1 and BitSwitch2 wizard object. The BitSwitch2 object provides
text configuration function,
but it allows only one type of TAG control, toggling.
CIMON-Xpanel 144
If the Enable Condition
check box is checked, a
conditional expression can be
declared. The evaluated value of
this expression enables or
disables the controlling function.
If the evaluated value is false,
then the controlling function will
be disabled. For more
information about conditional
expression, refer to the section
of Script .

TagWrite
The TagWrite wizard object
provides the function of writing a
predefined value to a TAG. When
the object is touched by operator,
the predefined value will be written
to the specified TAG. If the
Condition check box was checked
and a conditional expression was
given, this function will be
controlled by this expression. If the
evaluated logic is false, then the
TAG writing function will not work
even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information
about conditional expression, refer
to the section of Script .
DataEntry
CIMON-Xpanel 146
The DataEntry wizard object
provides a touch button
function which gets number
input from operator. Input
number will be applied to the
specified TAG. And also, input
range checking function
applicable to the input value.
Following three sample pictures show the available keypad window style. The size of keypad window is
different between each window style.
Window Style 1 Window Style 2 Window Style 3
MomentWrite
The MomentWrite wizard object
provides a momentary push button
function. When the button is
pushed, a value specified as When
Pushed is written to the device
memory. And next, when the
button is released, another value
specified as When Released is
written to the device memory
again.
This object can be controlled by a
logical value from conditional
expression, by checking the
Enable Condition check box. If the
calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does
not issue the control values even if
it was touched by operator. Refer
to the section of Script for more
information about the conditional
expression.
Command
CIMON-Xpanel 148
The Command wizard runs the programmed
command script when it was touched by operator.
This function can be filtered by the conditional
expression. The conditional expression can be
declared by checking the Enable Condition
check box. If the evaluated value of this
conditional expression is false, then the command
script will not be executed. For more information
about the command script and conditional
expression, refer to the section of Script .
HoriSize
The HoriSize wizard object
provides a variable sized bar
function (bar graph). This object
is a horizontal bar styled graph,
and one of three origin (base)
position can be chosen (leftmost,
middle, rightmost).
VertSize
The VertSize wizard object
provides a variable sized bar
function (bar graph). This object
is a vertical bar styled graph, and
one of three origin (base)
position can be chosen (bottom
side, middle, top side).
KeyInput
The KeyInput wizard object emulates
keyboard input when the object is
touched by operator. It is useful when
KeyInput wizard object accompanies
other objects which need keyboard
inputs, such as Trend Graph , DataLog ,
Alarm Summary and Key Input
Window .
This object can be controlled by a logical
value from conditional expression, by
checking the Enable Condition check
box. If the calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does not
issue the keyboard input code even if it
was touched by operator. Refer to the
section of Script for more information
about the conditional expression.
CIMON-Xpanel 150
KeyInput2
The KeyInput2 wizard object emulates
keyboard input when the object is
touched by operator. This object is an
enhanced version of KeyInput wizard
object. KeyInput2 wizard object displays
the symbol character of specified key
code and provides the selectable color
option. It is useful when KeyInput2
wizard object accompanies other objects
which need keyboard inputs, such as
Trend Graph , DataLog , Alarm
Summary and Key Input Window .
This object can be controlled by a logical
value from conditional expression, by
checking the Enable Condition check
box. If the calculated logic of conditional
expression is false, this object does not
issue the keyboard input code even if it
was touched by operator. Refer to the
section of Script for more information
about the conditional expression.
OpenPage
The OpenPage wizard object provides the opening function of a screen page when it is touched by
operator.
The name of page to be opened by this object should be specified.
If the Condition check box is
checked, a conditional expression
can be declared. The evaluated logic
of this expression at runtime enables
or disables the function of this
object. If the evaluated logic is false,
then page opening function will not
work even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information about
conditional expression, refer to the
section of Script .
ClosePage
The ClosePage wizard object
provides the screen page closing
function when it is touched by
operator. The name of page to be
closed by this object should be
specified.
If the Condition check box is
checked, a conditional expression
can be declared. The evaluated value
of this expression at runtime enables
or disables the function of this
object. If the evaluated value is false,
then page closing function will not
work even if this object is touched by
operator. For more information about
conditional expression, refer to the
section of Script .
11.3.2 User Library
Besides the provided library objects, user created graphic objects can be registered in the library.
CIMON-Xpanel 152

Add a New Object to Library

1. Create a graphic object. And make the object as selected state as shown in the example below.

2. Open the library manipulating window. Follow the menu Tools - User Library Edit .

3.Give a group name and object name of created object. If the group name is not registered before, a new
group with given name will be created automatically.
If the object name is the same name with existing object in library, this library object will
be replaced with the new one.

4. The Add button of above dialog box will register the new object to library.
Open the library window and check the result as shown in the following picture.

Delete an Object from Library
CIMON-Xpanel 154
1. Open the library manipulating window without any object selection. ( Tools - User Library Edit menu)
Then, the library manipulating window will be shown with Delete button as shown in the following
example.

2. The object to be deleted can be found by using the Group Name and Object Name combo box.
If the object was found, press the Delete button to remove the object from library.
11.4 Object Properties
XPanel page is a dynamic screen based on graphic objects. Every graphic object in page has its own properties.
Some of properties are static properties such as color, line style, line width and so on.
And some other properties are dynamic properties such as animation style, control type etc.
XPanelDesigner provides a integrated configuration window for setting up such kind of various properties of
graphic objects.
A configuration window example is presented below.

See
Style
Visble
Blink
V-Size
H-Size
V-Move
H-Move
Color
Touch
Entry Data
CIMON-Xpanel 156
11.4.1 Style

All the static graphic properties can be configured in this page. Object s position, size, color, fill pattern, fill color
etc. are the configurable properties.
Note that the upper-left corner of screen and object are the origin of position coordinate.
11.4.2 Visible

The Visible property makes the object visible or not, according to the specified TAG s value.
Typically a digital TAG is used to control the visibility of the object.
CIMON-Xpanel 158
11.4.3 Blink
The Blink property makes the object to blink when the TAG value is the given state.
The blinking speed is adjustable in the unit of 100mSec.
11.4.4 V-Size

The V-Size property varies the height of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the height of object will be 0.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the height of object will be original height.
(Original height is the drawn height.)

11.4.5 H-Size

CIMON-Xpanel 160
The H-Size property varies the width of the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the width of object will be 0.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the width of object will be original width.
(Original width is the drawn width.)

11.4.6 V-Move

The V-Move property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn
position.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount
of pixel value assigned to
the Move field. If the Bottom was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be upward.
Otherwise ( Top ), the movement direction will be downward.

11.4.7 H-Move

CIMON-Xpanel 162
The H-Move property moves the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
If TAG value is equal to the designated minimum value, the position of the object will be originally drawn
position.
And if TAG value is equal to the designated maximum value, then the position will be moved with the amount
of pixel value assigned to
the Move field. If the Left was checked as the base position, the movement direction will be right.
Otherwise ( Right ), the movement direction will be left.

11.4.8 Color
The Color property changes the fill color of object depending on the value of specified TAG.
Maximum 8 different color boundary values can be declared.
This means that there can be maximum 9 different colors including the original color of object.
11.4.9 Rotate

CIMON-Xpanel 164
The Rotate property rotates the object depending on the value of specified TAG.
The rotate direction and angle and center position are configurable parameters.
The center point can be easily calculated with the coordinate information in Style properties (static properties)
.
For example, assume a following object s coordinate data in Style property page.

This object s center point is :
Xcent = X + Width / 2 =
141 + 312 / 2 = 297
Ycent = Y + Height / 2 =
30 + 33 / 2 = 46.5 = 46

11.4.10Touch

The Touch property creates an operator touch zone. Following table shows the list of available actions with
the Touch property.

Action Description Configuration Items
Open Page Open a new page specified in below.
Close Page Close the specified page
Write Tag Value
Write the specified value to the specified
TAG.
CIMON-Xpanel 166
Write Digital Value
Control the digital TAG with one of three
available control types.
Write Momentary
Write two different values in series to the
specified TAG. One value at touch down
and the other value at touch release.
Command Expression
Execute the programmed command
expression. Refer to the Script section for
more information about the command
expression.
Key Input
Issue the specified key code at touch. This
action emulates the keyboard input.
If the Condition check box above is checked, a conditional expression can be declared.
The evaluated value of this expression at runtime enables or disables the function of this property.
If the evaluated value is false, then the defined action will not work even if the touch zone is touched by
operator.
For more information about conditional expression, refer to the section of Script .
Furthermore, the touch zone has its own security level.
The specified action is executed only when the object is touched by the operator who has higher level of
privilege level
than the specified security level. For more information about the security system of XPanel, refer to the
Security section.
11.4.11EntryData

[ Number Enrty Data ] [ String Enrty Data ]
The EntryData property creates an
operator touch area which pops up one
of three different sized number or
string pad. Input data from operator will
be applied to the specified TAG. And
also, input range checking function
applicable to the input value. Following
three sample pictures show the
available number or string pad window
style. The size of number or string pad
window is different between each
window style. ( Window style 3 number
CIMON-Xpanel 168
pad fits small sized screen well, such
as 320x240 resolution)
[ Position Offset ]

Number Window Style 1 Number Window Style 2 Number Window Style 3

11.4.12Switch/Lamp
1. Overview
This function can express Switch/Lamp object on the monitor, practice the designated action or check the
condition of tag.
Each function of switch and lamp registered in the page can be used independently or two functions can be used
together by registering same tag.
2. Switch Function
Object Name
It is a name of pertinent Switch/Lamp object.
Shape Select
"State Image Select" of Switch/Lamp is displayed.
Shape nil
Switch/lamp will be displayed on the page as a transparent state like the area(size) of
switch/lamp.
A pertinent area is displayed in the dotted line.
Touch - Down / Touch
- Up
The operation point of the function registered in a pertinent switch can be confirmed.
It is possible to add the new function and delete an existing function.
Function Selection
Tab
Select - Switch / Switch Common / Lamp / Label Function
Switch Function
Selection Buttons
Select - Switch according to each function. The screen above is a Bit Switch selection
screen.
1) Bit Switch
CIMON-Xpanel 170
Tag Name Input - Tag Name to the Bit Switch
Function
Select - Function of Bit Switch
Set : The specified tag enters the state of turning on if the switch is pushed. The
state is maintained.
Reset : The specified tag enters the state of turning off if the switch is pushed. The
state is maintained.
Toggle : The specified tag changes into the state of ON/OFF if the switch is
pushed.
Momentary This function is registered to the Special Function Switch.
2) Word Switch
Switch Function
Select - Switch Function of Word Switch
- Write Analog Value : The value that the user set to the specified tag can be input.
- Tag Operation : When acting switch, the Operation action to the specified tag can
be specified.
Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR
Value
You can input the value of the tag registered in analogue switch and it is supported
with the data input of two shapes of 10/16 essence. Only if the switch action is the tag
Operation, the tag can be used.
Hexa
The form of the input value can be specified. If it is not a check, it will basically
recognize it by the value of the decimal number.
Operator
When Tag Operation is selected in the Switch Function, Operation Function can be
used.
Operation that can be specified : +, -, AND, OR, XOR
CIMON-Xpanel 172
3) Page
Page Type
Select - Page Type when Page Function is used
- Normal Page / Keypad Page only one page can be registered in a pertinent switch.
Page Name Input - Page Name
Tag Name Input - Tag Name
HORIZ. / VER. Input - Size of Page
Max. / Min. Value Setup a Max. / Min. Value of Tag
4) Special Function

Switch Action
Command : Command that can be used with Xpanel Designer can be input.
Key Input : Set the Keyboard Input Function to Switch.
Write the Value of Momentary : It is a Momentary input function.
Key Value Select - Key Value. The same input as the input with a general keyboard is possible.
Down - Input Value When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Downs.
Up - Input Value When acting switch, set the Input Value in the condition that Switch Ups.
3. Switch Common
CIMON-Xpanel 174
Use Touch
Set the Touch Condition. When the relative terms are satisfied, the touch action of
switch is possible.
Touch Condition
Setting
Input - Touch Condition
Use Security Function Check - Use Security Function
Security Setting Set the Security Level. The highest level is ten for the security level.
4. Lamp
Use Lamp Set - "Use Lamp".
Tag Type
Set - "Tag Type" of Lamp .
The string tag cannot be selected.
State
Ranges of the number of states are different because of the kind of pertinent tag and
the union of the state conversion condition.
Digital Tag Analog Tag
At each Bit condition
conversion
2- 5 2- 17
With Data condition
conversion
2- 16 2-256
Tag Registration
Because the activated State is changed by the number of each State, register tags
after setting the number of the State.
5. Label
- The pertinent label could be expressed to each switch / lamp object.
- Label can express the registered string to the "direct input" and the "string table".
- "Font Set" can be set to each label.
CIMON-Xpanel 176
Sate Select The "Sate Select" is activated based on the number of states set to the lamp.
Input Type Select - "Direct Input" or "String Table".
Direct Input
The user can make the content directly by being activated when the "Direct Input" is
selected.
String Table Set When the string table is selected, a pertinent string can be set.
Font Set "Font Set" can set the size, the color, and the alignment of the displayed string.
6. Image Setting of Switch/Lamp
1) Click - [Shape Select]
Part Palette The image library registered now is displayed.
CIMON-Xpanel 178
Pattern
There is a pattern in each image registered in each palette. The corresponding pattern
can be selected.
Part No. The part images registered in a present palette can be selected.
New Palette Set - The name and the storage point of a new palette
Create Call - 'Part Registration' that selects images to register in the New Palette.
Delete Delete - The part image registered in the palette
Double Click - "State" Image or Select a state and Click the "Open" button to register image.
As you check the transparent state, the background picture without the shape of the object from the image
becomes transparent (the image expressed to the page has no background picture).

Top Level Intro
Part
XII
Keypad Page 181
12 Keypad Page
By using the function, you can use the page designed by the operator as the keypad for the data input.
See :
Make Keypad Page
12.1 Make Keypad Page
Make Keypad Page
Make Keypad
Page
Following picture shows how to create "Keypad Page".
*The keypad page should satisfy the following condition.
Select - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties
It should include Keypad input window one more and be smaller than the picture s
size in the setup.

Create - New Page and Set - "Keypad Page" in Page Properties
Change - The size of page in Page Position and Click - [->Copy]
CIMON-Xpanel 182
Register - "Key Input Window"
In the registration of the keypad input window, the designated tag is ignored when it is
operated by the keypad. Instead of it, Command On Input is normally handled.
When it is operated by the keypad, all key input windows registered to the page hand the
input figure to the tag registered to Open the keypad page lastly called. If registered tag
is the number (analogue, digital) tag and the inputted content in the key input window is
not able to express numerically, the writing action will be ignored.
Register - "Key Input" button to input the value in "Key Input Window"
Keypad Page 183
Save the Page.
Using Keypad
Page
Following picture shows how to use "Keypad Page".
Open - Page to call "Keypad Page" and "Object Config" to use by button.
Select - "Touch" function and Set - "Keypad Page Open" in the Print Page of Action
Register - "Tag Name" to input the value from the keypad page
Input - HORIZ. and VER. for position of keypad page
If Maximum/Minimum Value of input are applied, set up the range of Maximum/Minimum
Value.
Register - Keypad Page to "Page Name"
If the registered page is normal and popup page, 'Action' will be "Open Page".
As the keypad page is already opened, the page is moved to the designated position.
Top Level Intro
Part
XIII
Key Input Window 185
13 Key Input Window
The Keyboard-Input is expressed to the monitor and stored with a designated tag.
It utilizes to manage a bar code input and to compose the screen of a password log-in.

See :
Key Input Setting
13.1 Key Input Setting
Click - [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer
CIMON-Xpanel 186
End-Code Save inputted contents after inputting the value of a designated key at the tag.
Input Tag Name Select - String Tag to save the input contents.
Command On
Input
Input - "Command"
The Command inputted here is operated after obtaining the input complete code
and storing the input content to the designated tag.
[Ex.] [When the input value is 1234, the "Main" page is opened.] Write the following
command.
IF(BARCODE_00 == 1234 )
PageOpen( Main );
Max. Input Set the length of the Max. String expressed to the key input window.
Key Input Window 187
Characters Not to express the String over the designated length on the input window.
Max. / Min Value
If Analog Tag is selected, Set - "Max. / Min. Value". This setting is disregarded in
the string tag.
Min. Value Set - Input Min. Value
Max. Value Set - Input Max. Value
Clear Window At
Overflow
If this setting is checked, remove the last content and then express the new
content.
End-Code Process The state of the key input widow is changed referring to the setting of "End-Code".
Remove Input
Focus
Remove Input Focus of key input widow. The string is not input any more.
Move Focus To
Next Input Window
Other key input windows are automatically selected. The selection of key input
window that input completes is canceled.
Clear Window
Clear - Content of key input window
After checking and obtaining the input complete code, save the tag s value and
remove the content expressed to the present key input window.
If the check is canceled, the tag s value will be saved and the last input content is
displayed before obtaining next key input.
Password Type The string is displayed in the key input window by ***" form if checked.
Show Keyboard
On Double Click
Show Keyboard On Double Click 'Key Input Window'
It will disappear when a soft keyboard is displayed.
CAUTION
If two more key input windows are registered in the one screen, the key input is applied to only the one
window that is activated.
So, in case of using the key input with other Objects, the control of the key input of other Objects are not
handled normally.
Top Level Intro
Part
XIV
Data Logging 189
14 Data Logging
This function is used to save the tag value for logging in file type.
The tags for logging are analog and digital tag. Only the tags selected for data logging when tags are registered
to a database are available.
For logging tag values, a data-logging model should be set up and be registered to a project.
According to selected model, the data of a corresponding tag are logged and saved in file type.
The logged tag data is used as the data for a trend.
The function to save a logged data in file is provided.
Data are logged according to regular interval or in case that a value is changed.
Files that are classified according to file size and logging term are saved.
Back-up function, which is used to save logged data file to other location automatically, is provided.
A specific data saved in a file can be read through Script language.
Logged data can be displayed on a trend window through Historical Trend.
See :
Data Logging Configuration
Using Data Logging
14.1 Data Logging Configuration
Click - [Tools] -> [Data Logging] of Xpanel Designer
CIMON-Xpanel 190

Description of Control Button

Add
If you press the Add button after you configure data logging, a new model will be
added. If a same logging model name exists, an Error dialogue box will appear.
Apply
This is used to register a corresponding data-logging model. If you press this button,
a registered model will be displayed in the data logging model list on the left.
Delete
This is used to deletea created model.
If you press the Delete button after you select the model deleted in a data
logging model list, a Warning dialogue box will appear. If you want to delete,
select Yes . Otherwise, select No .
Data Logging 191
Close
This is used to closea Data Logging Configuration.
If you change or add a data-loggingmodel, the dialogue box to ask whether
a model is registeredwill appear.
Configuration of Data Logging

Logging Model
Name
This is used to enter the name of the data-logging model created.
The limited conditions
1. It is available to enter in the combination of English, Korean, numeral and
specific characters.
2. There is no limitation on the number of the characters entered.
If you do not enter it, an Error dialog box will appear as follows.
Start Type
Xpanel provides 5 different start types. Each of these is based on period,
command, tag and time.
Whenever a new log task is started, a new block file will be created and the old
task will be stopped and closed automatically.
The name of a block file is automatically generated based on the started time.
CIMON-Xpanel 192
Periodic
A log task is started periodically. The period of task invoking is configured in the unit
of minute. During one day, log task is started on every multiple of designated
minute. For example, if the Base Time was configured as 1H 30M, the log task
will be invoked on 00:00, 01:30, 03:00, 04:30, ..., 22:30.
This example assumes that Time Offset is configured as 0 . The time offset is a
delay of start. If it is assigned as 10, the log task of previous example will be invoked
on 00:10, 01:40 and so on.
Called (by command)
This type of invoking is triggered by a command. A command can be issued by touch
operation or script program. The command has a following format :
DataLog("ModelName", 1)
Trigger TAG
The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG
changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. The value change from
non-zero to zero does not affect to the log task. Designate the name of TAG in Tag
Name field.
Enable TAG
The log task is triggered by the state change of a TAG. When the value of a TAG
changes from zero to non-zero, the log task will be invoked. And when the value
changes from non-zero to zero, the log task will be terminated. That is, the log task
keeps logging only while the value of TAG is non-zero. Designate the name of TAG
in Tag Name field.
On Time
The log task is invoked only once in a day. Set the time of log in Base Time field.
Log Type
(1)Periodic
Tag values are logged at "Periodic".
In case of logging at "Periodic", input a logging Period by the second.
Data Logging 193
(2)Tag Value
If the value of tag is changed, data is logged.
In case of logging at "Tag Value", input a Name of Tag.
The setting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] ->
[Database] of Xpanel Designer.
Maximum Log No.
Per Block
Setup - Maximum Log No. Per Block
The setting range is 1~2048, and the Data Logging of the block is closed when
the setting maximum number is exceeded.
Maximum Block
No.
Setup - Maximum Block No.
The setting range is 1~32.
[CAUTION] When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded, data is covered
to the data block that became the oldest.
Tags
Register - Log Data
The tag that can be registered is digital tag and analog tag.
The selecting of tag is possible only the tag registered in [Tools] -> [Database]
of Xpanel Designer.
14.2 Using Data Logging
How to Save Logging File

Because the Data Logging file is saved by the XXXX type, the user is not seen.
Therefore, it is necessary to change to the CSV format for which the user can utilize this data. The following
two functions are offered in Xpanel for this.
MakeCsv(S1, R2)
MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)
For details on Internal Function, refer to the Script manual.
On Screen Display

Click - [Draw] -> [Data Log] of Xpanel Designer
CIMON-Xpanel 194

Log Model Name
Select - Log Model Name to display on screen.
Only the model registered by the process of two can be selected.
Text Color,Line
Color,Line Type
Setup - Table type of the Log Model
Column No., Row
No.
Setup - Shape of the table
Column first displays 'Date' and 'Time' of "Display" and the name of tag registered in
the Data Log Model is sequentially displayed.
Row displays the Log Data that corresponds to each tag and when 'Maximum
Value', 'Minimum Value', 'Average Value', and 'Summation Value' of "display" are
selected, the selected display item is displayed by reverse order in the Row of the
end of table.
When the setting Maximum Log No. is exceeded, i t is possible to see by moving the
data of table via [Draw] -> [Key Input Window] of Xpanel Designer. Refer to the
"Keypad Page" manual
Date Type
Setup - Date Type when 'Date' is selected in "display".
Date Type provides 'YY/MM/DD', 'DD/MM/YY', 'MM/DD', and 'DD/MM'.
Display Display - Necessary item in six-kind item like 'Date' and 'Time' etc.
Top Level Intro
Part
XV
CIMON-Xpanel 196
15 Data Bridge
Data bridge of Xpanel makes data synchronization between the communication measures possible.
Data bridge by the designated event sends the data of Source Device to the designated area of Destination
Device.
< Data Bridge data flowchart >
See :
Edit Data Bridge Model
15.1 Edit Data Bridge Model
Click - [Tools] -> [Data Bridge] of Xpanel Designer
Data Bridge 197
Icon Description

Icon Description
Add Data Bridge Model
Edit Data Bridge Model
Delete Data Bridge Model
Add Data Bridge Tag
Edit Data Bridge Tag
Delete Data Bridge Tag
Basic Setup

CIMON-Xpanel 198
Model Name Input - Data Bridge Model Name. Model Name should be entered but should not be
duplicated.
Model Type Tag Base :
If "Tag Base" is checked in the model type, the model will have Source tags and
Destination tags.
If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, the operation of the data
synchronization starts and the value of the Source tag is sent to the Destination tag in a
registered order. In case of it, if the communication of one side is not operated or the
value of each tag is same, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and
next tag will start.
Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the
letter event will be ignored.

Block Base :
If "Block Base" is checked in the model type, block information area of the model editor
is activated.
If the event happens by the designated Sync. Type, by reading the address area of the
tag designated to the 'Source Block Start Tag', data as same as the block size is sent to
the address area of the 'Destination Block Start Tag'. In case of it, if the communication
of one side is not operated, the operation of the synchronization will be canceled and
there are no data comparison to pertinent areas before the operation of the
synchronization.
Under the operation of the synchronization, if the synchronization events happen, the
letter event will be ignored.
Sync. Type Immediately :
It is possible to select "Immediately" when "Tag Base" is checked in the model type.
The value of the Source tag is always compared with the value of the Destination tag
and if the wrong value, the value of the Source tag is sent to the Destination tag.
Trigger : Sync. Event happens when the value of the specified Trigger tag is changed
from 0 to none 0.
Periodic : .Sync. Event happens by the time designated in "Sync. Period"
Trigger Tag It is activated when " Trigger" is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by
the value of the designated tag.
Sync. Period It is activated when "Periodic" is checked in the Sync. Type and Sync. Event happens by
the periodic value of the designated tag.
Block
Information
Setup - Synchronization Parameters of Block unit model. It is activatedwhen "Block
Base" is checked in the model type.
Block Size : Setup -Block Size for the data synchronization
Data Bridge 199
The data of the registered number is sent to the Destination Block.
Source Block Start : Register - Source Block Start Tag
Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address should
be registered .
Source Handshake : The value of the tag registered before reading the data of the
Source Block is made as 1,
the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It is
used to confirm the Source Data Reception
and Digital Tag should be registered.
Destination Block Start : Register - DestinationBlock Start Tag
Real Tag of the device with a consecutive address
should be registered.
Destination Handshake : The value of the tag registered before writing the data of
the Destination Blockis made as 1,
the value is initialized by 0 after work is completed. It
is used to confirm the DestinationData
Transmission and Digital Tag should be registered.
CIMON-Xpanel 200
Point
Other communication work to I/O Device will be delayed while synchronization working.
When you use the data bridge function too much or frequently generate the synchronization event,
please note the communication update can be delayed.
Top Level Intro
Part
XVI
CIMON-Xpanel 202
16 Modbus Slave
1. Function
By the function, the communication can be composed between Master equipment and Xpanel using the Modbus
protocol(RTU, TCP).
Xpanel has memory for Modbus Slave action inside, and if Master asks via the designated communication
channel, it answers to put the content of the memory in the frame.
The Modbus memory is composed of Coil(Max Size: 5000) and the Holding Register(Max Size: 10000) area and
Digital tag can be registered in the Coil area and Analogue/String tag be registered in the Holding Register Area.
Ex. When Tag1 is registered in Holding Register 400001, If it keeps reading the value of 400001 in Master, the
value of Tag1 is understood and moreover if it keeps writing the value in 400001, the value of Tag1 can be
changed.
Function Contents
1 Coil Area Reading
3 Hold Register Area Reading
5 Coil Writing
6 Holding Register Writing
Modbus Slave 203
15 Coil Writing
16 Holding Register Writing
< Modbus Function >
If the data form of the registered tag is bigger than Word (UINT 32, INT32, float..) or is the string tag, the
designated number will be used as the beginning number of data.
Ex 1. When the Form of Tag1 registered in Holding Register 400001 is UINT32, the data of Tag 1 is updated
to 400001 and 400002. When the value is written in 400002 with Master, the value of Tag 1 is also changed.
Ex 2. When Tag 3 registered in Holding Register 400001 is string tag(string size : 10), the data of Tag 3 is
updated to 400010 ~ 400014. When the value is written in 400014 with Master, the value of Tag 3 is also
changed.
16.1 Modbus Slave Setting
Open Modbus Slave
Click - [Tools] -> [Data Sever] -> [ MODBUS Slave] of XpanelDesigner or Modbus Slave item of Project
CIMON-Xpanel 204
window.
Communication Setting
The communication channel means a physical passage(Serial, Ethernet) for connection with Master. Setup -
Communication Parameter of the port and the Modbus Unit No. etc. in the channel setting.
The communication channel without the action form is registered up to 3, and each channel can be connected
with one Master.
Communication Setting
Communication Editing
Communication Deletion
Unit No. is a Modbus Unit No. of Xpanel.
The communication port should be set not to be duplicated with another communication channel or I/O device.
Modbus Slave 205
The "Soket No." defined in the Modbus TCP protocol is 502.
When you register the TCP channel by the addition, The "Soket No." should be set not to be duplicated. In this
case, it is necessary to edit the setting of Master.
Coil Area Tag
The Coil Area can be registered up to 05000(5000).
CIMON-Xpanel 206
Register - Tag in the Coils Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.
Click - "Coils Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using (Registration), (Editing) buttons.
Holding Register Area Tag
The Holding Register Area can be registered up to 410000(10000).
Register - Tag in the Holding Register Area. If the tag is not registered, the basic value(0) would be answered.
Click - "Holding Register Area" in the left window. Register or Edit - Tag using (Registration), (Editing)
buttons.
Top Level Intro
Part
XVII
CIMON-Xpanel 208
17 Recipe
The recipe service of Xpanel supports the multiple models. This makes it possible to manipulate different recipe
for multiple devices with an Xpanel.
In an Xpanel, every recipe model has its own name, parameters and group data. Up to 1024 group data can be
registered in a recipe model.
But at any time, only one group data can be manipulated in Xpanel. The reason is that a group data must be
located in the memory of Xpanel for manipulation.
A group data can be transferred between four types of media.
And the Xpanel memory is located at the center of these transfers. Following picture shows paths of group data
movement.

Each of group data movement is issued by the internal functions for recipe operation. More precise explanations
can be found on the script section of this manual.
RcpCsvRd(S1, S2,
R3)
A group data can be imported from external memory through CSV formatted file.
CSV formatted file can be created or read by the spreadsheet utilities such as
MS-Excel on PC
RcpMemUp(S1), A group data can be uploaded from the device through communication. For normal
Recipe 209
RcpMemDown(S1) recipe operation,
the communication driver must support the recipe functions.
This can be known from the manual of the communication driver. Refer to the
driver s manual.
RcpFileStore(S1, R2),
RcpFileRead(S1, R2)
The group data in memory can be stored to the recipe configuration file.
The stored group data will be maintained while power off.
And the function for reading a group data from configuration file is provided also.
RcpUpload(S1, R2) Compounded functions are provided for convenience.
RcpUpload() function is a compounded form of RcpMemUp() and RcpFileStore()
RcpDownload(S1,
R2)
RcpDownload() function is a compounded form of RcpFileRead() and
RcpMemDown().
See :
Model Configuration
Recipe Operator Interface
17.1 Model Configuration
A recipe model is defined by following dialog box of Xpanel Designer.

CIMON-Xpanel 210
Basic Properties

Mo
del
Na
me
Every recipe model has its own name. This name will be used in the functions for recipe operation.
Nu
mb
er
of
Gr
ou
p
One or more recipe group data can be predefined in a recipe configuration file.
Number of Group field gets the total number of predefined group data.
These group data can be read or written by RcpFileRead() or RcpFileStore(). Each group is distinguished by the
index number in those functions. According to the following example picture, index 0 is the Vanilla, and index 1 is
Choco and so on.
Re
cip
e
Ar
ea
Sta
rt
Po
siti
on
One of analog TAG in database can be assigned to this field. The device address of the TAG must be designated
with the first address of the recipe data memory area of a device. This memory area must be continuous. The
analog TAG of this field specifies not only the first address but also specifies the type of data. Xpanel supports
WORD (16 bits) and DWORD (32 bits) type of data for recipe. Therefore, the data type of an analog TAG for this
field should be one of INT16, UINT16, INT32 or UINT32. Following picture shows the property page of analog
TAG.
Recipe 211
Nu
mb
er
of
Da
ta
This field gets the total number of recipe group data items. All groups in a model have the same number of data.
The exact size of a recipe group data can be calculated from this value and the data type described in the
previous field (Recipe Area Start Position).
Handshake with the Device

Xpanel does handshake with a device while up/download a recipe data via communication.
The handshake is progressed on the basis of device memories. These handshake memories must be
declared as TAGs in the database of Xpanel.
Wo
rd
Ha
nd
sh
ak
e
Word handshake is a group of up/download request flags. It must be declared as an analog TAG with 16 bits
property. This word is divided into two different areas. High nibble of the word is the flags for request from
device (for example a PLC), and low nibble of word is the flags for request from Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 212
BIT
Ha
nd
sh
ak
e
The bit handshake must be declared as a digital TAG in database. It is set or reset by Xpanel.
This flag indicates that the recipe data transfer is under the progressing.
Therefore, by this flag, the device can recognize the fact that its recipe data are ready for use or not.
Gr
ou
p
Nu
mb
er
This field retains the group number for upload or download. And it is effective only when the recipe data
transfer is issued by device (PLC) side. The device can choose a group in Xpanel configuration file which is
wanted to be up/downloaded. The group number can be a number between 0 to 1023.
Following time chart shows the status of handshake signals during recipe data transfer. It is an example of
up/download issued by PLC side. For transfer a new recipe data from Xpanel to device (PLC), the group
number should be decided foremost and written to the memory of group number. And next, the device
signals the bit08 (or bit09) flag of word handshake. Immediately after detection of that signal, Xpanel sets the
bit handshake and starts to transfer the recipe group data which is designated by the group number field.
After the successful transfer, Xpanel resets the bit handshake signal and clears the word handshake also. The
device can recognize the completion of transfer through those handshake signals.

Following time chart shows an example of recipe data transfer issued by Xpanel side. All the handshake
signals are controlled by Xpanel. The group number field has no meaning at Xpanel issued transfer. Since the
group number was designated in the parameter of functions already (RcpUpload(), RcpDownload()) or does
not need the group number because data are not for file access (RcpMemUp(), RcpMemDown()). The device
can recognize the progress of recipe data transfer with word and bit handshake signals.
Recipe 213

Post Process for Uploaded Data

Automatically
File Store On PLC
Managed Upload
This option is effective only for the uploaded data by device side. As explained in
previous section, the device (PLC) can control the uploading process by using
handshake signal (bit9 of word handshake) and a group number.
If this option is checked, Xpanel will store the received recipe group data to the
configuration file automatically at the end of upload process. At that moment, the
group number from device will be used to determine which group in a file should be
replaced with the newly received data. Stored group data will be retained permanently
in flash memory even while Xpanel is powered off. If this option is not checked, the
uploaded data will be stored only in RAM.
17.2 Recipe Operator Interface
Recipe Functions

Xpanel provides 9 functions for recipe operation.
Those functions can be used as command of touch operation as well as script. Following table shows a list
of recipe functions.
(Please refer to the Script section for more information)
Function Description
RcpDownload(S1, R2) Read a group of recipe data from file, and download it to device
RcpUpload(S1, R2) Upload the specified recipe group data from device, and store it to file.
RcpStop(S1) Stop and terminate the processing job of specified recipe model.
RcpFileStore(S1, R2) Stores the recipe data to the file..
CIMON-Xpanel 214
RcpFileRead(S1, R2) Read the recipe data from file.
RcpMemDown(S1) Download the current recipe data to device.
RcpMemUp(S1) Upload the recipe data from device.
RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3) Read the recipe data from CSV formatted file.
RcpConfig() Pops up a dialog box for recipe data manipulation.
Recipe Dialog Box

RcpConfig() function pops up a dialog box on screen. This dialog box provides some tools for manipulating
recipe data in memory.
Each data item in a group can be modified by touch operation. Following picture shows a example of recipe
dialog box.
Save Save button stores the recipe group
data to the recipe configuration file.
The storage media can be the internal
flash memory of Xpanel or other
external none-volatile memory device
such as SD/MMC. It is dependent on
the location of project folder which is
determined on start-up.
Upload Upload button reads the recipe data
from device. Current recipe data in
memory will be discarded and
replaced with those of device. This
button gives the same result with the
function RcpMemUp()
Downl
oad
Download button writes current recipe
data in memory to device. This button
gives the same result with the
function RcpMemDown()
CSV File Importing

Xpanel provides a way to import the external recipe group data.
Recipe 215
External data must be a CSV formatted file and the SD/MMC or USB memory can be used for importing
media.
Following picture shows the work flow of recipe data importing.

Writing a CSV file CSV formatted file can be generated by spreadsheet program of PC such as Excel.
A CSV file can include one group data and the first data of this file should be the number of
following recipe data. This number must same with the Number of Data field of recipe
configuration dialog box.
Importing the
CSV file
on external
memory
RcpCsvRd() function is used for importing a CSV file from external memory media. External
memory can be the SD/MMC or USB memory. If there is no fault to access the CSV file in
external memory, the recipe group data will be loaded to RAM of Xpanel. After successful loading
of recipe group data, they can be manipulated in various ways. They can be stored in
configuration file and also can be downloaded to the device, Please refer to the Script section
for more information about RcpCsvRd() function.
Top Level Intro
Part
XVIII
System Memory 217
18 System Memory
System Memory function supports useful continuous memory space for the script, recipe and so
on.
This functionalso uses continuousdata storageat the script or editing buffer at the script.
System Memory : Continuous Data Space
Continuousdata storage for the Script.
Editing group data space for the Recipe

See :
Using System Memory Tag
Example of using system memory about opened page log.
Editing recipe data using system memory
18.1 Using System Memory Tag

System Memory Configuration

CIMON-Xpanel 218
Select menu [Tools] -> [Project(P)]
System Memory Size configures system memory size. If it is inputted 1000 like above figure then it
assigns range 0 ~ 999.

Registering Tag

Register the tag at data base for use system memory as like virtual tag.
This case can handle system memory value directly and monitor the value.

System Memory 219
Input tag name. Select the kind of tag.
( System Memory area must be used as the Digital/Analog tag. )

Select real tag at the general tab. Select SYSTEM MEMORY at the I/O device.
( SYSTEM MEMORY item has been registered basically.)
Input I/O address will be used. If it is inputted 5 like above figure then address 5 data can be handled or
monitored.
(If it is inputtedless than 0 or out of the range assigned, the systemtag will not be worked.)

18.2 Example of using system memory about opened page log.
Follow example shows the method of making opened page log by using system memory.
Select system memory size
Register two virtual tags at the data base.
Name : PAGE_NUM, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0
Name : PAGE_LOG_SIZE, Type : Analog, Initial Value : 0

CIMON-Xpanel 220
Register 10 system memory tags at the data base.
Name : SYSTEM_00, Type : Analog
Change I/O address as the follow figure and register 10 tags until SYSTEM_09.

Select menu [Tools]-> [Script(S)]
Create the script as follow.
System Memory 221

Input commandsat script as follows
//Move system memory data from address 0 to PAGE_LOG_SIZE based on address 1.
Sysmemmove(0,1,PAGE_LOG_SIZE);
//Save current page number at the system memory address 0.
SetSysMem(0,PAGE_NUM);
//If PAGE_LOG_SIZE if less than 10 then increase 1.
if(PAGE_LOG_SIZE < 10)
PAGE_LOG_SIZE = PAGE_LOG_SIZE + 1;
"Create new page Page1

CIMON-Xpanel 222
Select [Tools]-> [Page setup]
Input as follow figure in the action tab.

If Page1 is opened,PAGE_NUM tag value is set 1 and runs InserPageLog function.
Create Page2 , Page3 and input as above figure changing PAGE_NUM tag value.
System Memory 223

Arrange tag object at the page and let it indicates SYSTEM_00 tag.

Through the same method arrange SYSTEM_01, SYSTEM_02, SYSTEM_09 tags at the page.
Copy above objectsand paste to all pages.

CIMON-Xpanel 224
Insert Side5Buttonwizard fromlibrary and register page open actionat each button.
System Memory 225

Open configure window through [Tools]->[CIMON-XPANEL setup(X)].Indicate starting page and
download project.

Every time when the page is openedby using side button, logs of opened page are updated.

CIMON-Xpanel 226
< Xpanel acting page, recently opened page >
18.3 Editing recipe data using system memory
Bellow example shows the method of editing recipe internal buffer using system memory.
Registering System tag

Register system memory tag at the data base for displaying system value tag value at the monitor.
Register 10 tags address 0 ~ 9 according to the following figure.

Registering tag for Recipe model
Register tags for the Recipe model. Refer the manual for more details. In this example is registered
bellows.
Recipe Area Start Position: START
Handshake Word : CONTROL
Handshake Bit: CTL_BIT
Handshake Group Number: GROUP
Registering Recipe model
System Memory 227
Register model for recipe working. Refer the manual for more details.

Page construction for editing system memory

Construct page for editing and displaying system memory. Arrange tag value object at the page and
register system memory tag.

CIMON-Xpanel 228
Check the EntryData and register same system memory tag.

System Memory 229

Register remained9 system memory tags at the page same method.

Make button to bring system memory from recipe data.

CIMON-Xpanel 230
Input commands as follows after selection of [Touch] -> [Command Expression] at the button
configuration.
When button is touched it brings buffer data of SAMPLE recipe model to system memory address 0. It
updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.

RcpGetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)
Register button to transfer system memory to the recipe
System Memory 231

configuration.
When buttonis touchedit transfers buffer data of SAMPLE recipe model to system memory address 0.
It updates 10 areas from address 0 to 9.
RcpSetSysMem("SAMPLE",0)
Making Recipe Upload Button
configuration.
When button is touched it updates SAMPLE recipe model s buffer by reading device s data.
RcpMemUp("SAMPLE");
Making Recipe Download Button
configuration.
When button is touched it downloads SAMPLE recipe model s buffer data to device.
RcpMemDown("SAMPLE");
CIMON-Xpanel 232
Save project and download project to Xpanel. It realizes download function about download at once after
reading continuous data and modifying
data according to order as like [Upload] -> [Bring recipe data to system memory] -> [Modifying system
memory] -> [Inputting system memory data] ->
[Download] in displaying monitor.
Top Level Intro
Part
XIX
CIMON-Xpanel 234
19 Trend
Xpanel provides various kinds of trend functions. Each trend function has its own distinguishable and specialized
data manipulation method and trending style.
System engineer can choose the best fitting trend function among those trend functions for their application.
See :
YT Trend / Scope Trend / SPC Trend / ST Trend / LOG Trend /
XY Trend
19.1 YT Trend

The YT Trend is periodical time based generic trend. The data for trending are collected by Xpanel. Y axis
represents the value of trending data and X axis represents the time. Maximum 8 different data (pens) can be
shown in a trend window at the same time. Each pen has its own data buffer (RAM) with capacity of 5000 data.
The datum of each pen is sampled and stored periodically to this buffer by Xpanel. This buffer makes it possible
to support the historical trend of sampled data.
Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which displays the more recent data. For example, if the Right is
selected, the trend screen will be
Trend 235
scrolled right to left direction and the right most data will be the most recent data.
Display Time Designate the time span of trend window. The maximum configurable time can be
derived from the sampling time.
(Max. 5000 x Sampling time)
Sampling
Time
Designate the data sampling time. Xpanel will collect the pen data at every this sampling
time.
The data buffer of a pen has the capacity of 5000 samples.
File Saving This option can be used when the historical trend data must be preserved in non-volatile
memory. Without this option, the historical data are stored in RAM (volatile memory).
One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of
historical data. Following table shows the logging path of each media. The log file has its
own format, it cannot be read other application software.
Media Logging Path
Main Memory //Xpanel/Log/<trend name>/
SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/
USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/
Object Style & Trend Area Style

The Object Style and Trend Area Style configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
following sample picture.
CIMON-Xpanel 236

Pen

A trend can be assigned maximum 8 pens. Each pen has its own properties and these properties must be
configured individually.
Trend 237

Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. Xpanel will log the value of this TAG in memory
periodically. Maximum 5000 data can be logged in memory for each pen.
Comment Designate a display name of pen. This name will be shown at the bottom of trend
window, as shown in the following example.
Min Value / Max
Value
Designate the minimum and maximum values of Y axis. If these values are denoted as
question mark ( ? ), those values defined in the TAG database will be applied.
Pen Color Designate a color to the pen.
CIMON-Xpanel 238
Control Button

If the Show Control Buttons option is checked, the operator can use the Control Button of the trend as
shown in the following example.
Switch the trending mode between real-time and historical.

Up and down page of the trending window. These buttons are activated only at
historical mode.

Zoom in or out page of the trending window.
Change the primary pen. Min/Max values of Y axis are those of the primary pen.
Open the online trend configuration tool. The following picture shows the online
configuration tool window. Operator can change the monitoring time and pen by using
this tool.
Trend 239
Legend

The date and TAG value can be shown or hidden by option in Legend tab.
Following example window shows the Date and TAG Value area which can be controlled by above options.
Grid

CIMON-Xpanel 240
The number of grids and their color can be configured in this configuration tab. Following sample picture
shows the grids with above configuration.
Y-Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

The legend of each axis can be hidden or shown by the above options. Following sample trend shows those
two legends.
Trend 241
19.2 Scope Trend
The Scope Trend is useful at the system of test equipment. This trend can display maximum 8 different sampled
data lists on the same window.
The sampled data lists can be located in device memory or Xpanel s log file.
Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the Right is
selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.
CIMON-Xpanel 242
Object Style & Line Color

The Object Style and Line Color configuration tab decide the color of trend window as shown in the
Pen

The scope trend can read the pen data not only from the device memory but also from the logged data file
of Xpanel.
Trend 243
Using DataLog
Model
If this field was checked, then all the declared data logger models are listed in the
combo-box as shown in the following picture.
When one of data logger models is chosen, the TAGs registered in this data logger
model are automatically listed in the pen list.
If this field was not checked, then Xpanel will read pen data from the device
memory. Following dialog box is used for defining the properties of each pen.
Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. In case of scope trend, this TAG s address represents the
origin of a Y axis data list.
Comment Designate a display name of pen.
Min Value / Max
Value
These items have no meaning in scope trend.
CIMON-Xpanel 244
Grid


two legends. The Size (Pixcels) configuration item decides the width of Y-Axis legend.
Trend 245
Scope Option

Data Porint Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.
[Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Please refer to the
CIMON-Xpanel 246
Scope Tags

Following TAGs must be configured in this configuration tab.
Control Bit This field is effective only on device memory based trend. If the trend is based on data
logger model, just leave this field as empty.
If the trend is based on the device memory sampled data, designate a real digital TAG to
this field. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this Control Bit .) The TAG is used for
handshaking purpose while transferring sampled data. The PLC sequence program can be
Trend 247
noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG. During this signal, the
time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.
Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the
following table.
Value Action
2 Clear the trending window
3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.
Other Values No action.
This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence
program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Data Count This field indicates total number of sampled data in device memory. It can be the range
between 1 and 2048. This field is not effective on data logger model based trend.
Minimum /
Maximum
These fields specify the range of Y axis. The specified range is effective to all pens.
Block Number This field is effective only on the data logger based trend. The block number of logged data
is identified by the value of this TAG.
19.3 SPC Trend
The SPC Trend has no time axis. All axes are based on sampled or predefined value lists stored in the device.
The SPC trend visualizes the relationship between those data. X axis can be assigned only one data list. Y axis can
be assigned maximum 8 different data lists. Note that all those data lists must be stored in device memory.
Xpanel supports a real-time cursor which represents the position from current X and Y values.
Following picture shows the first configuration tab page of SPC trend. As shown in this picture, there is no need
to time configuration.
Trend Config

CIMON-Xpanel 248
Display Basis Designate the side which represents the minimum value of X axis. For example, if the
Right is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of lowest X axis value.

Trend 249
Pen

Tagname Define a TAG for each pen. In case of SPC trend, this TAG s address represents the
origin of a Y axis data list.
Comment Designate a display name of pen.
CIMON-Xpanel 250
Min Value / Max
Value
These items have no meaning in SPC trend.
Grid


Trend 251
SPC Option

Using Moving
Point
The moving point is a real-time data cursor. This point moves at every data update. The
coordinate of the movement is calculated by the TAG values of X Axis Moving and Y
Axis Moving configuration items. Please refer to the next section for information about
these configuration items.
[Color] : The real-time data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The color
of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.
[Size (Pixels)] : Designate the size of cursor in the unit of pixel.
CIMON-Xpanel 252
Data Point Every data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.
Draw Data
Connection
If this option is checked, lines will be drawn between every neighboring data. Please
refer to the following sample picture.
SPC Tags

Trend 253
Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in
the following table.
Value Action
1 Draw a new trend without clearing (overwrite).
3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new trend.
This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the
sequence program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Data Count Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG represents the number of data be
drawn in the trend window. It can be a value between 0 and 2048.
X Axis Min. /
Max
Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of X axis when
the Control TAG s value is changed to 1 or 3.
Y Axis Min. /
Max
Designate analog TAGs. The values of these TAGs reconfigure the range of Y axis when
the Control TAG s value is changed to 1 or 3.
Control Bit Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this Control
Bit .) The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of trend data. The
PLC sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of
this TAG. During this signal, the trend data should not be modified for data consistency.
X Axis Moving /
Y Axis Moving
Designate analog TAGs which represent the coordinate of real-time cursor. These
configurations are valid only when the Using Moving Point option of SPC Option tab
was checked.
X Axis Start Designate a real analog TAG. (The virtual TAG can not be used in this field.) The device
address of the designated TAG is considered as the origin (start address) of X axis data.
Xpanel assumes that the data are stored continuously in device memory and the length
of data is the value stored in the TAG of Data Count field.
CIMON-Xpanel 254
19.4 ST Trend
The ST Trend is useful at the system of temperature control and monitoring. This trend provides a display
solution for time schedule of control. Maximum 8 different schedules and 2 real-time traces can be displayed in
the same trend window. The schedule data are composed of a time span and destination value pair. Each
schedule data can include up to 2048 pairs of schedule point. The X axis of ST trend is an accumulated time of
those schedule data. The configuration of ST trend is described as followings.
Trend Config

Display Basis Designate the side which represents the time origin of X axis. For example, if the Right
is selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of zero (0).
Sampling Time Designate the sampling time for real-time trace. The unit of this time is 100 mSec.

Trend 255
Pen

A pen of ST trend represents a time schedule. Maximum 8 different time schedules can be displayed in the
same trend window.
The pen of ST trend must have a given data format. Each point in a time schedule is represented by a pair
of data as shown in the above diagram. One preceding datum (delta-T of above diagram) represents the
time duration and the other following datum (v of above diagram) represents the control value. These two
data pair represents a point in trend window and those pairs should be stored in the continuous device
memory.
The TAGs which will be designated in the following dialog box should have the address of the first delta-T.
CIMON-Xpanel 256
Tagname Designate a TAG which represents the first data memory address of time schedule list.
Comment Designate a description of the pen.
Min Value / Max
Value
These items have no meaning in ST trend.
Data Count Tags

Designate the analog TAG which has the number of total pen data. As noted in the previous part, a pen data
is expressed with a pair of two values. Hence, this TAG must have the value of 2n (n is the number of time
Trend 257
schedule points).
Grid

Y- Axis Legend & X-Axis Legend

CIMON-Xpanel 258
The X-Axis legend has 4 different time expression formats as shown in the above picture. One of them can
be chosen as an actual format.
ST Trend Options

Trace Point Every trace data can be distinguished by dots. These dots have the shape of
rectangular.
[Color] : The real-time trace data cursor has the shape of small rectangular dot. The
Trend 259
color of this dot can be designated. Please refer to the following example picture.
Data Point Every time schedule data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have
the shape of rectangular.
[Size] : Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
ST Tags

CIMON-Xpanel 260
Control Bit Designate a real digital TAG. (The virtual digital TAG can not be used for this Control Bit .)
The TAG is used for handshaking purpose while the transfer of time schedule data. The PLC
sequence program can be noticed the data transfer by monitoring ON (1) signal of this TAG.
During this signal, the time schedule data should not be modified for data consistency.
Control Designate an analog TAG. The value of this TAG controls the trend window as shown in the
following table.
Value Action
3 Clear the current trend window and draw a new time schedule trend.
4 Starts the real time trace
5 Pauses the real time trace
6 Resets the real time trace
This analog TAG can be a real TAG as well as a virtual TAG. This means that the sequence
program in PLC can control or update the trend window of Xpanel.
Trace Point Designate an analog TAG to be traced. ST trend collects the data of this TAG at every
sampling period, and stores the data in memory up to 2048 samples. Those sampled trace
data will be drawn on the trending window by real time. The real time trace data can be
easily visualized and compared with the time schedule data which were drawn already in
trending window.
Trend 261
Minimum
Value / Using
Fixed Minimum
Value
Minimum represents the minimum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a
fixed value but also a TAG. If the Using Fixed Minimum Value item was checked, the
minimum value should be given by fixed constant.
Maximum
Value / Using
Fixed Maximum
Value
Maximum represents the maximum value of the Y axis. It can be designated by not only a
fixed value but also a TAG. If the Using Fixed Maximum Value item was checked, the
maximum value should be given by fixed constant.
Trace Display
Time / Using
Fixed Trace
Display Time
Trace Display Time represents the maximum value of the X axis. It can be designated by not
only a fixed value but also a TAG. The unit of display time is second. If the Using Fixed Trace
Display Time item was checked, the maximum time value in second should be given by fixed
constant.
19.5 LOG Trend
The Log Trend is similar to the YT Trend . It is based on a time axis, and 16 different data can be displayed at
the same time.
However, the Log Trend does not require the periodical data sampling. The data can be sampled or initialized at
any time by a trigger.
Trend Config

CIMON-Xpanel 262
Display Basis Designate the side which represents the origin of X axis. For example, if the Right is
selected, the right most trend screen will be the position of index zero (0) data.
File Saving This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the
sampled data is written to the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000
logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory media can be chosen for the storage of
log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.
Media Logging Path & CSV File name
Main Memory //Xpanel/Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV
SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV
USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV

Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.
Trend 263

Pen

CIMON-Xpanel 264
Tagname Define a TAG for each pen.
Comment Designate a display name of the pen.
Min Value / Max
Value
In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.
The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.
Grid

If Using Multi-Channel of Log Option tab was checked, the Y-Axis grid number has no meaning. Y-axis grid
Trend 265
is not displayed when multi-channel trend mode.

CIMON-Xpanel 266
Log Option

The log trend specific options can be configured in this tab.
Buffer Size Log trend keeps the sampled data in Xpanel s memory. This field specifies the size of
buffer for sampled data.
Sampling Type Log trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.
This field decides which type of sampling to be used.
Trend 267
Sampling Time If the periodical sampling type was chosen at Sampling Type field, the trend needs the
period in 100mSec. unit.
Trigger Tag If the trigger sampling type was chosen at Sampling Type field, the trend needs the
name of TAG which represents the trigger signal. The sampling is done when this signal
changes from zero to non-zero value.
Control Tag This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of
each code that this control TAG can have.
Value Action
0 Do the normal sampling and trending job.
1 Pause the sampling and trending job.
2 Reset and clear the sampling buffer.
Data Point : Size
(Pixels)
Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the
shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows
the border of trend window.
19.6 XY Trend
The XY Trend has no time axis like the SPC Trend . And it does not take block data from device, but the Xpanel
collects the trending data periodically or on every trigger event. This trend can display the correlation between a
designated data (X-axis) and up to 16 data (Y-axis). Maximum 800 pairs of correlation data are maintained in
memory.
CIMON-Xpanel 268
Trend Config

File Saving
This option generates CSV formatted file at runtime. At every 10 seconds all the sampled data is written to
the log file in CSV format. A log file includes up to 30,000 logs. One of three kinds of non-volatile memory
media can be chosen for the storage of log files. Following table shows the logging path of each media.
Media Logging Path & CSV File name
Main Memory //XPanel/Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV
SD Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV
USB Memory //Log/<trend name>/YYMMDDHHmmSS.CSV
Following picture is a sample view of CSV log file.
Trend 269

Pen

CIMON-Xpanel 270
Tagname Define a TAG for each pen.
Comment Designate a display name of the pen.
Min Value / Max
Value
In log trend each pen can be assigned different minimum and maximum Y axes values.
The minimum value must be assigned as a smaller value than maximum value.
Grid

Trend 271

XY Option
CIMON-Xpanel 272

The XT trend specific options can be configured in this tab.
Buffer Size XY trend maintains the sampled data in Xpanel s memory. This field specifies the size of
buffer for sampled data.
Sampling Type XY trend can handle not only periodically sampled data but also trigger sampled data.
This field decides which type of sampling to be used.
Sampling Time If the periodical sampling type was chosen at Sampling Type field, the trend needs the
period in 100mSec. unit.
Trigger Tag If the trigger sampling type was chosen at Sampling Type field, the trend needs the
name of TAG which represents the trigger signal. The sampling is done when this signal
changes from zero to non-zero value.
Control Tag This TAG controls the operation of trend window. The table below shows the effects of
each code that this control TAG can have.
Value Action
0 Do the normal sampling and trending job.
1 Pause the sampling and trending job.
2 Reset and clear the sampling buffer.
Trend 273
Data Point : Size
(Pixels)
Every sampled data in trend window can be distinguished by dot. These dots have the
shape of rectangular. Designate the size of dot in the unit of pixel.
Draw Border The outline of the trend window can be shown by this option. Following picture shows
the border of trend window.
Draw Data
Connection
This option makes Xpanel draw the line between data points. If this option was not
checked, then following trend would be displayed. There is no line between points.
Display Time Xpanel can display the time of last sampled data. This option controls the time will be
shown or not. Please see the picture of Draw Border option above.
XY Min/Max

The minimum and maximum values of x axis are configured in this tab. These configurations can be not only
static numbers (fixed value) but also TAGs. When a TAG is assigned to the minimum or maximum value, the
range of x axis would be changed dynamically at runtime.
CIMON-Xpanel 274
Top Level Intro
Part
XX
CIMON-Xpanel 276
20 String Editor
String editor constructs a number of string groups. These string groups are managed like string tables at
runtime.
Each group can be distinguished by group number. And all the strings defined in each group can be referenced by
index number.
Constructed string groups are useful when there is a need to make (or display) different string according to the
status code.
It can be accomplished by two different ways as shown in the following picture.
One method is done by the String Value graphic object and the other is done by the StringTable() script
function.
These two different applications will be described in next sections of this manual.

See :
String Construction
20.1 String Construction

String Group Construction

Click - the Tools - String Editor menu or the icon.
String Editor 277
Add String
Group
A new string group will be created by this icon (menu).
Delete String
Group
This icon (menu) deletes a group.
Add String
A new string can be added to the current group by this icon (menu).
Edit String
A string can be modified by this icon or double click of mouse.
Delete String
This icon deletes a selected string.
Insert Multiple
Language String
Group
A new multiple language string group will be created by this icon
(menu).
Please refer to the section of "Using Multiple Language" .
CIMON-Xpanel 278

String Display

Ho
w
to
us
e
Str
ing
Val
ue'

Click - the 'Draw - String Value' menu
String Editor 279
* The string is not output when there is no input string of the value of analog tag in the input string table. (Null)
Ho
w
to
us
e
Stri
ng
Ta
ble
()'
1) Register - String Tag
(It is necessary to register the string tag that displays the script to use the script.)

CIMON-Xpanel 280
2) Click - [Tools] -> [Scripts] -> [Add Script]

3) Write - Script Program
Following script example shows the usage of StringTable() function. For more information about the
StringTable() , please refer to the section of Script .

4) Select a Object and Click - [Draw] -> [Tag] -> [Tag Name]
String Editor 281

Top Level Intro
Part
XXI
Using Multiple Language 283
21 Using Multiple Language
You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple
language tables.
If your windows system based languageis English, you must install MUI for multiple language.
You can downloadMUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com).

See :
How to Set Multiple Language
Multiple language string display
Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by using multiple language table)
21.1 Multiple Language setup
This manual provides how to use Multiple Language.
By the function, languages of various countries are displayed to the screen.
IN THIS TOPIC :
Register IME Language and IME Selection
Register IME

In English Window, IME should be used for inputting the language of another country(Japan, China..).
Following pictures describes how to register IME.
1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]
2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]
CIMON-Xpanel 284

3. Check - language and the IME registered in the English Window.
4. For example, if you want to input Japanese, Japanese and one more IME should be registered in the
installed service.
5. H ow to register IME
5.1. Click - [Add]

5.2 Select - Language in 'Input Language'

6. Select - IME in 'Keyboard layout/IME'. When the input language is selected, the basic IME is
automatically selected.
7. Click - [Ok]
Language and IME Selection

1. Click - [Control Panel] -> [Regional and Language Options]
2. Select - "Languages" Tab -> Click - [Details...]
3. Click - [Language Bar], Check - "Show the Language Bar on the desktop", Click - [Ok]

4. Select - Language of "Language Bar"

CIMON-Xpanel 286
5. Select - IME by clicking IME icon.

6. Letters are input via the selected IME.
21.2 Multiple language string display
Make - Page to input the string. Register - String by using each language.
Register Japanese String

1. Change the language to the Japanese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Natural Input 2002 ver.8.1] by clicking IME icon
( To select the relative item, the IME of the relative language should be registered in the window.
Refer to the "Multiple Language setup")

3. Change - Input Mode(Hiragana) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Japanese using Keyboard

5. Change the font to the "MS Gothic" in Font Toolbar. MS Gothic selected here is a Japanese basic
font.
It is possible that if the inputted string is not expressed as a designated font, it might not be
expressed normally, so change to the font of the relative country.

Register Chinese String

1. Change the language to the Chinese in the "Language Bar".

2. Select - [Microsoft Pinyin IME 3.0] by clicking IME icon

3. Change - Input Mode(Chinese) by clicking "Input Mode" button

4. Input - Chinese using Keyboard

5. Change the font to the "SimSun" in Font Toolbar. SimSun selected here is a Chinese basic font.

CIMON-Xpanel 288
It is possible to use it by inputting other languages except Japanese and Chinese to Xpanel.
21.3 Using Multiple Language (Change the displayed language by
using multiple language table)
You can change the displaying language to Korean, Japanese or Chinese by using multiple
language tables.
If your windows system based languageis English, you must install MUI for multiple language.
You can downloadMUI at the Microsoft home page (www.micorsoft.com).
IN THIS TOPIC :
Configure Multiple Language
Register Multiple Language Table
Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.
Configure Multiple Language

1. Tools -> Project

2. Click Language Configuration button to open multi language configuration window.

3. Check use multiple language for using multiple language.
4. Register analog tag at Table Control Tag to control column. For example, above figure
shows that selects valid tag as like COLSEL and
it decides referencing column by its value.
5. When program runs the initial column indicated by Table initial Value .
6. Register language name and representative font at Language 0 ~ 9.
Language string register at multiple language tables and it displayed here with registered
name and font.
Register Multiple Language Table

1. To input language string at multiple language tables, select Tools-> String Editor.

CIMON-Xpanel 290
2. Before you register multiple language tables, click button ( ) to register language which
will be used.

3. After above language setting, Column 0 is Korean(Gulim), Column 1 is Chineses(SimSun)
and Column 2 is Japanese(MS Gothic).
4. After complete registering language, click OK to save the configurations.
5. Click Add String Group button (), select Multiple Column and then OK . Multiple
column is string group having 16 columns and
Single column is string group having only one column.

6. Select one group in the already registered, click Add String button() to open add string
window.

7. Input string at each column while changing IME. At above example shows inputting multiple
languages.
CIMON-Xpanel 292
Column 0 is configured Korean, so use Korean IME for inputting string. Column 1 is
configured Chinese,
so use Chinese IME for inputting string. Input strings to remained table by the same method.
8. String table allows Cut & Past at Excel.

Multiple language table display by using multiple language string.

1. Multiple language string object display changed column of indicated string group which
controlled by Table Control Tag .
2. Select Draw -> Muli String or click button ( ) to make object at page.

3. Input the value at String Group and String Value.
4. According this procedure, make the multi String object and download this project.
If you change the tag(you registered as COLSEL ) for control multiple language table to 0,1,2
then you can see the
displaying string changed to , - ? ? ? ? , .
Each displayed strings
reference indicated font at corresponding column.
* Table Control Value"s value means string table column number and it is irrelevant to the
order of registered language
at language configuration window.

Top Level Intro
Part
XXII
Network Data Server 295
22 Network Data Server
Xpanel provides TAG values to CIMON SCADA system through Ethernet. For this purpose, there are two memory
areas in Xpanel as shown in the
following picture. Each memory area has 1,000 buffers. The SCADA system can read and write those memory
areas through Ethernet.
Following sections describe how to define the memories in Xpanel and configure the network and SCADA.

See :
Data Definition in Xpanel
The Configuration of CIMON SCADA
22.1 Data Definition in Xpanel
To enable the network data server service, the service memory areas need to be configured. Use the
Tools - Data Server menu or the icon.
CIMON-Xpanel 296
Following picture shows the memory definition window of Xpanel.
The memory is composed with two areas. One area is data memory (D) and the other is string memory (S).
Each area can be filled with up to 1,000 TAGs.
And these TAGs are designated the address ranged from 0 to 999.
Analog and digital TAG can be assigned in D area. The D memory area has the value of floating point type.
On the other side, only the string TAG can be assigned in S memory.
Point
The data server function needs a fixed IP address in network. For configuring the IP address of Xpanel,
please refer to the section of Configuration of this manual.
22.2 The Configuration of CIMON SCADA
Device Driver Configuration

CIMON SCADA deals the Xpanel just like a general device such as PLC.
That is, the same concept of configuration as PLC is applied to Xpanel in SCADA.
1. Create a Device First of all, the Xpanel must be registered in SCADA system though the I/O device
configuration window as shown in the following picture.
Choose the I/O Device Type as KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-XPANEL Ethernet
in the above windows. The following picture shows the dialog boxes for
configuration of Xpanel.
2. Create a Station

Every Xpanel registered as a station has to be identified by its IP address. Specify
CIMON-Xpanel 298
the IP address of Xpanel at #1-1 IP Address field of above window.
3. Create the
Comm.Block

If the station is created successfully, then define the communication blocks which
include the data to be used. The Xpanel provides two different memory areas, D
and S . These two memory areas are described in the previous section of this
chapter.
Point
Ensure that all data to be monitored are included in the COM Block . Otherwise,
it will not be monitored normally during online.
4. Identify the
SCADA
IP Address


The IP address of SCADA itself must be identified. Move to the COM Port tab of
the main dialog box.
And give the IP address of SCADA to the #1 IP Address field as shown in the
above picture.
TAG Configuration

1. Analog / Digital
Tag

The D memory area can be used as an analog or digital TAG in SCADA.
In the case of analog TAG, the Float data type is recommended as shown in
the following picture.
CIMON-Xpanel 300
In the case of digital TAG, the value is 1 (true) when the value from Xpanel is
non-zero.
Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the COM Block definition.
Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.
2. String TAG
The S memory area can be used in the string TAG in SCADA as shown in the
following picture.

Point
1.The maximum length of the string is 80 characters (bytes).
2.Ensure that the address of TAG is included in the COM Block
definition.
Otherwise, the data is not monitored normally at online.
Top Level Intro
Part
XXIII
CIMON-Xpanel 302
23 Security
Xpanel provides the security function which protects the secret screen or operation from unauthorized
access.
Every regal user, screen and touch operation in Xpanel has its own privilege level. The 11 privilege levels are
denoted by the number from 0 to 10.
The zero is the lowest level. The operator can see the page or operate the touch zone which has lower
privilege level than his.

See :
User Registration
Access Privilege
User LogOn / LogOff
23.1 User Registration
The Xpanel Designer provides a tool for user security configuration as shown in the following picture.

Security 303

Above user security configuration tool can be opened by Tools - Security menu or the icon in
toolbar.
Each user has following properties.
User ID User ID can be any combination of alpha-numeric characters.
The maximum length of ID string is 15 characters.
Level Assign the privilege level of the user.
This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.
Password Only the numeric characters ( 0 to 9 ) can be used as password.
The maximum length of password string is 15 characters.
CIMON-Xpanel 304

Description Give a simple description to the user data.
The maximum length of description is 256 characters.
Log On action
Script
This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do
something at user logon.
Describe the command script in this field.
Please refer to the Script section for more information about the command script .
Log Off Action
Script
This field is not necessarily edited. But, it is very useful when there is a need to do
something at user logoff.
Please refer to the Script section for more information about the command script .
23.2 Access Privilege
Xpanel provides the security for page and touch operation.
The user can access the page and touch zone which have the equal or lower privilege level than his.
Page Security

Security 305

The page security can be configured at Page Properties window as shown in the above picture.
This window can be opened by Tools - Page Setup menu.Every pages are designated a security level
between 0 and 10.
Zero level is the default and lowest level. The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access
(open) the page.
Touch Operation Security

CIMON-Xpanel 306
Touch zone security configuration is performed based on the above dialog box.
This dialog box is the Object Config window. The Touch and EntryData have the Security property page.
Assign a security level to this field.
The user whose privilege level is lower than this cannot access (touch) this object.
23.3 User LogOn / LogOff
Xpanel system s default user privilege level is zero. The default user privilege level is applied when there is no
logon user in Xpanel system.
To logon Xpanel system, the operator must submit his ID and password though the following window.
This window is popped up by LogOnWin() command or function.

Xpanel provides following functions for security manipulation.
Security 307
Please refer to the section of Script for more information.

LogOnWin() Pop up the ID and password entry dialog box.
LogOn( I D ,
Password )
Log on without user interface.
This level can be a number between 0 and 10. 10 is the most authorized level.
LogOff() Log off the current user.
The security level of system is returned to the default level (zero).
GetSecurity() Get current security level of system. (0..10)
Top Level Intro
Part
XXIV
Script 309
24 Script
The script of Xpanel is very similar with the C programming language. Variables can be used in script.
And script provides function call mechanism and supports almost keywords defined in standard C language
such as switch-case, for, while, if-else, goto.
All user programmed scripts are executed in multi-thread environment.
Each script is assigned a priority among total 10 levels, such that the execution speed of a script is dependent
on this level. (most high priority = 10, most low priority = 1)

Uses the C language style statement
All TAGs defined in Xpanel database can be used as variables in script. It does not need additional
definition, symbol or configuration.
That means, values of all TAGs can be referenced or changed in every script program freely.
Two kinds of variable types are supported, real and string type. Actual type of a variable is decided
automatically during program execution.
But, only one type of value can be used in a script scope. All real type data are processed in 64 bits.
Does not distinguish capital letters. That is, VAR and var are the same keyword.
See :
Structure of Program
Operator
Scripts for command and condition
Statements
Internal Functions
24.1 Structure of Program

Declaration Part
Declare internal variables and input parameters
Program Part
All program statements can be located here.
Except declarations.

Comments can be located on any place in a script.
A comment must be started by // and all strings following this symbol are treated as a comment
CIMON-Xpanel 310
string until the end of a line.

Declaration Part

Variable
Declaration
VAR variable_name [, variable_name];
Declare internal variables. The scope of these variables restricted in a declared
script.
The initial value of declared variable is zero. If there is need to declare several
variables, comma(,) can be used between each variable name. This statement can
be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.
Input
Parameter
Declaration
PARAM 1
st
parameter [, 2
nd
parameter ] ;
This declaration is needed when the program can be called by another program or
command statements.
The order of declaration must be matched with the order of input parameters.
Parameters will be initialized with input parameters from caller. If there is need to
declare multiple parameters,
use comma (,) between parameter names.
This statement can be used in multiple, until the beginning of program part.
Example : MyPgm
VAR a, b;
VAR c;
PARAM p1, p2;
PARAM p3;
Assume that the name of above example program is MyPgm .
This program can be called by external program or command line as following
statement.
MyPgm(1, 2, 3);
Parameters p1, p2, p3 will be initialized to 1, 2, 3 each. Notice that variables a, b, c
will be initialized to zero.
Program Part

In program part, all the programming statements can be used except variable(VAR) and parameter(PARAM)
declarations.
Script 311
Calculation, storing a data in some variable, function call and many other expressions can be used in a
statement.
Following is a simple example of statements.

Tag_a = Tag_a + 1;
Tag_b = MyPgm(Tag_a, 2, 3);
A statement must be ended by ; character.
All functions return a value to caller. In the above program example, the returned value will be stored in
Tag_b.
Constants

Following notation is used for each type of constant.
Oc
tal
co
nst
ant
Number characters between 0 and 7 can be used. It must be started by zero. (ex : 01277)
De
ci
ma
l
co
nst
ant
Normal notation is used. (ex : 15, 3.14, 2.45E-12)
He
xa
de
ci
ma
l
co
nst
ant
It must be started with 0x . Alphabet and number character between 0 F can be used. (ex : 0xFFFF)
Str
ing
co
A string must be described between two . (ex : "string variable " )
CIMON-Xpanel 312
nst
ant
Pr
ed
efi
ne
d
co
nst
ant
_PI_ (pi : 3.14......) etc. (refer to the following table)
Constant Name Value/Usage Remark
_PI_ 3.141592...... (pi)
_LOCAL_ 0, Local flash memory Can be used as parameters for functions or
commands.
_SDMEM_ 1, SD/MMC memory
_USBMEM_ 2, USB memory
_COM232_ 0, COM1, RS232C mode COM port number. See the serial
communication functions.
_COM422_ 1, COM1, RS422 mode
_COM485_ 2, COM1, RS485 mode
_COMAUX_ 3, COM2 (RS232C only)
_BPS300_ 300 bps Baudrate code. See the OpenPort() function.
_BPS600_ 600 bps
_BPS1200_ 1200 bps
_BPS2400_ 2400 bps
_BPS4800_ 4800 bps
_BPS9600_ 9600 bps
_BPS19200_ 19200 bps
_BPS38400_ 38400 bps
_BPS56000_ 56000 bps
_BPS57600_ 57600 bps
_BPS115200_ 115200 bps
_BPS128000_ 128000 bps
_BPS256000_ 256000 bps
_PARITY_NONE_ No parity Parity code. See the OpenPort() function.
_PARITY_EVEN_ Even parity
_PARITY_ODD_ Odd parity
_PARITY_MARK_ Mark parity
_PARITY_SPACE_ Space parity
_STOPBIT_ONE_ 1 stop bit Stopbit code. See the OpenPort() function.
_STOPBIT_TWO_ 2 stop bits
_STOPBIT_ONE5_ 1.5 stop bit
_ALMPRT_ALL_ Print all items of alarm data Option flags for AlarmPrint() function.
_ALMPRT_TIME_ Print the time of alarm data
_ALMPRT_ADDR_ Print the address of alarm point
_ALMPRT_VALUE_ Print the value of alarm
_ALMPRT_TYPE_ Print the alarm type
_ALMPRT_DESC_ Print the alarm description
Script 313
_UINT_ Unsinged integer Data type options. These definition can be
used in the NumToStr() function.
_INT_ Signed integer
_FLOAT_ Floating point value
_HEX_ Hexa-decimal number
_EXP_ Real number with exponent
24.2 Operator
Operators for calculation

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable A is 3 and B is 4.
Operator Description Example Result
+ Addition A + B 7
- Subtraction A B -1
* Multiplication A * B 12
/ Division A / B 0.75
% Remainder of division
(1)
A % B 3
| Bitwise OR
(1)
A | B 7
& Bitwise AND
(1)
A & B 0
^ Bitwise XOR
(1)
A ^ B 7
~ Bitwise Invert
(1)
~A 0xFFFFFFFC
<< Bitwise Shift Left A << B 48
>> Bitwise Shift Right A >> B 0
(1)
Remainder of division (%) and all bitwise operators are performed with 32 bits integer data.

Logical/Comparative Operators

The result row of following table assumes that the value of variable A is 2 (true) and B is 0 (false).
Xpanel treats all values except zero as logical TRUE. Only zero is treated as logical FALSE.
When the result of logical operation is TRUE, the value 1 will be returned and stored.
Operator Description Example Result
&& Logical AND A && B 0 (false)
|| Logical OR A || B 1 (true)
! Logical NOT !A 0 (false)
== EQUAL A == B 0 (false)
!= NOT EQUAL A != B 1 (true)
CIMON-Xpanel 314
> Big A > B 1 (true)
>= or => Big or Equal A >= B 1 (true)
< Small A < B 0 (false)
<= or =< Small or Equal A <= B 0 (false)

Other Operators

Operator Description Example Result Value
= Store A = B Store the value of B to A, and uses it as a result value.
Store (=) operator can be used in a series. For example :
A = B = C;
In this case, The value of C will be stored to A and B . The value of right side of the operator is store in
left side and this value is treated as a return value of the operator. The internal processing order of above
example is :
B <- C
A <- B
Warming
This feature of = operator places a bug in program sometimes. That is the confusion with a
comparative operator (==). Following example is illustrating this kind of bug. In this example, a
programmer confused comparative operator(==) with store operator (=). But, XpanelDesigner
cannot detect such error. The reason is, the store operator has a return value and this value can
be used as a logical value in if statement. This bug makes unexpected flow of program, and
furthermore, unwanted value will be stored in A .
//============================
/ /An example of unsolvable program mistake
//============================
IF (A=B) // Compare values of A and B. It is miss-spelling of A=B
{
...
}
Script 315
24.3 Scripts for command and condition
In some application, there is a need to use a simple script on graphic object configuration.
For example, to assign a touch operation on an object, one or several command lines must be written in case of
Command Expression action type
(see an example configuration dialog box below). And further more, for making it conditional touch operation, a
conditional expression must be described.
All these conditional expression and command script have the same rules with script programming.

Conditional Expression

The conditional expression always returns only a logical value. A logical value can be one of two values,
TRUE or FALSE.
Xpanel uses the number 0 as the value of logical FALSE, and 1 as the value of logical TRUE.
A logical expression needs some special operators. The logical operators in Xpanel are shown in as following
table.
For more precise information, refer to the section 3.2.

Logical Operator Description Example
&& Logical AND A && B
CIMON-Xpanel 316
|| Logical OR A || B
! Logical NOT !A
Comparative Operator Description Example
== EQUAL A == B
!= NOT EQUAL A != B
> Big A > B
>= or => Big or Equal A >= B
< Small A < B
<= or =< Small or Equal A <= B
All logical operators get one or two values for input (operands) and return a logical output value. According
to the above examples, A and B are those inputs.
The value for logical arithmetic operand is not restricted to only two logical values (TRUE or FALSE). The
input value can be any number.
But, only zero is treated as logical FALSE. All the other values are treated as TRUE.
Comparative operators get two real values for operands and return a logical output value. Those logical
output values can be used in other logical expression.
Here is some examples of conditional expression that can be used in object configuration dialog box.
Conditional Expression Example Remark
(Tag_a != 1) && (Tag_b == 10) If the value of Tag_a is not equal to 1 and the value of Tag_b is
equal to 10, then the expression returns TRUE. Otherwise FALSE.
Sin(Tag_a) == 1 If the sine of Tag_a is 1, then the expression will return TRUE,
otherwise FALSE.
Tag_a < 100 If the value of Tag_a is smaller than 100, then the expression will
return TRUE, otherwise FALSE.
(Tag_a + Tag_b) < (Tag_a + Tag_c) If the sum of Tag_a and Tag_b is smaller than the sum of Tag_a
and Tag_c, then the expression will return TRUE, otherwise
FALSE.
Command Script

The command in Xpanel is not restricted to use only one instruction. A long list of instructions can construct
a command.
That is, the command is a special kind of script program. Within a command script, all kinds of keywords
and functions can be used.
But only one thing, the priority of command script is different with the normal script. When a command
Script 317
script is issued by touch operation or any other method,
it will be executed with top-most priority. For that reason, if a command script has a time consuming loop
inside, all the other process will be halted until the end
of command script. So, especially for calling other function within a command script, the programmer has to
keep in mind that the priority.
If the function has a loop, RunScript keyword must be used. This keyword is used for parallel execution.
The calling command script does not wait the termination of called function.
Assume that a programmer wants to call a function named as MyLoop , and this function has a time
consuming loop.
Then, following instruction must be used, instead of calling directly.
RunScript MyLoop();

Following table shows some typical command script examples.

Command Script
Example
Remark
Tag_a = 100;
PageOpen( NewPage ) ;
After changing the value of Tag_a to 100, open a page named as "NewPage "
Tag_b = Tag_b + 1 Increase the value of Tag_b by 1.
Tag_a = 100;
Tag_b = 1;
RunScript MyLoop();
MakCsv( LogModel , 1);
After changing the values of Tag_a and Tag_b, invoke MyLoop() script
function.
After that, do not wait the termination of MyLoop(), and create a CSV formatted
file of the LogModel on SD memory card.
24.4 Statements
IF-ELSE Statement
WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement
FOR Statement
SWITCH-CASE Statement
GOTO Statement
CONTINUE Keyword
RETURN Keyword
RUNSCRIPT Keyword
CIMON-Xpanel 318
24.4.1 IF-ELSE Statement
IF ELSE statement is one of the most frequently using logical decision making statement.
It supports nested IF statement like IF - ELSE IF - ELSE IF... There is no limit on level of nested IF. Else
statement can be omitted.
If (A == 1)
{
// performed when the value of A is 1
}
Else
{
// performed when the value of A is not 1
}
24.4.2 WHILE/DO-WHILE Statement
These statements are loop statements.
WHILE keyword is followed by a logical expression. During the value of this expression is TRUE, all statements in
WHILE statement are performed repeatedly.
A = 0;
While (A < 10)
{
// Describe the job should be performed repeatedly
// during the value of logical expression is TRUE
// (This example performs following statement 10 times)
A = A + 1;
}
WHILE statement makes decision before performing the loop. Such that, statements in loop can never be
performed.
But, DO-WHILE statement performs the loop at least one time. And then makes decision by evaluating logical
expression.
This is a difference between WHILE and DO-WHILE statement.
Do {
// Describe the job should be performed repeatedly
Script 319
// during the value of logical expression is TRUE
// (This loop is performed at least 1 time)
} While (A < 10); // Semi-colon (;) must be used for marking end of statement.
24.4.3 FOR Statement
It is a little bit complex statement. But, after familiar with this statement, it will be very useful loop statement.
The specialty of this statement is that all expressions for initializing, decision making and post loop processing are
described in one statement line.
Following example shows the same job with the example of WHILE statement presented in former section.
Compare it with WHILE statement.
For (A=0; A<10; A=A+1)
{
// describe the job to repeat here
}
FOR keyword is followed by a pair of parenthesis. Expression for initializing, decision making and post loop
processing are described in this parenthesis.
Each expression must be separated by semicolons ( ; ).
FOR ( initializing exp. ; decision making exp. ; post processing exp. )

24.4.4 SWITCH-CASE Statement
This statement is very useful when there are many different processing way depend on a variable or expression.
Each different processing way is described by CASE keyword followed by a constant value. There is no limit on
the number of CASE.
switch (A)
{
Case 1:
// describe the job to perform when the value of A is 1
Break;
Case 5:
Case 7:
// describe the job to perform when the value of A is 5 or 7
Break;
Default:
// describe the job to perform when A is any other value
CIMON-Xpanel 320
// DEFAULT statements can be omitted
Break;
}
CASE keyword must be followed by a constant value and terminated by a colon (:). A TAG, variable or expression
cannot be used in CASE statement.
DEFAULT statement can be used only once in a SWITCH statement.
It does not need a following constant, and this statement will be performed when there is no matching case.
DEFAULT statement can be omitted if needless.
BREAK keyword in CASE/DEFAULT statement plays role of terminating SWITCH statement.
If there is no BREAK keyword in the progress of program execution until reaches the other CASE/DEFAULT
keyword, the program will continue to execute the
statements in the other CASE/DEFAULT scope. This feature of SWITCH statement is helpful for short and simple
programming, only if it is used intentionally.
24.4.5 GOTO Statement
This statement controls the flow of program execution directly. This statement needs a matching index in a
program scope.
Index is a unique name of a jump destination in a program scope, and it is started with @ character.
VAR A;

A = 0;
@ComeHere // destination of jump
If (A < 10)
{
A = A + 1;
Goto ComeHere; // change the flow of program
}
This example program processes the same job with the previous examples of FOR and WHILE statement section.
The name of index ( J umpHere in the above example) can not be duplicated with variables, tags and program
names.
24.4.6 CONTINUE Keyword
Continue keyword is very useful in loop. When a CONTINUE keyword is met in the progress of a program,
the flow of the program will be moved to the first statement in the loop. This keyword is effective in the loop of
WHILE, DO-WHILE and FOR statement.
Script 321
It is especially useful when there are many decision making in the loop such as IF-ELSE.
Following two program examples process the same job.
While (A<10)
{
A = A + 1;
If (A < 5)
{
// J ob to do when A is smaller than 5
}
Else
{
// J ob to do when A is larger than or equal to 5
}
}
While (A<10)
{
A = A + 1;
If (A < 5)
{
/ / J ob to do when A is smaller than 5
Continue;
}
/ / J ob to do when A is larger than or equal to 5
}
24.4.7 RETURN Keyword
Every program returns a result value to caller. RETURN keyword is used for designating a value to return and
terminating the program.
Following example program processes three input parameters and returns the sum of them to caller.
PARAM p1, p2, p3;

Return p1 + p2 + p3;
Assuming that the name of above program is MyPgm , it can be called from another program as following
program line.
RtnValue = MyPgm(1, 2, 3);
CIMON-Xpanel 322
After MyPgm call, a value of 6 will be stored in RtnValue .

24.4.8 RUNSCRIPT Keyword
When a program calls another program, the caller program will be stalled until when the called program
terminates.
RUNSCRIPT keyword provides another way of invoking other program. It does not make stall the caller program.
After invoke another program, the caller program continues it s own job. As a result, both programs will run in
parallel and this is the feature of multi-threading.
Following example shows the multi-threading feature by using RUNSCRIPT keyword. It is assuming that the name
of another program is NewThread .
If(A == 0)
RunScript NewThread(); // Invoke another program (NewThread)
A = A + 1; // Continues next job without stalling.
24.5 Internal Functions
IN THIS TOPIC :
Trigonometric Functions Other Mathematic Functions Special Functions
* R1, R2, .... : Real type input parameters * S1, S2, .... : Stringtype
input parameters
Trigonometric Functions

Retur
n
Sin(R1) Sine Real
Cos(R1) Cosine Real
Tan(R1) Tangent Real
Asin(R1) Arc Sine Real
Acos(R1) Arc Cosine Real
Atan(R1) Arc Tangent Real
Sinh(R1) Hyperbolic Sine Real
Cosh(R1) Hyperbolic Cosine Real
Script 323
Tanh(R1) Hyperbolic Tangent Real
Atan2(R1, R2) Arc Tangent, Atan(R1/R2) Real
Other Mathematic Functions

Retur
n
Log(R1) Calculates logarithm Real
Log10(R1) Calculates logarithm Real
Ceil(R1) Calculates the ceiling of a value Real
Floor(R1) Calculates the floor of a value Real
Abs(R1) Calculates the absolute value Real
Sqrt(R1) Calculates the square value Real
Rand() Generates a pseudorandom number Real
Fmod(R1, R2) Calculates the floating-point remainder (R1/R2) Real
Special Functions

Function Description Return
PageOpen(S1) Opens a new page named as S1
PageClose(S1) Closes an opened page
FrameOpen(S1) Opens a new frame named as S1
StringTable(R1, R2) Get a string from string table
(R1=Group No., R2=String No.)
String
GetTime(R1) Get a clock data (R1 : type of data) Real
TimeStr(R1, S2) Assemble a string of time
R1 : clock value from GetTime(0)
S2 : Format string
String
RunApp(S1, S2) Executes an external program
S1 : Program name
S2 : Program input parameter

MakeCsv(S1, R2) Makes a CSV formatted log file in SD memory
S1 : Name of log model
R2 : Number of block (0=current logging block)

MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2) Makes a CSV formatted log file in USB memory
CIMON-Xpanel 324
MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3) Makes a CSV formatted log file
R3 : Storage media code (0=local, 1=SD/MMC, 2=USB)
DataLog(S1, R2) Start / Stop the data logging
R2 : 0=Stop, 1=Start

RcpDownload(S1, R2) Read a group of recipe data from file, and download it to
device
S1 : Name of recipe model
R2 : Zero based group number

RcpUpload(S1, R2) Upload the specified recipe group data from device, and
store it to file.

RcpStop(S1) Stop and terminate the processing job of specified recipe
model.

RcpFileStore(S1, R2) Stores the recipe data to the file.

RcpFileRead(S1, R2) Read the recipe data from file.

RcpMemDown(S1) Download the current recipe data to device.

RcpMemUp(S1) Upload the recipe data from device.

RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3) Read the recipe data from CSV formatted file.
S2 : File name
R3 : File location (0=local, 1=SD/MMC, 2=USB)

RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3) Create a CSV formatted file with current recipe group data in
memory.
S2 : File name
Script 325
RcpConfig() Pops up a dialog box for recipe data manipulation.
TrendCsvWr(S1, R2) Make a CSV formatted file from trend data.
S1 : Trend name

ScrCapture(S1, R2) Make a BMP formatted file of current screen
S1 : BMP file name.

Sleep(R1) Put delay on the script program
R1 : delay time in milli-second
HardCopy() Print out the current screen image to USB printer.
OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4,
R5)
Open a serial port for communication.
R1 : Port number (predefined as _COMxxx_)
R2 : Baudrate code (predefined as _BPSxxxx_)
R3 : Parity code (predefined as _PARITY_xxx_)
R4 : Data bits (7 or 8)
R5 : Stop bits code (predefined as _STOPBIT_xxx_)
1:OK.
2:Error
ClosePort(R1) Close a serial port.
1:OK.
2:Error
SendByte(R1, R2) Transmit a byte datum though the R1 port.
R2 : A datum to transmit. (0..255)
1:OK.
2:Error
SendString(R1, S2) Transmit a string data though the R1 port.
S2 : A string to transmit.
1:OK.
2:Error
ReceiveByte(R1, R2) Receive a byte datum though the R1 port.
R2 : Time-out in milli-second.
Received
data or
error
StrToNum(S1, R2) Converts a numeric string to a value
S1 : Numeric string
R2 : Base (0, 2..36)
Converte
d Value
NumToStr(R1, R2, R3) Converts a numeric data to a string
R1 : Numeric value
R2 : Value type
S3 : Format string
Converte
d Value
LogOn(S1, S2) A user log on
S1 : User ID
S2 : Password
1: OK
0: Error
LogOff() A user log off. 1: OK
0: Error
CIMON-Xpanel 326
LogOnWin() Open a user log on window.
GetSecurity() Gets the current security level (0..10) Security
Level
OpenConfigWin() Open the online configuration tool window.
SoftKeyboard(R1, R2, R3) Show or hide the software keyboard
AlarmPrint(R1, R2, R3, R4,
R5)nt(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)
Print a alarm list of designated group.
R1 : Group number (1..10)
R2 : Number of alarm to print
R3 : Time/Date format code
R4 : Font size
R5 : Option flags (_ALMPRT_xxxx_)
AlaramCSVWr(R1, S2, R3,
R4, R5)
Create a CSV formatted file with designated alarm group.
R1 : Alarm group number
S2 : File name
R3 : Time/Date format code
R4 : Option flags (_ALMPRT_xxxx_)
TouchCalib() Opens the touch panel calibration window.
ClearAlarmLog(R1) Clear all messages listed in the designated alarm
group (summary)
R1 : Alarm group number
AddMessage(R1, S2) Add a new string to the scroll message window.
R1 : String ID
S2 : A string to add.
RemoveMessage(R1) Remove a string which was already registered to the
scroll message
windowby AddMessage() function.
R1 : String ID which was designatedon AddMessage()
function call.
RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2) Copy/movea block of system memory to the memory
of the recipe
group data.
R2 : System memory address
RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2) Copy/movethe recipe group data in memory to system
memory.
SetSysMem(R1, R2) Set a value to the designatedsystem memory.
R2 : Value to set
GetSysMem(R1) Get a value from the designatedsystem memory.
Real
SysMemMove(R1, R2, R3) Move a block of data within the system memory.
R1 : System memory address (source)
R2 : System memory address (destination)
Script 327
R3 : Number of data to move
SysMemFill(R1, R2, R3) Fill a block of system memory with the designated
value.
R2 : Fill value
R3 : Number of data to fill
LcdBrightUp() LCD brightness control (lighten)
LcdBrightDown() LCD brightness control (darken)
LcdBacklight(R1) LCD backlight control (turn on / off)
StaticBeepCtrl(R1) Turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.
R1 : Beep on / off value (0: Off, 1: On)
SetSpeed(R1) Script process speed control.
R1 : Speed value (0: Normal, Another value: High)
SetDate(R1,R2,R3) Change date on Xpanel.
SetTime(R1) Change time on Xpanel
24.5.1 PageOpen(S1)
PageOpen(S1) Opens a new page
[ S1]
new page name (without extension)
Opens a new screen page. If the new page has no special style, then previous page or
frame will be closed automatically. Otherwise, according to the style of the new page,
following result can be shown.
A pop-up
style
If a new page has a style of pop-up, current page does not affected by this new page.
The new page pops up over current page.
A page for
frame
This kind of page has a position number in a frame. For open this page, the frame has
to be opened in advance. The old page which has the same position number in the
frame will be replaced by this page automatically.
24.5.2 FrameOpen(S1)
FrameOpen(S1) Opens a new frame
[S1] new frame name (without extension)
CIMON-Xpanel 328
Opens a new screen frame. Previous page or frame will be closed automatically.
The default pages for frame will be opened automatically.
24.5.3 StringTable(R1, R2)
StringTable(R1,
R2)
Gets a string data from string table
[ R1]
String group number
[ R2]
String number in a group
Gets a string data from the string table. The string table must have been configured by
String Editor . Assign the group number of a string table to the R1, and the string
number of a string in that group to the R2 parameter. Returned data is a string type
value, and it can be used for string tag, variable or other function s parameter.
Example
Program
StrTag = StringTable(1, 14)
Result StrTag : A string that is defined as 14 in group#1
24.5.4 GetTime(R1)
GetTime(R1) Gets the current clock data
[R1] type of clock data
0 : The number of seconds after 1st. J anuary 1970 UTC
1 : the number of year (1970..)
2 : the number of month (1..12)
3 : the number of day (1..31)
4 : the number of hour (0..23)
5 : the number of minute (0..59)
6 : the number of second (0..59)
7 : the number of day of week (1..7 : 1=Sunday, 2=Monday, 7=Saturday)
8 : the number of today s minute count (0..1439 : 0=midnight)
9 : the number of today s second count (0..86399, 0=midnight)
Script 329
24.5.5 TimeStr(R1, S2)
TimeStr(R1,
S2)
Makes a string of clock
[ R1]
Clock data (It can be acquired by GetTime(0) function call)
The number of seconds after 1st. J anuary 1970 UTC
[ S2]
Format string (can include following symbols)
%A : Full name of weekday (ex : Sunday)
%a : Abbreviation of weekday (ex : Sun)
%B : Full name of month (ex : J anuary)
%b : Abbreviation of month (ex : J an)
%d : date (1..31)
%H : Hour in 24-hour format (0..23)
%I : Hour in 12-hour format (1..12)
%m : Month (1..12)
%M : Minute (0..59)
%p : A.M. / P.M. indicator for 12-hour format (A.M., P.M.)
%S : Second (0..59)
%y : Number of year without century (00..99)
%Y : Number of year with century (ex : 2006)
Example
Program
CurTime = GetTime(0);
StrTag = TimeStr(CurTime, "%Y/%m/%d/ %H:%M:%S");
Result StrTag : A string that is defined as 14 in group#1
24.5.6 RunApp(S1, S2)
RunApp(S1,
S2)
Executes an external application program
[ S1]
Application program name with path and extension
[ S2]
I nput parameter string for the application program
CIMON-Xpanel 330
Executes an external application program.
This program can be not only system included program, also user programmed
program.
Example
Program
RunApp( Ping.EXE , - t 100.100.100.1 );
Result
Ping test screen will be popped up when this command or program is issued.
24.5.7 MakeCsv(S1, R2)
MakeCsv(S1,
R2)
Makes a CSV Formatted log file in SD memory
[ S1]
Log model name
[ R2]
Block number of designated log model
Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the SD/MMC
memory.
A SD/MMC memory has to be plugged before the issuing of this function. A CSV file will
be written in the folder Xpanel of the SD/MMC memory card. The CSV file name is
assembled with the date and time log started, and it s from original block file.
(YYMMDD HHmmSS.CSV)
When the R2 parameter is zero, this function will try to convert the current log
proceeding (uncompleted) block file. If the logging task of designated model is not
running at the moment of the function call, no CSV file will be created.
The parameter R2 can be designated up to the Maximum Block No. which should have
been set in the model configuration dialog box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this
function will try to convert the most recently log completed block file.
Obsolete : See the 'MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3)' function below.
Example
Program
MakeCsv( ModelName , 1);
Script 331
24.5.8 MakeCsvUsb(S1, R2)
MakeCsvUsb
(S1, R2)
Makes a CSV Formatted log file in USB memory
[ S1]
Log model name
[ R2]
Block number of designated log model
Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the USB
memory.
An USB memory has to be plugged before the issuing of this function. A CSV file will be
written in the folder Xpanel of the USB memory card. The CSV file name is assembled
with the date and time log started, and it s from original block file. (YYMMDD
HHmmSS.CSV)
When the R2 parameter is zero, this function will try to convert the current log
proceeding (uncompleted) block file. If the logging task of designated model is not
running at the moment of the function call, no CSV file will be created.
The parameter R2 can be designated up to the Maximum Block No. which should have
been set in the model configuration dialog box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this
function will try to convert the most recently log completed block file.
Obsolete : See the 'MakeLogCsv(S1, R2, R3)' function below.
24.5.9 MakeLogCsv(S1,R2,R3)
MakeLogCsv(S1,
R2,R3)
Makes a CSV formatted log file.
[ S1]
Log model name
[ R2]
Block number of designated log model.
[ R3]
Storage type (_LOCAL_, _SDMEM_, _USBMEM_
Converts the designated block file to a CSV formatted file and stores it on the
designated storage (R3).
CIMON-Xpanel 332
Storage Media Number Symbol CSV file location
Internal Flash
Disk
0 _LOCAL_ \ \ XPanel \ LOG
\ [ model name] \
SD/MMC 1 _SDMEM_ \ \ LOG\ [ model name] \
USB 2 _USBMEM_ \ \ LOG\ [ model name] \
The CSV file name is assembled with the start date and time of log data, and it s
from original block file. (YYMMDD HHmmSS.CSV) When the R2 parameter is zero,
this function will try to convert the uncompleted block file which is under logging. If
the logging task of designated model is not running at the moment of the function
call, no CSV file will be created. The parameter R2 can be designated up to the
Maximum Block No. which should have been set in the model configuration dialog
box. When the R2 parameter is 1, this function will try to convert the most recently
log completed block file.
This function includes all functionalities of MakeCsv() and MakeCsvUsb()
functions. This function is strongly recommended for creating a CSV formatted file
from log data instead of using the two obsolete functions.
Example
Program
MakeLogCsv( ModelName , 1, _LOCAL_);
Result
A CSV file will be created on the local flash memory with the data from the most
recently log completed block file.
24.5.10DataLog(S1, R2)
DataLog(S1,
R2)
Data logging start / stop
[ S1]
Log model name
[ R2]
0 or 1 (0 : STOP, 1 : START)
This function is effective only on the log model of external call start type. Models with
other start type such as periodic, trigger tag, enable tag or on time are not affected by
this function.
If the R2 parameter is 0, the designated logging task will be terminated. Otherwise, the
logging task will be invoked by this function. This function treats the non-zero value of
R2 as 1.
Script 333
Example
Program
DataLog( ModelName , 1);
Result Data logging task will be invoked.
24.5.11RcpDownload(R1)
RcpDownload
(R1)
Reads a recipe data group form file, and downloads to device
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ R2]
Zero based group number
Reads a group data from the recipe configuration file, and download them to the device.
After this function, the group data in Xpanel memory will be changed to the read group
data. The group data must have been configured in Xpanel Designer before this function
call.
Example
Program
RcpDownload( ModelName , 1);
Result
Reads the #1 group data from "ModelName" recipe file, and download them to the
device.
24.5.12RcpUpload(R1)
RcpUpload(R1)
Uploads a recipe group data from device, and stores them to the
recipe configuration file
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ R2]
Reads a group data from the device through communication, and stores them to the
CIMON-Xpanel 334
recipe configuration file. After this function, the group data in Xpanel memory will be
changed to the read group data. The designated recipe group must have been declared
in Xpanel Designer before this function call.
Example
Program
RcpUpload( ModelName , 2);
Result
Uploads the recipe data from the device, and stores them to the group #2 of
"ModelName" recipe file.
24.5.13RcpStop(S1)
RcpStop(S1) Stops and terminates the recipe operations
[ S1] Recipe model name
This function terminates any job related with designated name of recipe model. For
example, if download process is proceeding through communication when this function
is issued, then the communication will be stopped and terminated. Be careful to use
this function, because there is a possibility of storing unwanted data group in file or
device. Use this function only when there is a unrecoverable network or device
breakdown.
24.5.14RcpFileStore(S1, R2)
RcpFileStore
(S1, R2)
Stores the current recipe data in memory to the file
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ R2]
This function stores a group data in memory of Xpanel to the configuration file.
The designated recipe group must have been declared in Xpanel Designer before this
function call.
Script 335
24.5.15RcpFileRead(S1, R2)
RcpFileRead
(S1, R2)
Stores the current recipe data in memory to the file
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ R2]
This function reads a group data in the configuration file and stores them to the
memory of Xpanel. The designated recipe group must have been configured by Xpanel
Designer, or stored by other way before this function call..
24.5.16RcpMemDown(S1)
RcpMemDown
(S1)
Downloads a group of recipe data in memory to the device
[ S1] Recipe model name
This function downloads a group data in memory of Xpanel to the device.
The group data must have been loaded in memory by other way before this function
issue.
24.5.17RcpMemUp(S1)
RcpMemUp(S1) Uploads a group of recipe data to memory from the device
[ S1]
Recipe model name
This function uploads a group data in device to the memory of Xpanel.
The uploaded group data can be processed by other functions or recipe tool window.
CIMON-Xpanel 336
24.5.18RcpCsvRd(S1, S2, R3)
Rc
pC
sv
Rd
(S1
,
S2,
R3)
Reads a group of recipe data from CSV formatted file
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ S2]
CSV file name (without extension and path)
[ R3]
CSV file location code (0 : local, 1 : SD/MMC, 2 : USB)
This function reads a group of data from CSV formatted file and stores them to the memory of Xpanel.
The CSV formatted file must have information about the number of data it has.
This number must be located in the top most of data list, and the number must be matched with the one
that assigned
in the recipe model setup dialog box.

Script 337
The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to read. There is no need to specify the extension. But,
the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage media.
The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file was stored. It can be one of
three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is, following constant
symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.
Media Number Symbol CSV file location
Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ Xpanel
SD/MMC 1 _SDMEM_ Root
USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root
Ex
a
m
pl
e
Pr
og
ra
m
RcpCsvRd( ModelName , RcpFileName , _SDMEM_);
Re
sul
t
Reads a CSV formatted file named as "RcpFileName.CSV" in SD/MMC memory card, and stores the data
in memory of Xpanel.
24.5.19RcpCsvWr(S1, S2, R3)
RcpCsvWr(S1,
S2, R3)
Create a CSV formatted file with current recipe group data in memory.
[ S1]
Recipe model name
[ S2]
[ R3]
This function creates a CSV formatted file with a group data in XPanel s memory. The
created CSV formatted file includes a number which represents how many number of
recipe group data are followed as shown in the following picture.
CIMON-Xpanel 338
The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to create. There is no need to specify
the extension. But, the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage
media. If there is a file with same name and extension, it will be replaced with the newly
created CSV file without any warning or notification.
The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be created.
It can be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. XPanel provides predefined constants for them.
That is, following constant symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.
Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ \ \ X P a n e l \
USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root
Example
Program
RcpCsvWr( ModelName , RcpFileName , _SDMEM_);
Result
Create/Replace a CSV formatted file named as RcpFileName.CSV in SD/MMC memory
card with the data in memory of XPanel.
24.5.20RcpConfig()
RcpConfig() Pops up the recipe data manipulation tool window
No Parameter
Script 339
This function pops up a tool window for recipe. This tool window shows the current
recipe data in memory. And it provides some tools for editing individual datum in a
group, changing current group, saving the current data to file and up/downloading the
recipe data from/to the device. (Please refer to the Recipe section for more
information)

24.5.21TrendCsvWr(S1, R2)
TrendCsvWr
(S1, R2))
Makes and stores a CSV formatted file from trend
[ S1]
Trend name
[ R2]
This function makes a CSV formatted file from a trend object. Output CSV file can be stored
in not only local flash disk, but external memory card. Next screen capture shows an example
of output CSV file.

The name of generated CSV file has the format of "Trendname_MMDDHHmmSS.CSV
". This name is generated from trend name, date and time.
The second parameter R2 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be stored. It
can be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is,
following constant symbols can be used as parameter R2 instead of number.
CIMON-Xpanel 340

USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root
Example
Program
TrendCsvWr( TrendExample , _SDMEM_);
Result
Makes a CSV formatted file on SD/MMC cards. The data will be taken from the
"TrendExample" trend data.
24.5.22ScrCapture(S1, R2)
ScrCapture(S1,
R2)
Captures current screen and makes a BMP format image file
[ S1]
Seed for making BMP file name
[ R2]
BMP file location code (0 : local, 1 : SD/MMC, 2 : USB)
This function captures current screen display and makes a BMP formatted image file. The name
of BMP file will be made with the seed string of S1 parameter and time. File name format is "
Seedname_HHmmSS.BMP".
The second parameter R2 indicates the storage media for generated BMP file. It can be one of
three numbers, 0 to 2. Xpanel provides predefined constants for them. That is, following
constant symbols can be used as parameter R2 instead of number.
USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root
Example
Program
ScrCapture( Mybmp , _SDMEM_);
Result Makes a CSV formatted file on SD/MMC cards. The data will be taken from the "TrendExample"
Script 341
trend data.
24.5.23Sleep(R1)
Sleep(R1) Ruts some delay to the current script program
[ R1]
Delay time in milli-seconds
This function suspends the execution of the current script program for a specified
interval (R1).
The interval must be specified in milli-seconds unit.
24.5.24HardCopy()
HardCopy() Prints out the current screen image to USB printer
This function prints out the screen image to USB printer.
The printer must support PCL (Printer Control Language).
24.5.25OpenPort(R1, R2, R3, R4, R5)
OpenPort
(R1, R2, R3, R4,
R5)
Opens the R1 serial port for communication.
[ R1]
COM port number (use the predefined symbol. _COMxxxx_)
[ R2]
Baudrate (use the predefined symbol, _BPSxxxx_)
[ R3]
Parity (use the predefined symbol, _PARITY_xxx)
[ R4]
Data bits (7 or 8)
[ R5]
Stop bits (use the predefined symbol, _STOPBIT_xxx)
This function opens a serial port for communication. Xpanel has two serial
CIMON-Xpanel 342
communication ports (COM1 and COM2). The COM1 port can be configured as one of
three modes (RS232C, RS422 and RS485). Predefined symbols for R1, R2, R3 and R5
parameters are provided, please refer to the Constants section of this manual.
The port which is being used for device communication or already opened, cannot be
opened by this function. Before calling this function, ensure that the designated port is
not being used in device driver. And also, if the port has been opened and used
previously before this function call, ensure that it was closed by ClosePort() function. If
there is an error for opening a port, this function returns zero (0). When the port was
opened successfully, this function returns non-zero value.
Example
Program
OpenPort(_COM485_, _BPS19200_, _PARITY_NONE_, 8, _STOPBIT_ONE_);
SendByte(_COM485_, 2);

ClosePort(_COM485_);
Result
Opens the COM1 port for communication if it is available for using.
The port will be set up as RS485 communication mode, 19200 bps, no parity, 8 data
bits and 1 stop bit.
24.5.26ClosePort(R1)
ClosePort(R1) Closes the R1 serial port which has been opened
[ R1]
This function closes the designated serial port which has been opened by OpenPort()
function.
Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are provided, please refer to the Constants
section of this manual.
Example
Prog

Script 343
ClosePort(_COM485_);
Result Closes the COM1 port.
24.5.27SendByte(R1, R2)
SendByte(R1,
R2)
Transmits a string (S2) through the R1 port
[ R1]
[ R2]
A datum to transmit. The value can be between 0 and 255.
This function transmits a datum through the designated serial port (R1) which has
been opened by OpenPort() function. Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are
provided, please refer to the Constants section of this manual.
The R2 parameter must be a byte datum, between 0 (0x00) and 255 (0xFF). If a value
larger than 255 (0xFF) was designated to the R2, the upper bytes will be discarded and
only the lower 1 byte datum will be transmitted. For example, if the value 0x1234 was
assigned to the R2, the 0x34 will be transmitted.
Ensure that the R1 port must have been opened by OpenPort() function, before calling
this function.
Example
Program

Result Transmits a byte datum 2 (0x02) through the COM1 port in RS485 mode.
24.5.28SendString(R1, S2)
SendString(R1,
S2)
Transmits a string (S2) through the R1 port
CIMON-Xpanel 344
[ R1]COM port number (use the predefined symbol. _COMxxxx_)
[ S2] A string to transmit. The maximum length of the string is 255
characters
This function transmits a string through the designated serial port (R1) which has been
opened by OpenPort() function. Predefined symbols for R1 parameter are provided,
please refer to the Constants section of this manual. The S2 parameter must be a
string or string tag.
this function.
Example
Program
SendString(_COM485_, This string will be transmitted. );

Result
RS485 COM1 - This string will be transmitted.
.
24.5.29ReceiveByte(R1, R2)
ReceiveByte
(R1, R2)
Recives a byte datum from R1 port
[R1]
[ R2]
Timeout in milli-second
This function waits and receives a byte datum from designated port (R1) which has
been opened by OpenPort() function. If there is no datum until when the timeout (R2)
expires, this function will return 256 (0x100). Otherwise, a received byte datum will be
returned. (0 to 255)
R1 parameter specifies the COM port for receiving data, and predefined symbols can be
used for this parameter. Please refer to the Constants section of this manual.
Script 345
this function.
Example
Program
VAR RxData;
RxData = RecieveByte(_COM485_, 1000);
If(RxData < 256)
{
}

Result
Receives a datum from the COM1 port in RS485 mode, and stores the datum in RxData
variable..
24.5.30StrToNum(S1, R2)
StrToNum(S1,
R2)
Convers a numeric string to a value
[ S1]
Numeric string. It can be the following form when the base (R2)
is 10 :
[sign][digit][.digit][{d|D|e|E}[sign]digit]
The sign is either plus (+) or minus (-), and digits are one or more decimal digits. If no
digits appear before the radix character, at least one must appear after the radix
character. The decimal digits can be followed by an exponent, which consists of an
introductory letter (d, D, e, or E) and an optionally signed integer. If neither and
exponent part nor a radix character appears, a radix character is assumed to follow the
last digit in the string.
This function returns 0, if no conversion can be performed or an error occurs.
[ R2]
Base number (0 or 2..36).

I f base is 0 the following rules are applied :
CIMON-Xpanel 346
1) The initial characters of the string are used to determine the base. If the first
character is 0 and the second character is not x or X , the string is interpreted
as an octal integer. (ex : 01237)
2) If the first character is 0 and the second character is x or X , the string is
interpreted as a hexadecimal integer. (ex : 0xF5EA)
3) Otherwise, it is interpreted as a decimal number.
When the base in bigger than 10, the letters a through z (or A through Z ) are
assigned the values 10 through 35. Only letters whose assigned values are less than
base are permitted.
Example
Program
VAR Val;
Val = StrToNum( 3.14e3 ,10);

Result The variable Val will be 3,140.
24.5.31NumToStr(R1 , R2 , S3)
Nu
mT
oSt
r
(R1
,
R2
,
S3)
Converts a numeric value to a string
[ R1]
Numeric value to convert
[ R2]
Value type (_UINT_, _INT_, _FLOAT_, _HEX_, _EXP_)
[ S3]
Format of string to be built.
A format specification, which consists of optional and required fields, has the following form:

[width] [.precision]

Each field of the format specification is a number signifying a particular value type.
The simplest format specification contains nothing.
Script 347
width
Optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output.
It is a nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of
characters printed. If the number of characters in the output value is less
than the specified width, blanks are added to the values until the minimum
width is reached. If width is prefixed with 0, zeros are added until the
minimum width is reached (not useful for left-aligned numbers).
The width specification never causes a value to be truncated. If the
number of characters in the output value is greater than the specified
width, or if width is not given, all characters of the value are printed.
precision
Optional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed
for all or part of the output field, or the minimum number of digits printed
for integer values.
Ex
a
m
pl
e
Pr
og
ra
m
VAR Val1,Va2,Val3;
Val1 = NumToStr( 123.456 , _FLOAT, 3 );
Val2 = NumToStr ( 123.456 , _FLOAT, 04 );
Val3 = NumToStr ( 123.456 , _FLOAT, 6.2 );

Re
sul
t
The string stored in StrTag is 034 .
24.5.32LogOn(S1, S2)
LogOn(S1, S2) Logs on a user
[ S1]
User ID string.
This ID should have been registered by the Security configuration tool of Xpanel
Desinger.
[ S2]
Password string
The password can be composed only with numeric characters.
CIMON-Xpanel 348
Please refer to the User Security section of this manual.
Example
Program
LogOn( John , 1234 );

Result
I f John is regal user of this system and the password is matched, then the current
security
level of system will be changed to the John s level.
24.5.33LogOff()
LogOff() Logs off the current user
No Parameter
This function makes the current user to log off. The security level of the system will be
the lowest level (level 0).
Example
Program
LogOff();
24.5.34LogOnWin()
LogOnWin() Popup the log on window.
No Parameter
Script 349

Example
Program
LogOnWin();
24.5.35GetSecurity()
GetSecurity() Gets the security level of current system
No Parameter
This function returns the security level of system. The returned value is between 0 and
10. (0 is the lowest level.)

Example
Program
Var Sllevel;;

Slevel = GetSecurity();
24.5.36OpenConfigWin()
OpenConfigWi
n()
Opens the online configuration tool window
No Parameter
This function opens the online configuration tool window.
CIMON-Xpanel 350

Example
Program
OpenConfigWin();
24.5.37SoftKeyboard(R1,R2,R3)
SoftKeyboard
(R1,R2,R3)
Opens the online configuration tool window
[ R1]
Show (non-zero value) or Hide (zero)
[ R2]
Software keyboard position in screen. (X coordinate, 0..799)
[ R3]
Software keyboard position in screen. (Y coordinate, 0..599)
The origin position (R2, R3) is upper-left corner of the keyboard.

Example SoftKeyboard(1,10,10);
Script 351
Program
Result The software keyboard will be displayed at the position (10, 10) of screen.
24.5.38AlarmPrint(R1,R2,R3,R4,R5)
AlarmPrint
(R1,R2,R3,R4,
R5)
Print out the alarm list.
[ R1]
Alarm Group number (1..10)
[ R2]
Number of alarm to print (1..200)
[ R3]
Time/Date format code
0 = YYYY/MM/DDHH:MM:SS
1 = DD/MM/YYYYHH:MM:SS
2 = MM/DD/YYYYHH:MM:SS
3 = MM/DDHH:MM:SS
4 = DD/MMHH:MM/SS
5 = HH:MM:SS
[ R4]
Font size
:
1 0 or larger value (30 is preferred)
[ R5]
Option flags
:
Select the items to be printed. All items are already defined
as following table. Multiple items can be specified by
bitwise ORing.
(ex) _ALMPRT_TIME_ |_ALMPRT_DESC_
Item Symbol Number
All items _ALMPRT_ALL_ 511
Alarm time _ALMPRT_TIME_ 1
Device Address _ALMPRT_ADDR_ 2
Value _ALMPRT_VALUE_ 4
Alarm type _ALMPRT_TYPE_ 8
Alarm description _ALMPRT_DESC_ 16
CIMON-Xpanel 352
Example
Program
AlarmPrint(1, 10, 1, 10, _ALMPRT_ALL_);
Result
At the moment when this function was called, the most recent 10 alarm data of group 1 will be
printed
with font size 10 and DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS format.
24.5.39AlarmCsvWr(R1,S2,R3,R4,R5)
AlarmCsvWr
(R1,S2,R3,R4,
R5)
Create a CSV formatted file with the designated alarm group data.
[ R1]
Alarm group number (1..10)
[ R2]
[ R3]
Time/Date format code
0 = YYYY/MM/DDHH:MM:SS
1 = DD/MM/YYYYHH:MM:SS
2 = MM/DD/YYYYHH:MM:SS
3 = MM/DDHH:MM:SS
4 = DD/MMHH:MM/SS
5 = HH:MM:SS
[ R4]
Option flags
: Select the items to be written in CSV file.
All item flags are already defined as following table. Multiple items can be
specified by bitwise ORing.

ex) _ALMPRT_TIME_ |_ALMPRT_DESC_

Item Symbol Number
All items _ALMPRT_ALL_ 511
Time and date _ALMPRT_TIME_ 1
Memory Address _ALMPRT_ADDR_ 2
Value _ALMPRT_VALUE_ 4
Alarm type _ALMPRT_TYPE_ 8
Script 353
Alarm description _ALMPRT_DESC_ 16
[ R5]

This function creates a CSV formatted file with the designated group of alarm data.
The group number is identified by the first parameter R1.
The second parameter S2 is a name of CSV file to create. There is no need to specify the
extension. But, the path of the CSV file location must be root folder of each storage media
designated by R3 parameter. If there is a file with same name and extension, it will be replaced
with the newly created CSV file without any warning or notification.
The third parameter R3 indicates the storage media where the CSV file will be created. It can
be one of three numbers, 0 to 2. XPanel provides predefined constants for them.
That is, following constant symbols can be used as parameter R3 instead of number.
Internal Flash Disk 0 _LOCAL_ \ \ X P a n e l \
USB 2 _USBMEM_ Root

Example
Program
AlarmCsvWr(1, AlmGrp1 ,0, _ALMPRT_ALL_, _SDMEM_);
Result
Create/Replace a CSV formatted file named as AlmGrp1.CSV in SD/MMC memory card with the
group 1 alarm data. All alarm information is written to the output file with the time format of
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS .
24.5.40TouchCalib()
TouchCalib() Opens the touch panel calibration window.
This function opens touch panel calibration window. Follow the instruction displayed in
this window.

CIMON-Xpanel 354

Example
Program
TouchCalib();
Result
After completion of touch panel calibration, the system should be shutdown.
Otherwise, the calibration parameters will be lost at next power on.
24.5.41ClearAlarmLog(R1)
ClearAlarmLog
(R1)
Clear all messages listed in the designated alarm group (summary)
[ R1]Alarm group number (1 .. 10)

Example
Program
ClearAlarmLog(1);
Result Clear all alarm messages in the alarm group #1and summary window.
24.5.42AddMessage(R1, S2)
AddMessage Add a new string to the scroll message window.
Script 355
(R1, S2)
[ R1]String ID (valid range : 0 .. 9999)
[ S2]The string to add.
Example
Program
AddMessage(123, this message will be scrolledin the bottomwindow );
Result The given message (S2) string will be scrolledin the scroll message window.
24.5.43RemoveMessage(R1)
RemoveMessa
ge(R1)
Remove a string which was already registered to the scroll message
window by AddMessage() function.
[ R1]String ID (valid range : 0 .. 9999) which was designatedat AddMessage()
functioncall or -1
(clear all messages in scroll window).
Example
Program
RemoveMessage(123);
Result
The message of which ID is 123 will be removed from the scroll message
window.
24.5.44RcpGetSysMem(S1, R2)
RcpGetSysMe
m
(S1, R2)
Copy/move a block of system memory to the recipe group data.
CIMON-Xpanel 356
[S1]Recipe model name
[ R2]System memory address
This function fills the recipe group data with the block data designatedby the
system memory addressR2.
Example
Program
RcpGetSysMem( ModelName ,100);
Result
The recipe group data in memory will be filled with the data block locatedin the
system memory address 100.
The number of data is determinedby the recipe model configuration
24.5.45RcpSetSysMem(S1, R2)
RcpSetSysMe
m
(S1, R2)
Copy/move the recipe group data to the system memory..
[S1]Recipe model name
[ R2]System memory address
Script 357
Example
Program
RcpSetSysMem( ModelName ,100);
Result
The recipe group data in memory will be copiedto the system memory address
100.
The number of data is determinedby the recipe model configuration.
24.5.46GetSysMem(R1)
GetSysMem
(R1)
Get the value stored in the designated system memory
[R1]System memory address
Example
Program
Rtn = GetSysMem(100);
Result
The functionreturns a real value storedin system memory address 100.
CIMON-Xpanel 358
24.5.47SysMemMove (R1)
SysMemMove
(R1)
Move/copy a block of data to the other location within the system
memory.
[R1]System memory address (source)
[ R2]System memory address (destination)
[ R3]Number of data
This function copies R3 data from address R1 to R2. If some regions of the
source area and the destination
overlap, this function ensures that the original source bytes in the overlapping
region are copied before
being overwritten.

Example
Program
SysMemMove(100,200,10);
Result
10 data (address100 109) are copiedto the memory block of address 200
209.
Script 359
24.5.48SysMemFill(R1,R2,R3)
SysMemFill(R1,
R2,R3)
Fill a block of system memory with a specified value.
[R1]System memory address
[ R2]Fill value
[ R3]Number of data
This functionfills the system memory block started from R1 and size of R3 with
the value of R2.
Example
Program
SysMemFill(100, 1234, 10);
Result
10 system memory (address100 109) are set with a value of 1234 .
24.5.49LcdBrightUp()
LcdBrightUp() Lightening the LCD display
XPanel has total 32 steps of LCD brightness. This function increases one step of LCD
brightness from current level.
I f current level is the highest level, this function has no effect.
Example
Program
LcdBrightUp();
Result
Increase a step of LCD brightness.
24.5.50LcdBrightDown()
LcdBrightDow
n()
Darkening the LCD display
CIMON-Xpanel 360
XPanel has total 32 steps of LCD brightness. This function decreases one step of LCD
brightness from current level.
I f current level is the lowest level, this function has no effect.
Example
Program
LcdBrightDown();
Result
Decrease a step of LCD brightness.
24.5.51LcdBacklight(R1)
LcdBacklight
(R1)
Turn on / off the LCD backlight
[R1]
Non zero value Turn the LCD backlight on,
Zero Turn the LCD backlight off.
This function controlsthe backlight of LCD.
Any non-zerovalue of R1 turns on the backlight, and zero turns off the backlight.
Example
Program
LcdBacklight(0);
Result Turn the LCD backlight off.
24.5.52StaticBeepCtrl(R1)
StaticBeepCtrl
(R1)
Turn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.
[R1]
Beep on / off value (0: Off, 1: On)
This functionturn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.
Example
Program
StaticBeepCtrl(1);
Result It is turn on beep.
Script 361
24.5.53SetSpeed(R1)
SetSpeed(R1)
Script process speed control.
[R1]
Speed value (0: Normal, Another value: High)
This functionturn on or turn off beep on Xpanel.
Example
Program
TAG0 = TAG0 + 1;
SetSpeed(1);
TAG1 = TAG1 + 1;
TAG2 = TAG2 + 1;
Result After it is called SetSpeed ,script process speed is faster.
Caution If used SetSpeed function on that have function to repeat, Xpanel will be slow
until be end functionto repeat.
User script functionthat called by Runscript fall not under SetSpeed .
24.5.54SetDate(R1,R2,R3)
SetDate(R1,R2,
R3)
Change date on Xpanel.
[ R1]Year
[ R2]Month
[ R3]Day
This function change date on Xpanel.
Example
Program
SetDate(2010,1,20);
Result Date will be changed.
24.5.55SetTime(R1)
CIMON-Xpanel 362
SetTime(R1)
Change time on Xpanel
[ [ R1]Hour
[ R2]Minute
[ R3] Second
This function change time on Xpanel.
Example
Program
SetTime(13,10,0);
Result Date will be changed.
Top Level Intro
Part
XXV
CIMON-Xpanel 364
25 Scroll Message
Scroll Message is very useful when you want to display alarm or important message emphatically.
If you use scroll message, it will create small window at bottom of the screen for the scroll message.
It will let you reminding the electric signboard or TV caption.

You can configure the scroll message window size, character size, scroll direction, speed and gap between
message as you want.
Applied message at the scroll message will be repeated until it removed. The maximum number of scroll message
is 100 that can be registered.

See :
Scroll Message Configuration
Apply Scroll Message
Scroll Message 365
25.1 Scroll Message Configuration
Scroll Message Configuration

[Tools] -> [CIMON-XPANEL Setup(X)] -> [Using Scroll Message] -> [Scroll Message]

Configuration Items

CIMON-Xpanel 366
Scroll Message
Height
Scroll Message is created from the bottom of the screen.
So scroll message height must be shorter than screen height.
Text Size Configure text size of scroll message. Text size must smaller than scroll message
height
Scroll Message
Gap
It configures distance between messages.
Scroll Message
Speed
It configures message scrolling speed.
Text Color, Back
Color
It configures text color and background color.
Scroll Direction It configures the scrolled direction.
25.2 Apply Scroll Message
Apply from alarms

[Tools] -> [Alarms] -> [Add],[Edit] -> [Apply Scroll Message]

Scroll Message 367
Message index at alarms
When scroll messages are applied from alarms, each message is allowed index automatically.
Please reference scroll message index generated automatically from the alarms as the following.
Alarm Group Index number
Group 1 10000 - 10063
Group 2 10100 - 10163
Group 3 10200 - 10263
Group 4 10300 - 10363
Group 5 10400 - 10463
Group 6 10500 - 10563
Group 7 10600 - 10663
Group 8 10700 - 10763
Group 9 10800 - 10863
Group 10 10900 - 10963
Apply scroll message using script
CIMON-Xpanel 368

You can apply scroll message by using script function.
When you add scroll messages, you must attend the scroll message index. If it is duplicated, it will not be
added.
Ad
d
me
ss
ag
e
AddMessage(R1, S2)
[R1] Appling Index(0-9999)
[S2] Appling Message
Example ) AddMessage(1, "Warning")

Re
mo
ve
Me
ss
ag
e
RemoveMessage(R1)
[R1] Removing Index(0-9999, If you use number-1, then it will remove all items)
Example )RemoveMessabe(1);

Scroll Message 369

Top Level Intro
Part
XXVI
Indirect Address 371
26 Indirect Address
Indirect Tag
The indirect tag is to describe one tag by two tags that are divided into Target tag and Offset tag.
As described by the indirect tag, the address of Target tag is handled to change, referring to the tag s value
designated as Offset tag.
For example, if the tag s value designated as Offset tag is 0, it will be same value with the designated
address of tag designated as Target tag
Also, if the value of Target tag is 2, it will express the value that is 2 plus the address designated to Target
tag.
Notation Method
Write - # between Target Tag and Offset Tag
Ex) Target_Tag#Offset_Tag
Attention
Offset tag is that all analogue tag and digital tag with sate value(in case of I/O device, there are some tags
without sate value) are registered,
but Target tag is specified only real tag with the I/O device below.
In case of using the tag with I/O device that is not described on the bottom is managed as normal tag.
Supporting Indirect Tag Device
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader
KDT SYSTEMS XPANEL
Allen Bradley DF1
DELTA TAU PMAC Drive
FUJI Micrex SX
KEYENCE PLC (KV mode)
KOYO DirectNet
LSIS GLOFA PLC Cnet
LSIS GLOFA PLC Enet
CIMON-Xpanel 372
LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet
LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet
LSIS XGT Series FEnet
MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (AnA/Anu CPU)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1C (A CPU)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E
MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q00/01)
MITSUBISHI MELSEC-Q Loader (Q02/06/12/25)
YASKAWA MEMOBUS RTU
MODBUS ASCII protocl
MODBUS RTU protocl
MODBUS TCP
MAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM
OMRON PLC (Host Link)
SIEMENS RK512/3964R
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
SIEMENS S7 MPI
SIEMENSE S7 PPI Direct
SAIA S-BUS
YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol
It is ignored when the value of Offset tag is under 0, and numbers under a decimal point are thrown.
26.1 Using Indirect Tag
Indirect Tag can be used by following functions.
Supporting Functions of Indirect Tag
Tag Value, Key Input Window, String Value, Animation bitmap, Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, H-
Move, Color, Rotate, Touch, Entry Data, Command, Script.
Example for Indirect Tag
Register - I/O device to support the Indirect Tag
Refer to the Indirect Device Item described ahead. "KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI" is used here.
Register - Target Tag and Offset Tag to Database
ANA_01 -> Target Tag
CIMON-Xpanel 374
ANA_00 -> Offset Tag
Open a Page and Select a Tag Value Object. Register "Object Configuration" as follows.
Display - The value of Offset Tag
Display - The basic area value of Target Tag
Display - The value of Indirect Tag
The value of other areas is displayed by the value of Offset Tag (ANA_00).
Make - Buttons to change the value of "Offset Tag" and "Indirect Tag"
CIMON-Xpanel 376

Input commands as like follows at + button property of Offset change.
ANA_00 = ANA_00 + 1;// When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically increases by 1.
Input commands as like follows at - button property of Offset change.
if(ANA_00 > 1) // If the value is larger than 1,
ANA_00 = ANA_00 - 1; // When touching, the value of Offset Tag will automatically decreases by 1.
Input commands as like follows at + button property of Data change.
ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 + 1; // When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will automatically
increases by 1.
Input commands as like follows at - button property of Data change.
ANA_01#ANA_00 = ANA_01#ANA_00 - 1; // When touching, the value of Indirect Tag will
automatically decreases by 1.
Download the project and check the changing value while touching button.
Top Level Intro
Part
XXVII
CIMON-Xpanel 378
27 Communication Driver
Company Driver
ASI Controls ASIC Protocol
Barcode Scanner Barcode Scanner
Danfoss Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300
DELTA TAU DELTA TAU PMAC
HITACHI HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P
KDT SYSTEMS KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)
KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)
KDT Systems Xpanel Master
Keyence Keyence KV Mode
KOYO KOYO DirectNet
LSIS LSIS GLOFA Cnet
LSIS GLOFA Enet
LSIS GLOFA Loader
LSIS XGT Cnet
LSIS XGT Enet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet
LSIS Inverter Starvert
MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500
MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)
MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)
MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII
MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)
MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)
MODBUS Protocol MODBUS RTU protocl
MODBUS TCP protocl
NAIS NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)
OMRON OMRON HostLink
Communication Driver 379
SAIA SAIA S-BUS
SIEMENS SIEMENS RK512/3964R
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
SIEMENS S7 MPI
SEIMENS S7 PPI Direct
ALLENBRADLEY ALLENBRADLEY DF1
YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link
Fuji Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet
METRONIX APD METRONIX APD
FARA N70/700 PLUS FARA N70/700 PLUS
Samsung BRAIN SPC Series Samsung BRAIN SPC Series
27.1 ASIC Protocol
This driver supports the ASI communication protocol of ASI Controls.
This protocol provides communication access to a network of ASI controllers from Xpanel.
Communication Setup : Xpanel

Create a new
device
For creating a new device activate the menu Tools - > I/O Devices or icon in tool-bar.
Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.
CIMON-Xpanel 380

I/O Device Name :Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the Station
Name .

Select a device
type
Select a device type : ASI Communication Protocol
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration dialog
box will be popped
up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the Device Type as ASI Communication Protocol and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC
configuration.
Local ID : The host address of Xpanel has to be designated in this window.
It is 16 bits value between 1 and 65535. There are reserved address ranges which
cannot be used by
Xpanel or DDC. Please refer to the DDC manual from ASI Controls for more information
about the address.
Create a station Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the
CIMON-Xpanel 382
Xpanel.
Each field can be configured with following rules.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC.
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the
Device Name .
Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the ASIC .
Network ID This field has no effect
Station No. Specify a decimal number between 1 and 65535.
This number must be matched with the node address of the DDC.
16Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of byte swapping.
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except
INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps words of all double word sized data.
Following diagram shows an example of word swapping.
INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by
this option.
Using
CheckSum
This field has no effect.
This communication driver always checks the check-sum.
Comm.Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification
message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not
display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit
(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped
up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Data Address

Xpanel supports reading object and table data from DDC. These two data can be referenced by following
TAG address format.
[Object] O[ Obj No ].[ Size ].[ Index ].[ Attribute ](:Bit No)
[Table] T[ Table No ].[ Offset ](:Bit No)
Obj No / Table No
Designate the object (table) number of data location.
Please refer to the object definition of connected DDC, for more information about
object.
Size Designate the data type. It can be 1 (BYTE) or 2 (WORD).
Offset Designate the byte offset within the table.
Index Designate the assigned index number within the given object.
Attribute Designate the attribute number of data.
:Bit No Designate the bit number. This bit address notation is used in digital TAG. Notice
CIMON-Xpanel 384
that the TAG with this bit number only can be read.
That is, the digital TAG writing is not supported with ASIC protocol driver.
Bit number has to be within the range of data size. In case of a table (T) or object
(O) with size 1 (BYTE), bit number can be between 0 and 7. Elsewhere, object with
size 2 (WORD), bit number can be between 0 and 15.
Address
Examples
O33.2.0.0 Object 33, WORD, Index 0, Attribute 0
T10.0 Table 10, Byte offset 0
O32.1.0.8 Object 32, BYTE, Index 0, Attribute 8
O3.2.11.0:0 Object 3, WORD, Index 11, Attribute 0, Bit 0
TAG Data Type ASIC DDC supports two types of data, BYTE and WORD. If the data type of TAG was
larger than that, Xpanel will read next continuously positioned data for making
designated data. For example, if UINT32 type of TAG referred to the address of T1.2,
Xpanel will read T1.2, T1.3, T1.4 and T1.5 for assembling the UINT32 data.
Wiring Diagram

RS232C
RS422/485
27.2 Barcode Scanner
This driver provides the function of communication with the barcode scanner via RS232C.
The barcode scanner driver is distinct from other standard drivers. It does not support real TAG.
This driver receives the characters from barcode scanner and converts them to keyboard input.
Because of that, in Xpanel kernel s point of view, the barcode scanner is just like as a standard
keyboard.
To utilize the data from the barcode scanner, the keyboard input window object must be used in the
graphic page design.
This topic is described in this manual.
Communication Setup : Barcode Scanner

Follow the manual from barcode scanner vender.
Make the confirmation of following condition during barcode scanner setup.
Enter (0Dh) or other special code must be added at the end of data transmission.
Prepare the communication parameters from vender s documentation. (Baudrate, Parity, Stop Bit,
Data Bits, Stop Bit)

Create a new
device
For creating a new device, use the menu Tools - > I/O Devices or icon in tool-bar.
CIMON-Xpanel 386

I/O Device : Give a device name.

Select a device
type
Select a device type : Barcode Scanner
box will be
popped up as shown in following picture.

Device Tpe Barcode Scanner
Comm. Port COM1
Baud Rate 9,600 bps
Parity None
Data Bits 8 Bits
Stop Bit(s) 1 Bit
RTS/CST OFF
Comm.Type RS-232
Retry No. 3
Time Out 30
CIMON-Xpanel 388
XPanel.

Station Name Give a name to the barcode scanner. )
Station Type Choose the BarCode . (No other type can be selected.)
Network ID his field has no effect.
Station No. 0
16Bits Data
Swap
his field has no effect.
32Bits Data his field has no effect.
Swap
'Key Input Window' Object : Xpanel (Page Designer)

Key input window object displays the input character to the screen and executes the assigned
commands when the predefined terminating code
input is detected.

End Code
(HEXA)
This field must be matched with terminating code of the barcode scanner.
Typically 0Dh (Enter) code is widely used.
Input Tag Name This field must be designated a string TAG.
The input string from barcode scanner is stored in this string TAG.
Command On
Input
When the End Code is received, this command script is executed automatically.
Password Type This option can be used when there is need to hide input characters.
If this option was checked, the input characters will be seen as * character.
CIMON-Xpanel 390
Clear at End
Code
If this option was checked, the string on screen will be cleared when End Code
is received. Otherwise, the string on screen will be cleared when there is a new
input.
Communication Cable Wiring

RS232C
Above picture shows only the RS232C port of Xpanel. This is the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.
Typically RD and SG pins are enough to communicate with general barcode scanner. Refer to the manual
of your barcode scanner for signal description.
27.3 Danfoss VLT Automation Drive FC300

This driver can communicate with the VLT AutomationDrive FC 300 inverter series from Danfoss.
Communication Setup : Inverter Setting(FC300, VLT2800)

Inv
ert
er
Set
tin
g
(FC
30
0)
For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.
Parameter 8-10 : FC profile [0]
Parameter 8-30 : FC MC [1]
Parameter Number Set Value Description
8-31
1
[1] Station number 1. (any number between 1 to 126)
8-32
1
[3] 19200 bps
8-35
1
[10] 10 ms Min. response delay
8-36
1
[5000] 5000 ms Max. response delay
8-37
1
[25] 25 ms Max. inter-char delay
8- 10
2
[ 0] FC Profile
8- 30
2
[ 1] FC MC
(Note 1) Those parameters (8-31 to 8-32) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.
(Note 2) The parameters of 8-10 and 8-30 must be set as the value shown in this example.
If those parameters were set as other values, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.
Inv
ert
er
Set
tin
g
(VL
T2
80
0)
For normal communication, following parameters of the inverter must be set as stated.
Parameter 512 : FC profile [1]
500
1
[1] Station number. (any number between 1 to 247)
501
1
[5] 9600 bps
502
2
[ 1] FC Profile
(Note 1) Those parameters (500 and 501) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.
(Note 2) The parameter of 512 must be set as the value shown in above table.
If this parameter was set as other value, Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
For creating a new device the menu, 'Tool > I/O Devices' or icon in tool bar.
CIMON-Xpanel 392

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied by the 'Station Name'.
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Device type : ' DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300 '
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration dialog box will
be popped up as shown in following picture.

Note
FC 300 supports the RS485 only with even parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.
In this window, select the Device Type as DANFOSS VLT AutomationDrive FC-300 and configure
the
proper serial communication parameters.
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box.
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 394

This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the 'Device Name'.
Station Type Choose the 'FC-300'. (No other type can be selected.)
Network ID This field has no effect.
16Bits Data
Swap
32Bits Data
Swap
Using Checksum This field has no effect.
Comm. Error
Message pop Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically
about 5 seconds after.
Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format.

TAG Type Format Example
Analog [Symbol][Decimal Number] P023
Digital [Symbol][Decimal Number][.][Hexadecimal Number] P000.F
Symb
ol
Addres
s
Description Access
P 0001 -
1760
Parameter Area
The address of each TAG can be induced from the parameter number of
FC 300 or VLT 2800. For example, to monitor the 16-17 Speed [RPM]
of FC 300, the address should be designated with P1617 . For more
parameters, please refer to the How to Program section of FC 300
Design Guide .
The value written to this address will be transferred to the FC 300 or VLT
2800 directly. That means, parameters of the inverter can be modified by
writing a desired value to this address. The new value can be stored in not
only RAM also EEPROM of FC 300. For storing set value to the EEPROM,
C002 point must have a non-zero value.
R/W
C 000 Control Code
1 word sized control data. Each bit has its own control meaning which is
shown in following [control code] table. To control FC 300 or VLT 2800,
write a value of combination of the table.
Ensure that the reference (C001) must be set as desired value before
issuing of this control code.
W
001 Reference
This point is a signed word data (-32767 - +32767), and the range of data
corresponds to -200% to +200% of reference. For example, the value of
CIMON-Xpanel 396
16384 represents 100% of reference.
This reference value must be set before the actual control by control code
(C000).
002 EEPROM Writing
If this is non-zero, the value written to the parameter area (Pnnnn) will
be saved to the EEPROM as well as RAM of FC 300 or VLT 2800.
Otherwise, the set value will be stored only in RAM. Ensure that the value
of this point is what you wanted before parameter writing.
Above addresses can be used in both of analog and digital TAG.
For more information of each point, please refer to the FC 300 Design Guide .
[C000 : Control Code for FC300]
Bit No. Bit Value = 0 Bit Value = 1
00 Reference value External selection lsb
01 Reference value External selection msb
02 DC brake Ramp
03 Coasting No coasting
04 Quick stop Ramp
05 Freeze output Use ramp
06 Ramp stop Start
07 No function Reset
08 No function Jog
09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
10 Data not valid Data valid
11 Relay 01 open Relay 01 active
12 Relay 02 open Relay 02 active
13 Parameter set-up Selection lsb
14 Parameter set-up Selection msb
15 No function Reverse

[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the Control Word According to FC Profile (CTW)
section of FC 300 Design Guide .
[C000 : Control Code for VLT2800]
Bit No. Bit Value = 0 Bit Value = 1
00 Preset ref. lsb
01 Preset ref. msb
02 DC brake
03 Coasting stop
04 Quick stop
05 Freeze output freq.
06 Ramp stop Start
07 Reset
08 Jog
09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
10 Data not valid Data valid
11 Relay 01 activated
12 Digital output terminal 46 activated
13 Selection Setup, lsb
14 Selection Setup, msb
15 Reverse
[ Note ] For more information of each bit, refer to the 'Control Word According to FC Profile(CTW)'
section of 'FC 2800 Design Guide'.
[Example : Monitors the frequency data]
1. Make an analog TAG for frequency data. The address can be induced from parameter number 16-13.
Designate P1613 as the address of new analog TAG.
2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG if needed. Conversion index of parameter 16-13 is -1.
Configure the scaling factor of the TAG in database as 0.1. (The Conversion index and other useful
information of each parameter
can be found on the Parameter Lists section of the FC 300 Design Guide .)
CIMON-Xpanel 398

[Example : Changes the 'speed PID lowpass filter time']
1. Make two analog TAGs. One TAG is for EEPROM storage control and the other TAG is for the parameter.
The address of parameter TAG can be induced from parameter number 7-06. Designate P0706 as the
address of the new analog TAG.

2. Setup the scale factor of the analog TAG. In this example, the value of 0.1 was designated as the scale
factor.
This value came from the Conversion index of the parameter 7-06. But the conversion index of par.
7-06 is -4.
This index is based on the unit of second. For convenience, we can use the unit of milli-second, such
that the index can be thought as the value of -1.

3. The parameter of FC 300 can be modified by changing the TAG.
If needed but not necessarily, before the writing a new parameter value, the EEPROM storing option can
be arranged.
Following picture shows an example of changing parameter.
CIMON-Xpanel 400
[Example : Start Controls ]
1. Make two analog TAGs for control. One TAG is for reference value (C001, INT16) and the other TAG is
for control word (C000, UINT16).
2. To control the FC 300, write a desired reference value to the Reference point (C001) first. And then,
write a control value to Control point.
For example, write the value of 0x047F for issuing a start command.
Following picture shows an example of a command expression for control. (Start with 100%)


CIMON-Xpanel 402
NOTE
(Note 1)Shielded twisted pair cable must be used for P-N pair.
(Note 2)Ensure that shield cable was connected to the COM terminal (61) of FC 300.
27.4 DELTA TAU PMAC

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and DELTA TAU
PMAC series drivers.
Communication Setup : PMAC

For normal communication between Xpanel and PMAC, the some of I-variables should have the values
described below.
I -
variable
Set
Value
Remark
I0 0 .. 15 The station number 0 is the default value of PMAC. To set up the PMAC to
communicate as station 1 to 15 on a multi-drop serial cable, first communicate with
the board as station 0. Set I0 to specify the new station number. Also set I1 to 3 to
enable the station number addressing.
I1 3 CS handshake not used; software card address required.
I3 2 Communication handshake style and code
I4 0 Checksum disabled, serial errors reported immediately
I6 1 Error reporting mode.
I9 0 or 2 0 (short form of decimal) or 2 (short form of hexadecimal)
I63 1 Echo the <Control-X> character
I64 1 Internal response tag enable

Store these values to the non-volatile flash memory with the SAVE command. Then turn off power.
Please refer to the manual of PMAC for more information.

Create a new
device
For creating a new device activate the menu Tools -> I/ O Devices or icon in tool-bar.

CIMON-Xpanel 404
I/ O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
accompanied by the Station Name .
Select a device
type
Select a device type : ' DELTA TAU PMAC Drive '
box will be
popped up as shown in following picture..

In this window, select the Device Type as DELTA TAU PMAC Drive and configure the proper
serial
communication parameters. (9600bps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit recommended)

Device Name .
Station Type Choose the PMAC . (No other type can be selected.)
16bits Data
Swap
CIMON-Xpanel 406
32bits Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
message at every Rx and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically about 5 seconds after.
Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][Address] P0012
Digital [Symbol][Address] M0215
Address : decimal number between 0 and 8191
All the addresses can be used with the digital TAG. The value of zero (0) is treated as OFF and other
values are treated as ON in Xpanel.
Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in Xpanel database.
Symbol Description Address
Range
Type Access
I Variable of fixed meaning for card setup 0-8191 Analog R/W
P Global variable for programming use 0-8191 Analog R/W
M Variable assigned to memory location for user 0-8191 Analog R/W
Q Local variable for programming use 0-8191 Analog R/W
DELTA TAU PMAC communication driver supports only FLOAT data type. Ensure that the data
type of TAGs.
(Following picture shows the FLOAT data type configuration window ofXpanell database.)


Xpanel
COM1/COM2
RS232C
Connector Type :
D89
Xpanel
COM1 RS422A
Connector Type :
5 Pins Terminal
Block
CIMON-Xpanel 408
27.5 HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P
This driver supports the communication with Hitachi Inverter SJ 300 and L300P models through RS485 port.
Communication Setup : HITACHI Inverter(SJ300/L300P)

For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters of inverter have to be properly configured.
Function
Code
Item Value Description
C070
Data command
source
02 Digital operator
03 RS485 connector
04 Expansion card #1
05 Expansion card #2
C071
Baudrate
02 Loopback test
03 2400 bps
04 4800 bps
05 9600 bps
06 19200 bps
C072 Node address 1 to 32
Node or station address
(unique to each inverter or device)
C073 Data bits
07 7 bits
08 8 bits
C074 Parity
00 None
01 Even parity
02 Odd parity
C075 Stop bits
01 1 bit
02 2 bits
C078 Wait time
0 to
1000
0 to 1000 ms time that the inverter waits to respond to
network master
Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information.


Create a new
device

of database accompanied by the Station Name .
Select a device
type
Select a device type : ' HITACHI Inverter '
box will
be popped up as shown in following picture..
CIMON-Xpanel 410

In this window, select the Device Type as HITACHI Inverter and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter's
configuration.
In this dialog box, all the connected inverter stations can be configured and registered to the
Xpanel.

Station Name Give a name to the inverter.
Device Name .
Station Type Choose the type of connected inverter.
Two inverter models are supported by this communication drivers (SJ 300
and L300P).
CIMON-Xpanel 412
Station No. Specify a decimal number between 1 and 32. This number must be matched
with the number in the parameter of the inverter (Function code : C072).
16bits Data
Swap
32bits Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
This communication driver always checks the check-sum.
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
Point Map

Ad
dre
ss
Not
ati
on
[ Symbol ][ Offset ][ . ][ Bit number ]
Symbol : A, B, C, F, H, P, X or Y
Offset : 3 digits decimal number (001 ... ???)
Bit number : 2 digits decimal number (00 ... 31) with proceeding dot (.)
All analog real tags must be declared as UINT32 data type for normal data processing
as shown in the following picture. And some points need the scale factor for simple and
easy data manipulation in Xpanel. The point map in the next section includes a
recommended
scale factor column for those points.

Poi
nt
Ma
p
Address Description Acc. Scale Cmd
A001-A393 Basic parameter setting R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
B001-B313 Fine tuning functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
C001-C123 Intelligent terminal functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
F002-F303 Main profile parameters R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
H003-H306 Motor constants R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
P001-P049 Expansion card functions R/W - 06(R)/07(W)
X001 Output frequency (x 100Hz) R 0.01 03
X002 Output current (x 10A) R 0.1 03
X003 Direction of rotation R - 03
X004 PID feedback monitor (x 100%) R 0.01 03
X005 Intelligent input monitor R - 03
X006 Intelligent output monitor R - 03
X007 Frequency converting monitor (x 100) R 0.01 03
X008 Output torque monitor (%) R - 03
X009 Output voltage monitor (x 10V) R 0.1 03
X010 Electric power monitor (x 10kW) R 0.1 03
X012 Run mode time monitor (Hours) R - 03
X013 Power ON time monitor (Hours) R - 03
X014 Trip : Inverter status A R - 04
X015 Inverter status B R - 04
CIMON-Xpanel 414
X016 Inverter status C R - 04
X018 Total accumulated number of trip events R - -
X019 History : Trip factor R - -
X020 History : Inverter status A R - -
X021 History : Inverter status B R - -
X022 History : Inverter status C R - -
X023 History : Output frequency (x 100Hz) R 0.01 -
X024 History : Accumulated run mode time (Hours) R - -
X025 History : Output current (x 10A) R 0.1 -
X026 History : Output voltage (x 10V) R 0.1 -
X027 History : Power ON time (Hours) R - -
X028 EEPROM write availability verify R - 09
Y001 Mode control (0=STOP / 1=FORWARD / 2=REVERSE) W - 00
Y002 Output frequency (x 100Hz) W 0.01 01
Y003 Intelligent terminal function (High-Word) W - 02
Y004 Intelligent terminal function (Low-Word) W - -
Y005 Inverter Initialize (any value) W - 08
Y006 EEPROM write (any value) W - 0A
Y007 Recalculate internal motor constants (any value) W - 0B
Y008 Read trip history (0=Internal buffer / 1=Comm.) W - 05
Y009 Trip history number to read (1...6) W - -
Scale : Some points need a scaling process for simple and easy data manipulation in Xpanel.
Recommended scale factors are given in 'Scale' column of above table.
Cmd : The command codes used in the communication between Xpanel and inverter are listed in
the above table. Please refer to the manual of inverter for more information about the
command codes. The points without command codes are internal points of Xpanel.
Following sections describe these internal points.
Write Only
Points (Y)
:
The points with symbol 'Y' are write only. When these points were monitored in the screen
of Xpanel, value of zero would be displayed. But, the points Y004 and Y009 are
exceptional. These two points are described in the following sections.
Inv
ert
er
Sta
tus
Fla
gs
Each status data keeps a code as shown in the following data.
Code Status A (X014) Status B (X014) Status C (X016)
0 Initial status On stopping
1 On running Stop
(X0
14
/
X0
15
/
X0
16)
2 On stopping On tripping Deceleration speed
3 On running Constant speed
4 On free-run stop Acceleration speed
5 On jog Forward
6 On dynamic breaking Reverse
7 On retry Reverse from forward
8 On trip Forward from reverse
9 On under-voltage Forward start
10 Reverse start
Tri
p
His
tor
y
(Y0
08/
Y0
09)
The inverter keeps total 6 trip history data on its memory. And the Xpanel driver provides a method to choose
on of those 6 trip history data for monitoring.
To monitor a trip history in Xpanel, first of all, Y009 has to be set a value between 1 and 6. This value denotes
the history data ID to be stored in X018 - X027. And then, when the Y008 point was written as zero or one,
one of history data block would be copied to the monitoring points (X018 - X027) as explained in the following
picture. When the Y008 point was written as zero (0), one of buffered trip history would be copied to the
monitoring points(X018 - X027). Otherwise (written as 1), the internal trip history data buffer would be updated
by the data from inverter.
Thus, following sequential commands or script program updates the trip history data which are stored in
X018 - X027 and monitored.
CIMON-Xpanel 416
TAG_Y009 = 1; // Set the trip history ID (1...6)
TAG_Y008 = 1; // Update the history data by communication
Int
elli
ge
nt
Ter
mi
nal
Fu
nct
ion
(Y0
03
/
Y0
04)
The intelligent terminal functions are composed with 64 bit control flags as listed in the following table. These
control flags are accessed by Xpanel with two different touble word points, Y003 and Y004. Y003 holds high 32
bit flags of intelligent terminal function and Y004 holds low 32 bits.
Y004 (Low) Y003 (High)
Bit No. Description Bits No. Description
00 [FW] Forward command 00 [SF1] Multi-speed bit-level
01 [RV] Reverse command 01 [SF2] Multi-speed bit-level
02 [CF1] Multi-speed 1 02 [SF3] Multi-speed bit-level
06 [JG] Jog operation 06 [SF7] Multi-speed bit-level
07 [DB] Dynamic braking 07 [OLR] Overload restriction setting
08 [SET] Set 2
nd
motor 08 [TL] Torque limit
09 [2CH] 2-stage adjustable speed 09 [TRQ1] Torque limit select 1
10 10 [TRQ2] Torque limit select 2
11 [FRS] Free-run stop 11 [PPIP/PI] Inverter model select
12 [EXP] External trip 12 [BOK] Brake confirmation
13 [USP] Unattended start protection 13 [ORT] Orientation (home) command
14 [CS] Commercial power change 14 [LAC] Linear accel/decel cancel
15 [SFT] Software lock 15 [PCLR] Position error clear
16 [AT] Analog input voltage/current 16 [STAT] Pulse train input enable
17 [SET3] Set 3
rd
motor 17
18 [RS] Reset 18
19 19
20 [STA] 3-wire Start 20
21 [STP] 3-wire Hold 21
22 [F/R] 3-wire FWD/REV 22
23 [PID] PID enable 23
24-31 24-31
When data were written to Y004 points, Xpanel would store the value in its memory. That is, Xpanel does not
send the Y004 data to the inverter and waits until the point Y003 is written as some other value. The actual
data sending is fulfilled when Y003 point was written as some value. Following sequential commands or script
program sends "forward : bit 0 of Y004", "multi-speed 1 : bit 2 of Y004" and "multi-speed 2 : bit 3
of Y004" commands to the inverter at the same time.
TAG_Y004 = 0x000D; // Set the low command flags
TAG_Y003 = 0; // Set the high command flags and send commands to inverter
Wiring Diagram

RS485
Xpanel
COM1 RS422/485
27.6 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC HMI (RS232C/RS422A)
This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A HMI Protocol. Following
modules (options) support the HMI Protocol.

* CM1-SC01A/B * CM1-SC02A
* CM1-CP4C/D/U * CM1-BPnnM option : R, S, U, T
CIMON-Xpanel 418

Create a new
device
For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or icon in tool-bar.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window
of database
Select a device
type
Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI '

In this window, select the Device Type as KDT Systems CIMON-PLC HMI and configure the
proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.
Each field
can be configured with following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 420

Device Name .
Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC between CP/XP Series and BP Series .
16bits Data
Swap
32bits Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
Communication Setup : PLC

Co
m
mu
nic
ati
on
Mo
dul
e
If one of the following special function modules is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module should
be configured as following picture.
CM1-SC01A or B
CM1-SC02A
BPnnMxxx-U or T
The protocol item must be set as HMI Protocol . And ensure that other communication parameters are
CIMON-Xpanel 422
matched with Xpanel.
CP
U
Em
be
dd
ed
Por
t
If the CPU embedded port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be configured as
following picture.
This type of communication port is supported by following models :
CM1-CP4C or D or U
BPnnMxxx-R or S

Supported PLC Memories

Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Remark
External Input X X0000 X5110 X0000 X511F
External Output Y Y0000 Y5110 Y0000 Y511F
Internal Relay M M0000 - M9990 M0000 - M999F
Internal Relay L L0000 L9990 L0000 L999F
Latch Relay K K0000 K9990 K0000 K999F
Flags F F0000 F1270 F0000 F127F Read Only
Timer Output T Not supported T0000 T4095
Timer PV TC TC0000 TC4095 Not supported
Timer SV TS TS0000 TS4095 Not supported
Counter Output C Not supported C0000 C4095
Counter PV CC CC0000 CC4095 Not supported
Counter SV CS CS0000 CS4095 Not supported
Data Memory D D00000 D31999 Not supported
Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
CM
1 -
SC
01
A,
SC
02
A
CM
2 -
BP
nn
Mx
x- T
CM
1 -
CP
4C
:

Op
tio
n
Por
t
CIMON-Xpanel 424
CM
2 -
BP
16
Mx
x-R
[ RS422A ]
CM1-SC01A,
SC02A
CM1-CP4C :
Option
Port
CM2-BP16Mxx-S
CM2-BPnnMxx-U
27.7 KDT SYSTEMS CIMON-PLC Loader (RS232C/RS422A)
This driver supports the communication with CIMON-PLC through RS232C/422A loader protocol.
Following PLC CPU modules are connectable with this driver.
* CM1-XPnA/R * CM1CPnA/B/C/D/U
* CM2-BPnnM * CM1-SC01A/B * CM1-SC02A

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
For creating a new device activate the menu [ Tools - I/O Devices ] or icon in tool-bar.
CIMON-Xpanel 426

database
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : ' KDT Systems CIMON-PLC LOADER '
be

In this window, select the Device Type as KDT Systems CIMON-PLC Loader and configure the
proper
serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.
[Note] The communication parameter of standard loader port is 38400-n-8-1 .
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. In this dialog box, all
the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured
with
following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 428
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the Device
Name .
Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the CP/XP/BP Series .
Station No. Specify a decimal number between 0 and 31. This number is effective on CPU s
optional
port or SCnnA/B module. The station number is ignored on the standard loader
port.
16bits Data
Swap
32bits Data This field has no effect.
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error,
the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed

Communication Setup : CIMON PLC

Sta
nd
ard
Lo
ad
er
Por
t
on
CP
U
All the CPU models support RS232C loader port by RJ11 connector. There is no need to configure this port.
The communication parameters are fixed as 38400-n-8-1 .
This configuration supports only peer to peer (1:1) communication. Because of that, CPU ignores the station
number part in the communication frame from Xpanel. That is, the CPU accepts all the station number from
Xpanel.

CP
U's
Op
tio
n
Por
t
If the CPU s optional communication port is used for connection with Xpanel, the CPU parameter must be
configured as following picture.
CIMON-Xpanel 430
Notice that the station number must be matched with that of Xpanel configuration. CP series CPU s optional
port supports two protocols. But, there is no need to set the protocol type. This port automatically detects the
protocol type. Following CPU models support the loader protocol on the optional communication port.
CM1-CP4C or D or U
Co
m
mu
nic
ati
on
M
od
ule
If one of the following special function modules (options) is used for Xpanel connection, the property of module
should be configured as following picture.
CM1-SC01A or B
CM1-SC02A
BPnnMxxx-U or T
The protocol item must be set as CICON(Loader) Protocol . And ensure that other communication parameters
are matched with Xpanel, especially for the station number.


External Input X X0000 X5110 X0000 X511F
External Output Y Y0000 Y5110 Y0000 Y511F
Internal Relay M M0000 - M9990 M0000 - M999F
Internal Relay L L0000 L9990 L0000 L999F
Latch Relay K K0000 K9990 K0000 K999F
Flags F F0000 F1270 F0000 F127F Read Only
Timer Output T Not supported T0000 T4095
Timer PV TC TC0000 TC4095 Not supported
Timer SV TS TS0000 TS4095 Not supported
Counter Output C Not supported C0000 C4095
Counter PV CC CC0000 CC4095 Not supported
CIMON-Xpanel 432
Counter SV CS CS0000 CS4095 Not supported
Data Memory D D00000 D31999 Not supported
Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
All
CP
U
mo
del
CM
1 -
SC
01
A,
SC
02
A
CM
2 -
BP
nn
Mx
x- T
[ RS422A ]
CM1-SC01B,
SC02A
CM1-CP4D
CM2-BPnnMxxx-
U
27.8 KDT Systems Xpanel Master
This driver provides the network solution between Xpanels. The XPanel in which this driver was loaded is a
master station,
and other Xpanels are slave stations. All slave Xpanels should have been configured as the data server .
CIMON-Xpanel 434
(The Xpanel s data server configuration is described in the manual of Xpanel.)

Communication Setup : Slave Xpanel

Above picture shows how to configure a slave Xpanel to the data server.
Each slave Xpanel can have up to 1000 data buffers (D000-D999) and 1000 string buffers (S000
S999).
All these buffers should be assigned to their appropriate TAGs as shown in above picture.
For more information, please refer to the Network Data Server section of Xpanel manual.
Communication Setup : Master Xpanel

Create a new
device
of
database accompanied by the Station Name .
Select a
network type
Select a network type : ' KDT Systems Xpanel '
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Ethernet Communication Configuration dialog
box will be popped
up as shown in following picture. In this window, select the Device Type as KDT Systems
Xpanel and configure
the proper Ethernet communication parameters.

Point
XPanel network data server supports only UDP/IP protocol suit .
Do not select the TCP protocol of configuration dialog box.

CIMON-Xpanel 436

Create a station Move to the Station tab of Ethernet Communication Configuration dialog box.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
accompanied with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the XPANEL . (No other type can be selected.)
IP Address Give the IP address of the server (slave) Xpanel with dotted decimal format.
Socket Port
Nimber
Give the port number of data server serviced by the Xpanel. This value must
be 10262.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will
be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Fixed XPANEL Do not use this option (leave as unchecked). The server (slave) XPanel can
CIMON-Xpanel 438
Socket Port /
XPANEL Socket
Port No.
service multiple masters and dynamic socket port.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in master Xpanel has the following format.
Type Format Example
Number [D][Address in decimal number] D0012
String [S][Address in decimal number] S0100
Memory Area Symbol I/O Address Range Applicable TAG
Real Data D D000 D999 Digital / Analog
String Data S S000 S999 String

27.9 Keyence KV Mode
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Keyence KV
series PLCs.
It supports the following families of Keyence PLCs.
KV-10, KV-16, KV-24, KV-40
KV-300 with KV-L2 in KV mode

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

I/ O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database accompanied by the Station Name .
Sel
ect
Select a network type : ' KEYENCE PLC(KV mode) '
CIMON-Xpanel 440
a
net
wo
rk
typ
e
be

In this window, select the Device Type as KEYENCE PLC (KV mode) and configure the proper
serial
communication parameters. The parity is fixed as 'Even' in case of KV-10, KV-16, KV-40 PLC
module.

Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n

Name .
Station Type Choose the KEYENCE KV . (No other type can be selected.)
Station No Specify a decimal number between 0 and 9.
16Bits Data
Swap
32Bits Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification
CIMON-Xpanel 442
Message pop
Up
message
at every Rx and Tx error.
error.
notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5
seconds
after.
Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][Address] DM0012
Digital [Symbol][Address] R0215

Address : decimal number

Symbol Description Address
Range
Type Access
CC Counter : Current Value 0-249 Analog R/W
CP Counter : Preset Value 0-249 Analog R/W
C Counter Contact 0-249 Digital R/W
CTHC High Speed Counter : Current Value 0 - 1 Analog R/W
CTHP High Speed Counter : Preset Value 0 - 1 Analog R
CTH High Speed Counter : Contact 0 - 1 Digital R
CTCC High Speed Counter Comparator : Current Value 0 - 3 Analog R
CTCP High Speed Counter Comparator : Preset Value 0 - 3 Analog R/W
CTC High Speed Counter Comparator : Contact 0 - 3 Digital R/W
TC Timer : Current Value 0-249 Analog R/W
TP Timer : Preset Value 0-249 Analog R/W
T Timer : Contact 0-249 Digital R/W
TM Temporary Data Memory 0 31 Analog R/W
DM Data Memory 0 - 1999 Analog R/W
R Relay (I/O, Internal AUX, Special AUX) 0-17915 Digital R/W
AT Digital Trimmer 0 - 1 Analog R
Keyence KV mode protocol does not support block data read and write functions.
Because of that, double word (INT32, UINT32, BCD32, UBCD32, FLOAT) data types are not supported.
Ensure that especially for using following functions of Xpanel.
Recipe
XY / SPC / Scope Trend.

KV-
10,
KV
-
16,
KV-
24,
KV
- 4 0
KV-
L2
mo
dul
e
of
KV-
30
0
CIMON-Xpanel 444
27.10 KOYO DirectNet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with KOYO DL06 PLC using RS232C
or RS422/485.

You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipment's by using Xpanel Designer.
Configure the option of the example followed. More details about I/O device configuration in section I/O
device configuration .
Create a new
device
To configure the communication device of DL06 PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu
or icon
in tool-bar , and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then
click
'new device' button. I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a
device
type as the following figure.


I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name
to identify what
equipments it is. The string DEV of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of
I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment
simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value
which is saved as
a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following
DEV.ST
( DEV is a device name, and ST is a station name). And it is used as a
unique identifier in
Xpanel project.

Select a
network type
Select a network type : ' KOYO DirecNet '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel.

CIMON-Xpanel 446

Comm.Port COM1
Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-485, you must
select COM1 . When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used,
9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication type
of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1 port,
you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use only
one type.
Baud rate 9,600
Select the communication speed to equipment. The configuration of the
communication speed of Xpanel must be the same as the configuration of
equipment. If speed of the configurations of two sides are not same, they
will not be communicated each other.
Parity Odd
Data bits 8 bits
Stop bits 1 bits
RTS/CTS OFF
RTS/CTS control is used for HALF-DUPLEX communication. When you
ordinary modem of two-wire circuit, you can control the modem by this
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel
supports Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn t use this function. This
example doesn t use RTS-CTS control.
Comm.Type RS232
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-485
communication then select RS-485. When RS-232 communication is
used, 9P DSUB connector is used. And When RS-422/485 communication
is used, 5P plug connector is used.
Retry No. 3 (If communication failed with the kind of field equipment, it will retry as
the number of this.)
Time Out 30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30
seconds. )
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)

Create a station Move to [Station] tab at the Serial Communication Configuration Dialog Box and click [Add
Station] button then you can see Station Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the
following contents then click OK button.
CIMON-Xpanel 448

Station Name When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used
for division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel.
Internal Xpanel it expresses as Device.Station and this example shows
you as DEV.ST .
Station Type DirectNet(ASCII)
Either DirecNet(HEX) or DirectNet(ASCII) is to be selected by accorded
with PLC configurations.
Station No. When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
Station No. to divide. Station number must be same configured in field
equipments. It will not be communicated if the Station No. different each
other.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Device range

When you edit the tag or communication block, you can edit address as following figure.
Memory Type Discrete Memory Reference(octal) Word memory Reference(octal)
Input Point X0 - X777 V40400 - v40437
Output Point Y0 - Y777 V40500 - V40537
Control Relays C0 - C1777 V40600 - V40677
Special Relays SP0 - SP777 V41200 - V41237
Timer Current Values
(Analog)
TA0 - TA377 V0 - V377
Timer Status Bits T0 - T377 V41100 - V41117
Counter Current Values
(Analog)
CTA0 - CTA177 V1000 - V1177
Counter Status Bits CT0 - CT177 V41140 - V41147
Stage S0 - S1777 V41000 - V41017
Remote I/O GX0 - GX3777
GY0 - GY3777
V40000 - V40177
V40200 - V40377

Above the address table is a basis of the company of Koyo s DL06.
If the Equipment used DirectNET Excepted of the Koyo s DL06, DL405, DL205 then you reference this
manual and so you can use Word memory Reference only.
Case of Digital Tag
In the case of Word memory Reference [Ex.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15
[Ex.] 0 bit of the No.40000 -> V40000.15
In the case of Discrete Memory Reference [EX.] At the 15 bit of the No.40000 -> GX017
(reference 129-12)

27.11 LSIS GLOFA Cnet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C or
RS422/485.

You can configure I/O device according to various kind of field equipments by using Xpanel Designer.
CIMON-Xpanel 450
Create a new
device
To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu
or icon in
tool-bar , and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new
device] button.
I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the
following figure.

to identify what equipments it is. The string DEV of this item will be shown up in the
selection list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various
kinds of equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as
following DEV.ST ( DEV is a device name, and ST is a station name). And it is used as
a unique identifier in Xpanel project.
Select a device
type
Select a device type : ' LSIS GLOFA PLC '

Comm.Port COM1
Select communication port to communicate. If you use RS-422/485, you
must select COM1 . When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is
type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1
port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use
only one type.
CIMON-Xpanel 452
Baud rate 9,600
Parity None
Data bits 8 bits
Stop bits 1 bits
RTS/CTS OFF
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports
Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn t use this function. This example
doesn t use RTS-CTS control.
Retry No. 3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as
the number of this.
Time Out 30 (If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30
seconds. )
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select (This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.)


Station Name ST
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used
you as DEV.ST .
Station Type DirectNet
Station No. 0
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
other.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Parameter Setup : Cnet Frame Editor
CIMON-Xpanel 454

Run Cnet Frame
Editor
Please run Cnet Frame Editor from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.

Channel RS232 side
To Communicate by RS/232, select the Button RS232 side .
Station 00
Configure Station number to 00. When field equipments number exceed
over than 1, it assigned different Station No. to divide. It will not be
communicated if the Station No. different each other. The way of wiring
will be following.
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bit 8 bits
Parity NONE
Cnet Frame
Editor
If all configurations were ended, select [Online] [Write] in the menu.
Select the proper slot which was located Cnet module and click [Write].
Wiring Diagram

You can wire communication cable as the following figures.

RS-232C :
NULL MODEM
Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you don t
connect lines to PLC as the showing figure, it can t transmit data to other field equipments
but can receive data so that not to be accomplished communication.
RS-422
CIMON-Xpanel 456

On wiring as the above figure terminal resistance must be 330.
To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable.
But shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

On wiring as above the figure terminal resistance must be 120.
When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connect with SDA and SDB but disconnect with RDA and
RDB.
Device Memory range

You can use device memories as following range.
Direct Variable Data type Remark
%QX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63 BIT Output image area
%IX0.0.0 - %QX63.7.63 BIT Input image area
%MX0 - %MX524287 BIT Direct variable area
%MW0.0 - %MW32767.15 BIT Direct variable area
%MD0.0 - %MD16383.31 BIT Direct variable area
%QW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3 WORD Output image area
%IW0.0.0 - %QW63.7.3 WORD Input image area
%MW0 - %MX32767 WORD Direct variable area
%QD0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1 DWORD Output image area
%ID0.0.0 - %QD63.7.1 DWORD Input image area
%MD0 - %MD16383 DWORD Direct variable area
Error Code

When Xpanel communicates with PLC it can receive NAK including error code.
Reference Error code contents as following table.
Error
Code
Error type Error factors and contents
0001 PLC system Error Interface failed with PLC
0011 Data Error In case of data length was wrong
In case of it doesn t start with %
In case of variable value was wrong
If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but
you write other value
1132 Device memory Error In case of unusable characters were inputted
1232 Data magnitude Error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words
1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type
of each block was dislike then it will be happen.
1432 Data value Error Unable to transform Data value to Hex
7132 permitted range of variable
over Error
Over requesting through each device supports memory
range.

27.12 LSIS GLOFA Enet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using Ethernet.

CIMON-Xpanel 458
Create a new
device
To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -> 'I/O device' in the menu or
icon in tool-bar, and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then click
[new device] button. I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a
device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name : In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device name to
identify what equipments it is. The string DEV of this item will be shown up in the selection
list of I/O device when you register a tag. Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of
equipment simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The value which is
saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name and station name as following DEV.
ST ( DEV is a device name, and ST is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier
in Xpanel project.
Select a device
type
Select a device type: LSIS GLOFA PLC


Protocol UDP
You can choose one of the protocols - UPD, TCP when you use Ethernet.
Because the size of data which is used in normal industry is small, UDP is
generally used. TCP is efficient for transferring big sized data.
Retry No. 3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the
number of this.

Create a station Move to [Station] tab at the Serial Communication Configuration Dialog Box and click [Add Station]
button then you can see Station Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following
contents then click OK button.
CIMON-Xpanel 460

Station Name When field equipments number exceed over than 2, station name is used for
division of field equipment at the internal Xpanel. Internal Xpanel it expresses
as Device.Station and this example shows you as DEV.ST .
Station Type GLOFA
IP Address 172.16.106.254
Exactly input the field equipment s IP address which is identified. If IP
address is not correct, it will not be communicated.
Socket Port No. 2005
The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,
UDP 2005.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Parameter Setup : Enet Frame Editor

Run Enet Frame
Editor
Please run Enet Frame Editor from GLOFA Loader and activate I/O configurations.

PLC Type GM1 / 2 / 3 ( Select proper PLC which is using the same PLC.)
IP Address 172.16.106.254
Please input the correct IP address which is corresponded with
already configured by Xpanel Designer.
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0
Please input the correct Subnet Mask which is corresponded with
already configured by Xpanel Designer.
GateWay 172.16.100.1
If field equipment is connected out of the Local network, you must
input IP address of GateWay.
Enet Frame If all configurations were ended, select 'Online Write' in the menu.
CIMON-Xpanel 462
Editor
: Write
Select the proper slot which was located Enet module and click [Write].
Wiring Diagram

This interface is used to communicate between the equipment and TOUCH/PPC by Ethernet code of
practice.
This interface is satisfied with standard IEEE802.3 about the 10BaseT/100BaseTX.
You can make cable and allocation pin number of RJ45 as the following figure.


2 Orange Orange 2
3 Green/W Green/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Green 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8

2 Orange Green 2
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Orange 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8
Device Memory ramge

Error Code

CIMON-Xpanel 464
Error
Code
Error type Error factors and contents
0001 PLC system Error Interface failed with PLC
0011 Data Error In case of data length was wrong
In case of it doesn t start with %
In case of variable value was wrong
If the case of Bit value write, you must write 00 or 01 but you
write other value
1132 Device memory Error In case of unusable characters were inputted
1232 Data magnitude Error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words
1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type of
each block was dislike then it will be happen.
7132 permitted range of
variable over Error
Over requesting through each device supports memory range.
You can reference Error code contents as following table.
27.13 LSIS GLOFA Loader
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using Loader
Port.

Create a new
device
To configure the communication device of LGIS PLC, Select 'Tools' -' I/O device' in the menu or
icon in tool-bar, and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then
click [new device] button. I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and
a device type as the following figure.

to identify what equipments it is. The string DEV of this item will be shown up in the
following DEV.ST ( DEV is a device name, and ST is a station name). And it is used as
a unique identifier in Xpanel project.
Select a device
type
Select a device type : LSIS GLOFA PLC Loader

CIMON-Xpanel 466

Comm.Port COM1
must select COM1 . When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is
type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug connector is used. If you use COM1
port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together, but you can use
only one type.
Baud rate 38,400
Parity None
Data bits 8 bits
Stop bits 1 bits
RTS/CTS OFF
Retry No. 3
the number of this.
Time Out 3 0
If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30
seconds.
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select
This item can be chosen only when you use Dial Up modem.


CIMON-Xpanel 468
you as DEV.ST .
Station Type GLOFA
Station No. 0
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Wiring Diagram


Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. You must connect using three
lines.
If you connect other lines it can make problems.
Device Memory range

27.14 LSIS XGT Cnet
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with LSIS GLOFA PLC using RS232C or
RS422/485.

Create a new
device
To configure the communication device of LSIS PLC, Select 'Tools' - 'I/O device' in the menu or
icon in tool-bar, and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then
click [new device] button. I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and
a device type as the following figure.

CIMON-Xpanel 470

to identify what equipments it is. The string XGTCNET of this item will be shown up in the
following XGTCNET.ST ( XGTCNET is a device name, and ST is a station name). And it
is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel project.
Select a device
type
Select a device type :' LSIS XGT/XGB Series PLC Cnet '


Comm.Port COM1
Select communication port to communicate. This example shows you
selecting COM1 port. If you want use other port select one in this combo
box.
Baud rate 38,400
Parity None
Data bits 8 bits
Stop bits 1 bits
CIMON-Xpanel 472
RTS/CTS OFF ( This example doesn t use RTS-CTS control.)
Comm. Type RS232
(To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232.
communication then select RS-485.)
Retry No. 3
the number of this.
Time Out 30
(If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30
seconds.. )
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select


you as XGTCNET.ST .
Station Type XGT Series
Station No. When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned different
other.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Parameter Setup : Network Manager

Run Network
Manager
Please run Network Manager from XGT Loader program and activate I/O configurations.
CIMON-Xpanel 474

Comm.Type RS232C
To Communicate by RS/232, configure Type to RS-232 at Channel 1.
When you use RS-422 communication select RS-422 or you use RS-
485 communication then select RS-485.
Speed 38,400
Data Bit 8
Stop Bit 1
Parity NONE
Modem type Null Modem
Modem
Initialization
Station No. 0
Station No. needed to distinguish when it communicate several PLC.
When field equipments number exceed over than 2, it assigned
different Station No. to divide. Station number must be same
configured in field equipments. It will not be communicated if the
Station No. different each other.
Delay time 0
Time out 1
Wiring Diagram


RS-232C
RS-422

CIMON-Xpanel 476
RS-485

When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with
RDA and RDB.
Device Memory range

Usable device memory range
Type Range Size (Word) Remark
P P0 P2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor
M M0 M2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor
L L0 L11263 11264 Read/Write/Monitor
K K0 K2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor
F F0 F2047 2048 Read/Monitor
T T0 T2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor
C C0 C2047 2048 Read/Write/Monitor
D D0 D32767 32768 Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUH)
D0 D19999 20000 Read/Write/Monitor (XGK-CPUS)
S S0 S127 128 Read/Write/Monitor
Error Code

Error Code Error type Error factors and contents
0003 Over block number It is block number bigger than 16 in the case of individual
Read/Write requesting.
0004 Variable length error Variable length is over than its max size 16.
0007 Data type error Receiving data is not included in X,B,W,D,L
0011 Data error The memory address that including the length of data is
incorrect
In the case of starting without %
In the case of variable value is incorrect.
When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.
0090 Monitor In the case of executing unregistered Monitor
0190 Monitor execution error In the case of the number exceeds register number limit
0290 Monitor registration error In the case of the number exceeds register number limit
1132 Device memory error In the case of not entering using device name or character
1232 Data size error In case of Read/Write requesting was over 60 Words
1234 Sufficient frame error Unnecessary contents exist
1332 Data type inconformity When it does doing each case of Read/Write, if the data type
of each block was dislike then it will be happen.
7132 permitted range of variable
over Error
Over requesting through each device supports memory
range.
27.15 LSIS XGT Enet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and LSIS XGT
series PLCs via Ethernet protocol.
Following communication module can be connected with this driver.
XGL-EFMT ( Fast Ethernet)

CIMON-Xpanel 478
Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
For creating a new device activate the menu 'Tools' -> 'I/O Devices' or icon in tool-bar.

database
accompanied by the 'Station Name'.
Sel
ect
a
net
wo
rk
typ
e
Select a network type: ' LSIS XGT Series FEnet '
After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box will

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as 'LSIS XGT Series FEnet' and appropriate communication
parameters.
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
Move to the 'Station' tab of 'Ethernet Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all
the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be
configured with following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 480

accompanied with the 'Device Name'.
Station Type Choose the XGL-EFMT . (No other type can be selected.)
Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignored in runtime)
IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted a decimal format
Socket Port No. The socket number should be configured as 2005 for UDP and 2004 for TCP.
Please verify your configuration (UDP or TCP) in "Communication Port" setup
tab.
n UDP/IP Port : 2005
n TCP/IP Port : 2004
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Fixed XPANEL
Socket Port /
XPANEL Socket
If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in 'XPANEL
Socket Port No.' field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change
the port at every TCP connection or communication error.
Port No. This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management
ways of PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that
case, this option can be a help.
The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because,
there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant
on the specification of PLC and engineer's experience.
The default setting of this option is unchecked state.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Communication Setup : XG5000

Following picture shows the screen shot of 'Network Manager' of XG5000 programming tool.
This window can be activated by the menu of 'Tool-Network Manager'.

CIMON-Xpanel 482

IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format. This address has to be
registered in the device configurationof XPanelDesigner as described before.
Subnet mask,
Gateway
Give the appropriate values which are provided by network administrator of your
system.
DHCP Do not use this option.The XPanel supports fixedIP address device only.
Driver Choose the XGT server .
Address Notation

The address of TAG in XPanel has the following format.
Analog [Symbol][Address] D064
Digital [Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or [Symbol][Address][Bit
Number]
M012.A or M012A
Address : decimal number (0..65535)
Bit Number : hexa-decimal number (0..F)
Followingtable shows the list of devices which can be referencedin XPanel database.
Symbol Description Range
(Word)
Word
Notation
Bit
Notation
Type Access
P I/O Relay 2048 P123 P123A Bit/Word R/W
M Auxiliary Relay 2048 M123 M123A Bit/Word R/W
L Link Relay 11264 L123 L123A Bit/Word R/W
K Keep Relay 8192 K123 K123A Bit/Word R/W
F Special Relay 2048 F123 F123A Bit/Word R
T Timer (CV) 2048 T123 - Word R/W
C Counter (CV) 2048 C123 - Word R/W
D Data Reg 32768 D123 D123.A
(1)
Bit/Word R/W
N Comm. Data
Reg
28763 N123 N123.A
(1)
Bit/Word R/W
(1) When a D or N register was referenced by a digital TAG with bit notation, it cannot be
written. (Read only)
Support Function Table

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by LSIS XGT Series Ethernet
communication driver.
Function Support Remark
Block Data Read O
Block Data Write O
String real Tag O
Word Swap X
Dword Swap X
CIMON-Xpanel 484
Block Data
Re
ad
This functionmakes it possiblethat is bulk data readingat a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the
Xpanel.
Block Data
Wr
ite
This functionmakes it possiblethat is bulk data writingat a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the
Xpanel.
String real Tag It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate
string data of
Xpanel with PLC.
Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. It
depends upon 16Bit
Data Swap configuration.
Dword Swap This functionswaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon
32Bit Data Swap
configuration.
27.16 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Loader
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and LSIS Master-
K S Series Loader.

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name .
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Loader
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration dialog box will be
CIMON-Xpanel 486

In this window, select the Device Type as LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Loader and appropriate
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device s configuration.
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configured with
following rules.

Station Name
Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window accompanied
with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the S Series . (Another type can t be selected.)
Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (Ignored in runtime)
Station No. This number must be matched with the one of PLC.
CIMON-Xpanel 488
CheckSum This field has no meaning in this driver.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message at
Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error.
Address Notation

Symbol Range Size Access
P P0 - P63F 64 R/W
M M0 - M203F 192 R/W
L L0 - L63F 64 R/W
K K0 - K31F 32 R/W
F F0 - F63F 64 R
T T0 - T256 256 R/W
C C0 -C256 256 R/W
D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W
S S0 - S99 100 R/W
Refer the upper table for available device range.
If you use P,M,L,K,F device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and else
number decimal.
If you use P,M,L,K,F device by analog tag, all number is decimal.

RS-232C wiring
27.17 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Cnet
K H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
CIMON-Xpanel 490

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the Station Name .
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet

In this window, select the Device Type as LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Cnet and appropriate
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 492

Station Name
Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
Station Type Choose the S Series . (Another type can t be selected.)
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up
Communication Setup : Frame Editor
Configure communication card setting by LSIS Cnet Frame Editor.
Option -> Port : Select proper PC s port to connect loader.
CIMON-Xpanel 494
Online -> Connect
Online -> Read : Read configurations from communication card.
Onlie -> Write : Change the configurations for communication and download changed configurations.
Refer the manual for more details.
Address Notation

P P0 - P63F 64 R/W
M M0 - M203F 192 R/W
L L0 - L63F 64 R/W
K K0 - K31F 32 R/W
F F0 - F63F 64 R
T T0 - T256 256 R/W
C C0 -C256 256 R/W
D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W
S S0 - S99 100 R/W
If you use P,M,L,K,F device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and
else number decimal.

RS-232C wiring
RS-422 wiring
Use terminal resistance by 330.
For stable communication, connect SG and use STP cable and surely earth the
shield.
RS-485 wiring
If you use RS-485, don t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.
shield.
27.18 LSIS Master-K H Series PLC Cnet
K H Series through RS232 or RS422/485.
CIMON-Xpanel 496

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e

I/O Device Name
the Station Name .
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet

In this window, select the Device Type as LSIS Master-K H-Series PLC Cnet and appropriate
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 498

Station Name
Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database window
Station Type Choose the Master-K 500/1000 . (Another type can t be selected.)
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification message
Master-K 500/1000 DIP SWITCH Configuration
*If communication type is RS-485, configure baud rate by loader.
Address Notation

P P0 - P63F 64 R/W
CIMON-Xpanel 500
M M0 - M203F 192 R/W
L L0 - L63F 64 R/W
K K0 - K31F 32 R/W
F F0 - F63F 64 R
T T0 - T256 256 R/W
C C0 -C256 256 R/W
D D0 -D9999 10000 R/W
S S0 - S99 100 R/W
If you use P,M,L,K,F device by digital tag, the lowest position number is hexadecimal and
else number decimal.

RS-232C wiring
RS-422 wiring
shield.
RS-485 wiring
If you use RS-485, don t connect RDA & RDB but SDA & SDB at Xpanel.
shield.
27.19 LSIS Master-K S Series PLC Enet
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and CIMON-
PLC.
Following module is able to communicate with this driver.


Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
CIMON-Xpanel 502

I/O Device Name
Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name .
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Ethernet

In this window, select the Device Type as LSIS Master-K S-Series PLC Enet and appropriate
communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Protocol type must be selected by
UDP .
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
Move to the Station tab of Ehternetl Communication Configuration dialog box. In this dialog box, all the
following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 504

Station Name
with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the Master-K S . (You can t select any other type.)
IP Address Input PLC s IP by decimal number and point for connection.
Socket Port No. If you want to use UDP, port number is 2005 else TCP, port number is 2004.
Go to Communication Port and confirm the protocol. (UDP or TCP)
Fixed XPANEL
Socket Port
If you select this option, XPanel use only one port to connect PLC defined by Xpanel
Socket Port No. If it is not, Xpanel will change the port no. when it occurs
communication error.
This option makes XPanel to handle various port management methods. Several PLC has
restriction about TCP service number. In that case, this option will help.
We can t mention all about this option this time. Because, too many PLC beings this
world and response of PLC totally depended from PLC manual and engineer s
experience.
This option is unchecked by default.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up
Otherwise(unchecked), XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only
when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds
after.
Communication Setup : Frame Editor
Following picture shows frame editor for configure of Master K Ethernet module.
CIMON-Xpanel 506

Edit -> Basic Parameters

IP Address
Input PLC s IP address by decimal number and point. It is must be same previous
set at XPanelDesigner s I/O device configuration.
Subnet Mask,
Gateway
Input the proper value offered from system network manager.
Input same value with Xpanel.
DNS Server
Input the proper value offered from system network manager.
Address Notation

Following table shows address notation at XPanel.
TYPE FORM Example
Analog [Symbol][Address] D064
Digital
[Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or
[Symbol][Address][Bit Number]
M012.A or
M012A
Address : Decimal (0..65535)
CIMON-Xpanel 508
Bit Number : Hex (0..F)
Following table shows referable device list by XPanel.
Symbol Description Range
(word)
Word
Notation
Bit
Notation
Type Read Write
P I/O Relay 1024 P23 P23A Bit/Word R/W
M Auxiliary Relay 3072 M23 M23A Bit/Word R/W
L Link Relay 1024 L23 L23A Bit/Word R/W
K Keep Relay 512 K23 K23A Bit/Word R/W
F Special Relay 1024 F23 F23A Bit/Word R
T Timer (CV) 256 T123 - Word R/W
C Counter (CV) 256 C123 - Word R/W
D Data Reg 10000 D123 D123.A
(1)
Bit/Word R/W
S Special Reg. 100 S123 S123.A
(1)
Bit/Word R/W
(1) If register as D or S is used by BIT, it can t use write but only read.

Next table shows the available functions from the LSIS Master-K S-Series Enet communication driver.
Block Data Read O
Block Data Write O
String real Tag O
Word Swap X
Dword Swap X
Block Data
Read
This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time. It will be
applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
Block Data
Write
This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time. It will be applied
when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
String real Tag
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string
data of Xpanel with PLC.
Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. It depends upon
16Bit Data Swap configuration.
Dword Swap
This function swaps words of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit
Data Swap configuration.
27.20 LSIS Inverter Starvert
This driver can communicate with iP5A and iV5 inverters from LSIS via its dedicated protocol.
Communication Setup : (iP5A example)

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as notedat inverter side.
[Inverter Setting Example]

Parameter
Number
Set Value Description
DRV_03 Int. 485 Drive mode
DRV_04 Int. 485 Frequency control mode
I/O_90 1 Station number (1 .. 250)
I/O_91 9600 Communicationspeed (19200, 9600 or 4800 recommended)

Create
a new
Device
For creatinga new device activate the menu Tools - > I/ODevices or icon in tool-bar.
Following picture shows the first step of creatinga new device.
CIMON-Xpanel 510

I/O Device Name: Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device type: ' LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series '
popped up as
shown in following picture.
In this window, select the DeviceType as LSIS INVERTER Starvert Series and configurethe proper serial

communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the inverter configuration.
All communicationparameters except baudrateare fixedas : no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit.

Create
a
station
In this dialog box, all the connectedinverter stations can be configuredand registered to the XPanel.
Each field can be configuredwith followingrules.
CIMON-Xpanel 512
Name .
Station Type Choose one of two inverter models ( iP5A and iV5 ).
Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksu
m
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message
at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the
message at data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value
to the station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will
be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.

Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][HexadecimalNumber] M0006
Digital [Symbol][Hexadecimal Number][.][DecimalNumber] M0006.12
Symbol Address Description
M 0000 002C CommunicationMemory Area
R 0500 051B Reference Data Memory Area (Not supportedin iP5A model)
P 9100 - 9800 Parameter Memory Area
For more informationof each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.

27.21 MITSUBISHI Inverter FR-E500

This driver can communicate with the FR-E510/520/540 inverter series from Mitsubishi.
CIMON-Xpanel 514

Xpanel Setting Example

For normal communication, following parameter must be set as noted at inverter side.
CR/LF instruction presence/absence (Pr. 124) :Mode 2 (with CR/LF)
Comm. response waiting time (Pr. 123) :9999 (use the waiting time data)

Inverter Setting Example

1171 0 Station number 0. (any number between 0 to 31)
1181 192 19200 bps
1191 0 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
1201 0 No parity
121 9999 Don t use the communication retry
122 9999 Don t use the communication timeout
1232 9999 Response delay is dependent on the received frame.
1242 2 Use CR/LF terminator
(Note 1)Those parameters (117 to 120) must be matched with the settings of Xpanel.
(Note 2)The parameters of 123 and 124 must be set as the value shown in this example. If those
parameters were set as other values,
Xpanel can not communicate with the inverter.
Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][Decimal Number] P023
Digital [Symbol][Decimal Number][.][Hexadecimal Number] B022.F
Symbol Address Description Inst. (R) Inst. (W) Access
P 000 - 999 Parameter Area H00 H63 H80 HE3 R/W
D
008 Second Parameter H6C HEC
R/W
009 RAM Set Frequency H6D HED
010 EEPROM Set Frequency H6E HEE
023 Operation Mode H7B HFB
027 Link Parameter H7F HFF
B 011 Output Frequency (Speed) H6F R
012 Output Current H70
013 Output Voltage H71
016 Recent Alarm H74
017 H75
018 H76
019 H77
022 Inverter Status (Bit mapped) H7A
CIMON-Xpanel 516
C
016 Alarm Definition Batch Clear HF4
W
022 Run Command (Bit mapped) HFA
024 All Parameter Clear HFC
025 Inverter Reset HFD
For more information of each point, please refer to the manual of inverter.

27.22 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU)

This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel using MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C protocol
communication with
ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU using RS232C or RS422/485.


Create a new
Device
To configure the communication device of Melsec 1C (ACPU, AnA/AnU CPU) PLC, Select
'Tools - I/O device' in the
menu or icon in tool-bar, and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up.
And then click [new device] button. I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a
device name and a device type as the following figure.

I/O Device Name MEL
In the case there are various kinds of field equipments, Type device
CIMON-Xpanel 518
name to identify what equipments it is. The string MEL of this item will
be shown up in the selection list of I/O device when you register a tag.
Xpanel can communicate with various kinds of equipment
simultaneously connected by identifying equipment by its name. The
value which is saved as a tag is the compound string of a device name
and station name as following MEL.ST ( DEV is a device name, and
ST" is a station name). And it is used as a unique identifier in Xpanel
project.
I/O Device
Selection
Serial device
You can select field equipment and a communication type. Select one
according to the communication method of the selected device.
Select a device
type
I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU) '
You can select communication device which is connected to Xpanel. This example shows you
selecting MITSUBISHI Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU CPU) . But if you want to use ACPU, select
MITSUBISHI 1C (ACPU).


Comm.Port COM1
This example uses COM1 port. If you want use other ports, select one in
the combo box.
Baud rate 19, 200
CIMON-Xpanel 520
Parity None
Data bits 8 Bits
Stop bits 1 Bits
RTS/CTS ON
This example uses RTS-CTS control always ON doing.
Comm. Type RS232
This example selects S232 communication.
communication then select RS-485.
Retry No. 3
the number of this.
Time Out 30
If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30
seconds.
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select
Station] button
then you can see Station Dialog Box popped up. Please configuration as the following
contents then click OK button.

Station Name ST
you as DEV.ST .
Station Type AnA / AnU
Station No. 0
other.
Socket Port
No.
2005
The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004,
UDP 2005.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data
receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message box
will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Configuration of PLC Communication module : AJ71UC24

According to the following explain, configure communication module. If you want more details or not
included contents in this manual,
refer to module manuals.

Mode
Configuration
Xpanel communicate with PLC using A compatible 1C Frame . You can choose one of
the protocols using Mode setting switch. If you use RS-232, configure the switch as 1
CIMON-Xpanel 522
Switch or you use RS-422/485 configure the switch as 5.
When RS-232 and RS-422/485 is used at the same time, configure switch as A.
Station No.
Configuration
Switch
Station number must same of Xpanel Station No. Above configuration of the Xpanel
station number is 0.
Both x10 and x1, configure as 0.
Communication
Configuration
Switch
Communication configuration switch configure as the following figure.
switc
h
configuration Configure state
OFF ON
SW1
1
Main channel RS-232C RS-422
SW1
2
Data Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit
SW1
3
Baud rate Refer to the follows
SW1
4
SW1
5
SW1
6
Parity Using OFF ON
SW1
7
Even/Odd Parity Odd Even
SW1
8
Stop Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit

SW2
1
Sum check OFF ON
SW2
2
RUN Write impossible possible
SW2
3
Computer Link /
Multi-drop Link
Multi-drop Computer
Link
SW2
4
Not being Being
Baud rate configuration
Baud rate
(bps)
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
SW13 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
SW14 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
SW15 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
If all configurations were ended, reboot the PLC and then apply changed
configurations.
Wiring Diagram

RS-232C

RS-422

To improve stability of communication it should connect SG and use STP cable. But
shielded cables must be earthed.
RS-485

When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connects with SDA and SDB but disconnect with
CIMON-Xpanel 524
RDA and RDB.
Device Memory range

Device Symbol
I/O Device
Type Bit/Word
Melsec 1C (ACPU) Melsec 1C (AnA/AnU)
Input X X0000-X07FF X000000-X001FFF Hex Bit
Output Y Y0000-Y07FF Y000000-Y001FFF Hex Bit
Internal Relay M M0000-M2047 M000000-M008191 Decimal Bit
Latch Relay L L0000-L2047 M000000-M008191 Decimal Bit
Step Relay S S0000-S2047 S000000-S008191 Decimal Bit
Link Relay B B0000-B03FF B000000-B001FFF Hex Bit
annanciator F F0000-M0255 F000000-F002047 Decimal Bit
special Relay M M9000-M9255 M009000-M009255 Decimal Bit
special register D D9000-D9255 D9000-D9255 Decimal Word
Timer (point) T TS000-TS255 TS00000-TS02047 Decimal Word
Timer (coil) T TC000-TC255 TC00000-TC02047 Decimal Word
Timer(present value) T TN000-TN255 TN00000-TN02047 Decimal Word
counter (point) C CS000-CS255 CS00000-CS01023 Decimal Word
counter (coil) C CC000-CC255 CC00000-CC01023 Decimal Word
counter (present value) C CN000-CN255 CN00000-CN01023 Decimal Word
data register D D0000-D1023 D000000-D08191 Decimal Word
Link register W W0000-W03FF W000000-W001FFF Hex Word
File register R R0000-R8191 R000000-R008191 Decimal Word

Usable device ranges are described above figure. You must use device in the allowable range. Note that
Input(X) and output(Y) are Hexadecimal.
Error Code

Error
Code
Error type Error contents Solution
00H Impossible on RUN Even if it is forbade writing on
Run, it receive writing commend
Change the configuration of On Run
writable.
01H Parity error Parity bit wrong Change the configuration of
Parity bit.
02H Sum-check error Uncorrected Sum-check Check the wiring of the communication
03H Protocol error Receiving uncorrected
statement that is violate control
order of the protocol.
Confirm the opponent equipment s
transfer statement and communicate
after modifying.
04H Framing error Uncorrected stop-bit
configuration
Change the configuration of Stop-bit
05H Over-run error In the case of it receive data
before the previous data
receiving ended
Down the Baud rate and then try
communication again.
06H Character part error Assignment method error of
statement
In the case of receiving not
existed command
In the case of exceeding
allowable range
In the case of assigned not
existing device
Check the device range
07H Character error In the case of receiving data
which it cannot use
after modifying.
08H PLC access error Cannot communication CPU Substitute CPU as the useable
10H PLC number error PLC number is not FF or
configured station number of
network parameter.
after modifying.
11H Mode error Error detection with PLC CPU Substitute CPU as the useable
12H Special function
module assignment
error
Special function module is not
existed in assigned location.
after modifying.
21H Special function
module bus error
Access error to the special
module detected in assigned
According to the correspondent module
manual, detect error and solute the
CIMON-Xpanel 526
location problem as indicated.
27.23 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(Q/QnA)
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2

Create a new
Device

of database
Select a device
type
I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Ethernet Communication Configuration
dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E and configure the proper
Ethernet
communication parameters.
Each field can
be configured with following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 528

Station Type Choose the MELSEC . (No other type can be selected.)
IP Address Give the IP address of PLC with dotted decimal format.
Socket Port
Number
Give the port number opened by the PLC.The default value of this field is
5000.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Fixed XPANEL
Socket
Port / XPANEL
Socket
Port No.
If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in XPANEL
Socket Port No. field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change
This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management
there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely
dependant on the specification of PLC and engineer s experience.
Address Notation

Type Format Example
10 [Symbol][Address in decimal number] D0012
16 [Symbol][Address in hexa-decimal number] X01FC
Memory Area Symbol I/O Address Range Notation Bit/Word
Input Relay X X000000-X001FFF 16 Bit
Output Relay Y Y000000-Y001FFF 16 Bit
Internal Relay M M000000-M008191 10 Bit
M M009000-M009255 10 Bit
Latch Relay L L000000-L008191 10 Bit
Step Relay S S000000-S008191 10 Bit
Link Relay B B000000-B001FFF 16 Bit
Annunciator F F000000-F002047 10 Bit
Timer Contact TS TS00000-TS02047 10 Word
Timer Coil TC TC00000-TC02047 10 Word
Timer Current Value TN TN00000-TN02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Contact SS SS00000-SS02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Coil SC SC00000-SC02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Current Value SN SN00000-SN02047 10 Word
CIMON-Xpanel 530
Counter Contact CS CS00000-CS01023 10 Word
Counter Coil CC CC00000-CC01023 10 Word
Counter Current Value CN CN00000-CN01023 10 Word
Data Register D D000000-D08191 10 Word
D D9000-D9255 10 Word
Link Register W W000000-W001FFF 16 Word
File Register R R000000-R008191 10 Word

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

27.24 MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E

This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC A or Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses binary code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.
AJ71E71
This communicationmodule can be used to access data of ACPU.
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2
These communicationmodules can be used to access data of QCPU and QnACPU.

Create a new
Device
CIMON-Xpanel 532

I/O Device Name: Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
Select a device
type
I/O Device Type: MITSUBISHI Melsec 1E
dialog box will be

In this window, select the DeviceType as MITSUBISHI MELSEC 1E and configurethe proper
Ethernet communicationparameters.
In this dialog box, all the connectedPLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel. Each field can be configuredwith followingrules.
CIMON-Xpanel 534

accompanied
with the DeviceName
Station Type MELSEC
Socket Port
Number
Give the port number opened by the PLC. The default value of this field
is 5000.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error
notificationmessage at
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit
(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is
popped up.
This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Fixed XPANEL
Socket Port /
XPANEL Socket
Port No.
If this option was checked, XPanel will use only one port defined in
XPANEL Socket
Port No. field for connectionwith PLC.
Otherwise, XPanel will change the port at every TCP connection or
communicationerror.
This option is provided for XPanel to deal with various TCP port
management ways of
PLC. Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that
case, this option can
be a help. The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described
here.
Because, there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is
entirely
dependant on the specificationof PLC and engineer s experience.
The default setting of this optionis unchecked state.
Address Notation

Type Format Example
10
[Symbol][Addressin decimal number]
D0012
16
[Symbol][Addressin hexa-decimal number]
X01FC
Following table shows the list of devices which can be referencedin XPanel database.
Input Relay X X000000-X001FFF 16
Bit
Output Relay Y Y000000-Y001FFF 16
Bit
Internal Relay M M000000-M008191 10
Bit
CIMON-Xpanel 536
Annunciator F F000000-F002047 10
Bit
Timer Contact TS TS00000-TS02047 10
Word
Timer Coil TC TC00000-TC02047 10
Word
Timer Current Value TN TN00000-TN02047 10
Word
Counter Contact CS CS00000-CS01023 10
Word
Counter Coil CC CC00000-CC01023 10
Word
Counter Current Value CN CN00000-CN01023 10
Word
Data Register D D000000-D12286 10
Word
Link Register W W000000-W001FFF 16
Word
File Register R R000000-R008191 10
Word

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

27.25 MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E ASCII
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Mitsubishi
MELSEC Q Series PLCs.
This protocol uses the ASCII code. It supports the following families of MELSEC PLCs Ethernet modules.
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2

Create a new
Device
CIMON-Xpanel 538

of database
Select a device
type
I/O Device type : MITSUBISHI Melsec 3E(ASCII)
dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.


In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI MELSEC 3E (ASCII) and configure
the proper Ethernet
[Note]
The ASCII communication of MELSEC is seviced with TCP/IP protocol suit only. Do not choose the
"UDP"
protocol in above dialog box.
Each field can
be configured with following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 540

Station Type Choose the MELSEC . (No other type can be selected.)
Socket Port
Number
Give the port number opened by the PLC.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
Fixed XPANEL
Socket
Port / XPANEL
Socket
Port No.
If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in XPANEL
Socket Port No. field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanel will change
This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management
there are too many kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely
dependant on the specification of PLC and engineer s experience.
Address Notation

Type Format Example
10 [Symbol][Address in decimal number] D0012
16 [Symbol][Address in hexa-decimal number] X01FC
M M009000-M009255 10 Bit
Step Relay S S000000-S008191 10 Bit
Timer Contact TS TS00000-TS02047 10 Word
Timer Coil TC TC00000-TC02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Contact SS SS00000-SS02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Coil SC SC00000-SC02047 10 Word
Retentive Timer Current Value SN SN00000-SN02047 10 Word
CIMON-Xpanel 542
Counter Contact CS CS00000-CS01023 10 Word
Counter Coil CC CC00000-CC01023 10 Word
D D9000-D9255 10 Word
File Register R R000000-R008191 10 Word

Connect
through the
Ethernet HUB

Direct
connection

27.26 MITSUBISHI Melsec A Series (Programming Port)
This driver supports the communication with MELSEC A series PLCs through the programming port (loader
port).

Create
a new
Device
CIMON-Xpanel 544

of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device Type : MITSUBISHI Melsec A Loader
be popped

In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI MELSEC A Loader and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. The communication parameters must be configured as
followings : (no other configuration is allowed)
Create
a
station
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel.
Each field
can be configured with following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 546

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC CPU. One of two CPUs can be chosen.
(AnS or AnA)
Station No. This field has no effect.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the check-
sum.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up

Memory Area Symbol CPU Notation Bit/Word
Input Relay X X0000-X07FF 16 Bit
Output Relay Y Y0000-Y07FF 16 Bit
M M9000-M9255 10 Bit
Timer Contact TS TS0000-TS2047 10 Bit
Timer Coil TC TC0000-TC2047 10 Bit
Counter Contact CS CS0000-CS1023 10 Bit
Counter Coil CC CC0000-CC1023 10 Bit
Above memory table is based on the AnA CPUs. Actual boundaries of each device memory are dependent on
the type of CPU connected.
CIMON-Xpanel 548
Wiring Diagram

[ RS232C ]
Use the standard programming tool cable supplied by PLC manufacturer or their partner company. Please
refer to the GX Developer operating manual for more information about cable/converter. This driver cannot
communicate with a commonly used RS232C or RS422/485 cable.
XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

27.27 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through RS232C/422A port.
The implemented protocol in this driver is the dedicated protocol of FX and uses the control
protocol format 1 .


Create a new
Device
For creating a new device activate the menu Tools - > I/O Devices or icon in
tool-bar. Following picture
shows the first step of creating a new device.

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG
configuration window of database
Select a device
type
I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX '
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication
Configuration dialog box will be
CIMON-Xpanel 550

In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI Melsec FX and configure
the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC
configuration.

Create a station Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. In this
dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel.

Station Name Give a name to the PLC. This name will be used in the database
window accompanied with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the FX .
Station No. 0
Specify a decimal number between 0 and 15. This number must be
matched with the number in the special data register D8121 of FX
PLC.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect. This communication driver always checks the
check-sum.
Comm. Error
Message
Pop Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error
notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise
(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
CIMON-Xpanel 552
station) error, the notification message is popped up. This message
box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Communication Setup : MELSEC FX PLC

Typically, the configuration of PLC side is performed by the GX Developer .
For normal communication with Xpanel, following parameters must be set as noted.

Protocol Dedicated Protocol
Format Protocol Format 1
Sum Check Enable

Memory CPU Format Bit/Word
FX0n FX,FX2c FX2n
Input X X0000-X0177 X0000-X0337 X0000-X0267 Octal Bit
Output Y Y0000-Y0177 Y0000-Y0337 Y0000-Y0267 Octal Bit
Aux Relay M M0000-M0511 M0000-M1535 M0000-M3071 Decimal Bit
Special Relay M M8000-M8254 M8000-M8255 M8000-M8255 Decimal Bit
Status Relay S S0000-S0127 S0000-S0999 S0000-S0999 Decimal Bit
Data Register D D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 Decimal Word
Timer TN TN000-TN063 TN000-TN255 TN000-TN255 Decimal Word
Counter CN CN000-CN254 CN000-CN255 CN000-CN255 Decimal Word

Wiring Diagram

RS-232C

RS-422

RS-485

27.28 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Series (Programming Port)

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC FX series PLCs through the programming port
(loader port).

CIMON-Xpanel 554

Create
a new
Device
Following picture

of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec FX Loader '

In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX Loader and configure the
proper serial
communication parameters. The programming port of FX PLC uses fixed communication
parameters.
Ensure that communication parameters are configured as followings.

CIMON-Xpanel 556
Baud rate 9,600 bps
Parity None
Data bits 8 Bits
Stop bits 1 Bits
RS422A
Channel
RS422A Channel( COM1)
Create
a
station
Each field can be configured with following rules

Station Type Select the FX Loader type. No other items can be chosen.
Station No. This field has no effect in this communication driver. Only one PLC can be
connected through the programming port driver. Therefore, there is no need
to use station number.
Socket Port No. 2005
The exclusive use of GLOFA Enet supporting socket number is TCP 2004, UDP
2005.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
These fields have no effect. And this communication driver always checks the
check-sum.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up

Memory Sym CPU Format Data
FX0n FX,FX2c FX2n
Input X X0000-X0177 X0000-X0337 X0000-X0267 Octal Bit
Output Y Y0000-Y0177 Y0000-Y0337 Y0000-Y0267 Octal Bit
Aux Relay M M0000-M0511 M0000-M1535 M0000-M3071 Decimal Bit
CIMON-Xpanel 558
Special Relay M M8000-M8254 M8000-M8255 M8000-M8255 Decimal Bit
Timer (Contact) T T000-T063 T000-T255 T000-T255 Decimal Bit
Counter (Contact) C C000-C254 C000-C255 C000-C255 Decimal Bit
Status Relay S S0000-S0127 S0000-S0999 S0000-S0999 Decimal Bit
Data Register D D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 D0000-D8255 Decimal Word
Timer (Cur-value) TN TN000-TN063 TN000-TN255 TN000-TN255 Decimal Word
Counter (Cur-value) CN CN000-CN254 CN000-CN255 CN000-CN255 Decimal Word
Wiring Diagram

RS
42
2A

27.29 MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Series (Programming Port)

This driver supports the communication with MELSEC Q series PLCs through the programming port (loader
port).

Communication Setup : PLC (GX Developer)

Following configuration is needed in PLC side.
This can be done at the "PLC Parameter-Serial" setup window of GX Developer as shown in the following
picture.
1) Check and made enable the "Use serial communication" Option.
2) Configure the communication speed. This configuration must be matched with the one of Xpanel's
configuration.
3) Configure the "Sum check" option. This option must be matched with the one of Xpanel's configuration.
4) Set "Transmission wait Time" as appropriate value. Typically this item is set as "No waiting Time".
5) Check and make enable the "RUN while setting : Permit" option which makes it possible for the
operator to control the value of PLC with Xpanel.
6) Aware that PLC parameters are applied only after the cold restart of PLC system.
This Communication driver was tested with Q00 CPU.
Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H CPU
These CPUs do not have special configuration items for loader port communication.
This Communication driver was tested with Q12H CPU.
CIMON-Xpanel 560

Create
a new
Device
Following picture

of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device Type : ' MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader(Q00/01), MITSUBISHI Melsec Q Loader
(Q02/06/12/25) '
box will be popped up. Proceed the further configuration according to the type of PLC CPU. Please
notice that the communication parameter combination shown in the following box is the only one
allowed in Q series CPU programming port. (Regardless of the type of CPU, no other configuration
is allowed.)
Parity : Odd
Data Bits : 8 Bits
Stop Bit : 1 Bit
Q00CPU / Q01CPU
If the connecting CPU type is Q00 or Q01, then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader
(Q00/ Q01)' device type.
Q2(H) / Q6H / Q12H / Q25H
If the connecting CPU type is Q02(H), Q06H, Q12H or Q25H,
CIMON-Xpanel 562
then select the 'MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q Loader (Q02/Q06/Q12/Q25)' device type.
Create
a
station
Each field can be configured with following rules

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC CPU.
[Note]
If the connecting CPU is Q01CPU, then choose "Q00CPU". These two CPUs
have no difference in Xpanel communication driver.
CIMON-Xpanel 564
Station No. Specify the station number in decimal form (0..254). This number has no
meaning in peer to peer communication. Usually, this station number is
configured as zero(0).
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
This configuration should be matched with the same configuration item of
PLC CPU. Ensure that this option is checked with the same status in both
side. (Verify the check status of "Sum Check" item of GX Developer.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up

Q00CPU / Q01CPU
Memory Area Symbol Range Notation Bit / Word
Input Relay X X0000-X07FF 16 Bit
Output Relay Y Y0000-Y07FF 16 Bit
SM SM0000-SM1023 10 Bit
Link Relay B B0000-B07FF 16 Bit
SB SB0000-SB07FF 16 Bit
Edge Relay V V0000-V1023 10 Bit
Timer Contact TS TS0000-TS0511 10 Bit
Timer Clear TC TC0000-TC0511 10 Bit
Counter Contact CS CS0000-CS0511 10 Bit
Data Register
D
D00000-D11135 10 Word
SD
SD0000-SD1023 10 Word
Lin Register
W W0000-W07FF 16 Word
SW SW0000-SW03FF 16 Word
Q02(H) / Q06H / Q12H / Q25H
Memory Area Symbol Range Notation Bit / Word
SM SM0000-SM1023 10 Bit
Edge Relay V V0000-V2047 10 Bit
Timer Clear TC TC0000-TC2047 10 Bit
Data Register
D D00000-D12287 10 Word
SD SD0000-SD2047 10 Word
Lin Register
W W0000-W1FFF 16 Word
SW SW0000-SW07FF 16 Word
Wiring Diapram

RS
23
2C

CIMON-Xpanel 566
27.30 MITSUBISHI Melsec FX2N-10/20GM(Programming Port)
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and Melsec FX2N-
10/20GM PLCs.

Create a new
Setup

I/O Device Name: Give a device name.
This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name .
Select a
network type
I/O Device Name: MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2N-10/20GM Loader
box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the Device Type as MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2N-10/20GM and
appropriate
communication parameters. Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.
Communication parameters should be configuredas shown in the following table.
Baud Rate 9600
Parity Even
CIMON-Xpanel 568
Data Bits 8 Bits
Stop Bits 1Bits
Comm.Type RS422
Create a station Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. In this dialog box,
all the connected
PLC stations can be configuredand registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configuredwith
following rules.

This name will be used in the database window accompaniedwith the
DeviceName .
Station Type Choose the FX2N-10/20GM . (No other type can be selected.)
Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignoredin runtime)
CIMON-Xpanel 570
Using
Checksum
This field has no meaning in this driver.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error
notificationmessage
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
automatically
Address Notation

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database. .
Sym
bol
Memory Analog Tag Digital Tag Format Data
10GM 20GM 10GM 20GM
M Aux Relay - - M000-M511 M000-M511 Dec Bit
SM Special
Relay
- - SM0000-
SM0175
SM0000-
SM0175
Dec Bit
X Input - - X000-X003
X375-X377
X000-X067
X372-X377
Oct Bit
Y Output - - Y000-Y005 Y000-Y067 Oct Bit
D Data
Register
D000-D1999 D000-D3999 - - Dec Word
SD Special data
register
SD000-
SD0313
SD000-
SD0599
- - Dec Word
V - V000-V007 V000-V007 - - Dec Word
Z - Z000-Z007 Z000-Z007 - - Dec Dword
* SM address matches originally to M address based on M9000 at PLC, also SD matches D
address based on D9000.

27.31 MODBUS RTU protocl
This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the RTU mode
of the MODBUS protocol.

Create a new
Device
CIMON-Xpanel 572

I/O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration
window of database
Select a device
type
I/O Device Type : MODBUS RTU Protocol
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration
dialog box will be popped


In this window, select the Device Type as MODBUS RTU Protocol and configure the
proper serial communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the
device s configuration.
Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 574

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the Modbus RTU .
16Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data. Following
diagram shows an example of byte swapping.
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except
INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram
shows an example of word swapping.
NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
influenced by this option.
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect. This MODBUS driver always checking the BCC.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error
notification message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked),
Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only when
there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the
Address & Function Codes

Following table shows the list of valid address range and used MODBUS function codes for each address
area.
The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows
the symbol character.
Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Read Write
Coil 0 000001 - 029999 (1) 1 5
Input 1 100001 - 129999 2
Holding Register 4 400001 - 429999 3 6, 16 (2)
Input Register 3 300001 - 329999 4
1) The symbol character does not have the number property. For example, 400100 and 4100 designate the same
memory area (Holding register 100).
2) The code 16 is issued when a double word write or the recipe write function is activated. A single word write
uses the code 6.
The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and
range of each area should be
checked with the manual of connecting device. The Read / Write columns show the used MODBUS function
codes in this communication driver.
CIMON-Xpanel 576

XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for
signal description.
In case of the RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment. Typically RD, TD
and SG pins are enough to
communicate with general MODBUS device.
27.32 MODBUS TCP protocl
This document describes the MODBUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver supports the TCP mode
of the MODBUS protocol.

Create
a new
Device

of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device Type : MODBUS TCP Protocol
box will be

CIMON-Xpanel 578

In this window, select the Device Type as MODBUS TCP and configure the proper ehternet
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device s
configuration.
Create
a
station
Move to the Station tab of Ethernet Communication Configuration dialog box.
Xpanel.

Station Type Choose the type of connected PLC among the Modbus TCP .
Network ID Sum of MODBUS/TCP devices here its own station number.
Socket Port No The socket number should be configured as 502. This port number is
dedicated for MODBUS/TCP.
16Bit Data
Swap
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /
UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram
shows an example of word swapping.
NT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect.This MODBUS driver always checkingthe BCC.
Comm. Error If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification
CIMON-Xpanel 580
Message Pop
Up
message at every Rx and Tx error. Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does
not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data
transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message
is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5
seconds after.

Following table shows the list of valid address range and used MODBUS function codes for each address
area.
The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows
Area Symbol Analog TAG Digital TAG Read Write
Coil 0 000001 - 029999 (1) 1 5
Input 1 100001 - 129999 2
Holding Register 4 400001 - 429999 3 6, 16 (2)
Input Register 3 300001 - 329999 4
1) The symbol character does not have the number property. For example, 400100 and 4100 designate the
same memory area (Holding register 100).
2) The code 16 is issued when a double word write or the recipe write function is activated. A single word
write uses the code 6.
The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes. The actual available memory area and
range of each area should be
checked with the manual of connecting device. The Read / Write columns show the used MODBUS
function codes in this communication driver.



2 Orange Orange 2
3 Green/W Green/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Green 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8

2 Orange Green 2
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Orange 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8
27.33 NAIS PLC FP Series (MEWTOCOL-COM)
This driver provides communication interface between Xpanel and NAIS FP Series PLC with their
MEWTOCOL-COM protocol.

CIMON-Xpanel 582
Create
a new
Device

of database
Select
a
device
type
I/ O Device type : NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM
Select the NAIS FPO MEWTOCOL-COM in Device Type combo-box of following dialog box. And
then, configure the communication parameters appropriately. Ensure that parameters are matched
with those of PLC side.

Create
a
station
Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. The PLCs to
communicate with must be registered in the Station Tab. Add Station button pops up a station
configuring dialog box. A station can be defined with its station number on this dialog box. Each
field can be configured with following guideline.
CIMON-Xpanel 584

Station Type Choose the NAIS FPO . (No other type can be selected.)
Station No Assign a station number. It can be a decimal number between 1 and 32.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
error, the notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Address Notation

Format Type Format Example
Dec. [Symbol][Decimal Address] DT0010 / T0100
Dec_Hex. [Symbol][Decimal Address][Hex Bit Number] X012F
Symbol Area Analog
TAG
Digital
TAG
Address
Format
Decimal
Address
Access
X External Input O Dec_Hex 00-12 R
Y External Output O Dec_Hex 00-12 R/W
R Internal Relay O Dec_Hex 000-903 R/W
L Link Relay O Dec_Hex 000-999 R/W
C Counter O Dec 000-143 R
T Timer O Dec 000-143 R
WX External Input Word O Dec 00-12 R
WY External Output Word O Dec 00-12 R/W
WR Internal Relay Word O Dec 000-903 R/W
DT Data Register O Dec 0-9121 R/W
FL File Register O Dec 0-9999 R/W
LD Link Data Register O Dec 0-9999 R/W

CIMON-Xpanel 586
27.34 OMRON HostLink
This version of driver uses C-mode command in OMRON HostLink protocol.

Create
a new
Device

I/ O Device Name : Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of
database
Select
a
device
type
I/ O Device type : ' OMRON PLC(HostKink) '
popped
CIMON-Xpanel 588

In this window, select the Device Type as OMRON PLC (HostLink) and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with PLC configuration.
Create
a
station

Station Type Choose the HostLink . (No other type can be selected.)
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checksum
Comm. Error
Message pop
CIMON-Xpanel 590
Up Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive
PLC Mode

Omron PLC can be written when its mode is monitor. So you must change the mode to monitor.
Please set the value of DM6600 to 0101h. Even though the PLC power goes out, it remains to monitor
mode.
You can only change the DM6600 by program mode.

DM area D D0000 D9999 D0000.00 D0000.15
D9999.00 D9999.15
(1)
CIO area IR IR0000 IR6143
IR0000.00 IR0000.15
IR6143.00 IR6143.15
AR area A A0000 A0959 A0000.00 A0000.15
A0959.00 A0959.15
(1), (2)
HR area H H0000 H0511
H0000.00 H0000.15
H0511.00 H0511.15
T/C status TC not supported TC0000 TC4095 (3)
T/C p. value PV PV0000 PV4095 not supported (3)
LR area L L0000 L0199 L0000.00 L0000.15
L0199.00 L0199.15
EM area E
E0_0000 E0_9999
EC_0000 EC_9999
E0_0000.00 E0_0000.15
EC_9999.00 EC_9999.15
(1), (4)
(1) If the address of this area was used in digital tag, control functionalities are not supported. Xpanel
cannot set/reset these points.
(2) A0000 A0447 address area cannot be modified by Xpanel. (Read only area)
(3) Timer : T0000 T2143 area was mapped to TC0000 - TC2143 (PV0000 - PV2143)
Counter : C0000 C2143 area was mapped to TC2148 - TC4095 (PV2148 - PV4095)
(4) Bank of EM area must be denoted by one hexadecimal character ( 0 C ) as following example.
Digital Tag : E[bank]_[word no].[2 digit bit no] (EA_1000.05 : bit5 of E1000 in bank A )
Analog Tag : E[bank]_[word no] (EC_32 : E0032 of bank C )
(5) Bit location of digital Tag must be denoted by 2 digits decimal number ( 00 15 ) with dot ( . )
separator.
(exception : Timer/Counter area is digital point by itself).
Wiring Diagram

RS232C
C Series RS422A
CIMON-Xpanel 592
CS/CJ Series
RS422A
27.35 SAIA S-BUS
This document described the SAIA S-BUS communication driver for Xpanel. This driver support the data mode
S-BUS protocol.
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SAIA PCD families
via data mode S-BUS protocol.

Create
a new
Device

database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Devicetype : " SAIA S-BUS "
After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, Serial communication Configuration dialog box will
be popped

CIMON-Xpanel 594

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as SAIA S-BUS and configure the proper serial
communication parameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device's configuration.

Create
a
station
In this dialog box, all the connectedPLC stations can be configuredand registered to the XPanel.

accompaniedwith the DeviceName .
Station Type Choose the type of connected device. "PCD Family" type is the only supported.
16Bit Data Swap This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.
32Bit Data Swap This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.
Using Checksum This field has no effect in SAIA S-BUS driver.
Comm.Error
Message Pop Up
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communication error notification
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data receive
error. Only when there is data transmit (writinga TAG value to the station) error,
CIMON-Xpanel 596
the notification message is popped up. This message box will be closed
Communication Setup : SAIA PCD Family

Following picture shows the configuration with PG5 tool from SAIA.
Open the "Hardware Settings" dialog box and give the S-BUS station number to use in the "S-Bus" tab.

Move to the "Serial" tab and configure the communication parameters.
These parameters should be matched with those of Xpanle's. Note that the "S-Bus" combo box must be
configured as "Data".

The communication parameters can be set in IL program of SAIA PCD. Following program is a sample IL
codes for communication port setup.
This sample codes are programmed for PCD2.M150 CPU with PCD7 F120 module.
$SASI
TEXT 100 "UART:19200,,,50;"
"MODE:SS1;" ; When PCD is a slave in network
"DIAG:F100,R998;"
$ENDSASI
XOB 16
SASI 1 ; When using the channel #1
100
EXOB
COB 0
0
ECOB
CIMON-Xpanel 598

Following table shows the list of valid address range for each memory area.
The symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string.

Area Symbol Word Notation Bit Notation Read Write
Input I I0000 - I8191 O X
Output O O0000 - O8191 O O
Flag F F0000 - F8191 O O
Timer T T0000 - T1599 O O
Counter C C0000 - C1599 O O
Register R R0000 - R4095 O O

XPANEL COM/
CPM2
RS232C

XPANEL COM1
RS422/485

Connection
example -
RS232C :
PCD2.M150
with PCD7
F120
Above picture shows the RS232C and RS422/485 ports of Xpanel. Refer to the manual of your device for
signal description. In case of the
RS232C ports, Xpanel provides the standard DB9 RS232C pin assignment.

Following table shows the list of functions that are supported by 'SIEMENS S7-200 PPI Direct'
Block Data Read O
Block Data Write O
String Real Tag O
Word Swap O
Dword Swap O
Block Data
Read
This function makes it possible that is bulk data reading at a time.
It will be applied when you use recipe, data bridge and trends at the Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 600
Block Data
Write
This function makes it possible that is bulk data writing at a time.
String Real
Tag
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data
of Xpanel with PLC.
Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon
Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data
Swap configuration.
27.36 SIEMENS RK512/3964R
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and Siemens
Simatic PLC (S5 and S7).
It supports the following families of Siemens Simatic S5 system.
S5 : CPU 115U, 135U or 150U via communication card CP524 or CP525.
S7 : CPU 315-2 via the communication card CP341-1
S7 : CPU 412-1 via the communication card CP441-2
Communication Setup : PLC

This section describes how to set up the Siemens Simatic hardware. Use the information in this section in
conjunction with the Siemens publications associated with your PLC system.
The physical communication layer is performed via a serial RS232C link connected to a Siemens CP524 or
CP525 communication card.
The Siemens Simatic S5 system must contain a S5 unit of one of the following types : S5-115u, S5-135u,
S5-150u.
The communication protocol 3964R must be loaded into the CP525 module, and the CPU must be loaded
with the following Siemens
Function Blocks (FB) : Synchron, Send, Receive.
These system function blocks are used to establish the communication between the CPU and the CP525.
Depending on which type of CPU you use, different function blocks are required.
115U 135U 150U
Synchron FB249 FB125 FB185
Send FB244 FB120 FB180
Receive FB245 FB121 FB181

Create
a new
Device
For creating a new device activate the menu Tools -> I/O Devices or icon in tool-bar.

database
Select
a
device
type
I/ O Device type : ' SIEMENS RK512/3964R '
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration dialog box
will be popped up as shown in following picture.
In this window, select the Device Type as SIEMENS RK512/ 3964R and configure the proper serial
CIMON-Xpanel 602

Create
a
station
In this dialog box, all the connected PLC stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each
field can be configured with following rules.

Station Type Choose the SIEMENS . (No other type can be selected.)
Station No. This field has no effect.
RK512/ 3964(R) protocol has no station number. It is based on 1:1
communication environment.
16Bit Data
Swap
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 /
CIMON-Xpanel 604
UINT8 / BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
This option swaps words of all double word sized data. Following diagram shows
an example of word swapping.
INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be
Using
Checksum
When the 3964R procedure was used, this option must be checked. Otherwise,
Xpanel uses 3964 procedure.
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format
Analog [Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number] D10:1
Digital [Symbol][DB Number]:[DW number].[Bit Number] I:12.7
DB Number : decimal number (0..255)
DW number : decimal number (0..255)
Bit Number : hexa-decimal number (0..F)
Symbol Area Example DB DW Type Access
D Data Block D1:120, D1:12.F 0-255 0-255 Word R/W
X Ext. Data Block X2:003, X2:3.F 0-255 0-255 Word R/W
F Flags F:12, F:12.7 - 0-255 BYTE R
I Inputs I:008, I:008.7 - 0-127 BYTE R
Q Outputs Q:004, Q:004.7 - 0-127 BYTE R
27.37 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet
Simatic S7 PLCs.
S7-300 CPU via the communication card CP343-1 IT
S7-400 CPU via the communication card CP443-1 IT

Create
a new
Device

I/O Device Name: Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database
Select
a
I/O Device type: ' SIEMENS S7 Ethernet '
CIMON-Xpanel 606
device
type
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Ethernet Communication Configuration dialog box will be

In this window, select the Device Type as SIEMENS S7 Ethernet and TCP protocol.
This driver supports only TCP/IP protocol stack.
Create
a
station
Each fields can be configured with following rules.

This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the S7 . (No other type can be selected.)
Network ID This network ID is a combination of CPU s rack and slot
number.
This ID must be given by decimal number with following
format.
(000..714)
Socket Port
Number
Don t change the default number (102).
This number is a TCP/IP port which is opened by PLC for communication service.
16Bit Data
Swap
CIMON-Xpanel 608
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /
UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this
option.
Fixed Xpanel
Socket Port /
Xpanel Socket
Port No.
If this option was checked, Xpanel will use only one port defined in "Xpanel Socket Port No."
field for connection with PLC. Otherwise, Xpanelwill change the port at every TCP connection
or communication error.
This option is provided for Xpanel to deal with various TCP port management ways of PLC.
Some PLC has a limit on the number of TCP services. In that case, this option can be a help.
The actual effect of this option on PLC cannot be described here. Because, there are too many
kinds of PLC and the response in PLC is entirely dependant on the specification of PLC and
engineer s experience. The default setting of this option is unchecked state.
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at every Rx
and Tx error.
Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only when
there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is
popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][DB Number,][Address] DB1,1
Digital [Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number] DB1,2.7
DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB) addressing
only.
For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.
Bit Number : decimal number (0..7)
Symbol Description Word Notation Bit Notation Type Access
PI Peripheral Input PI001 PI001.7 Analog/Digital R/W
I Input I002 I002.7 Analog/Digital R/W
Q Output Q003 Q003.7 Analog/Digital R/W
M Memory M004 M004.7 Analog/Digital R/W
DB Data Block DB01,01 DB01,01.7 Analog/Digital R/W
T Timer T005 - Analog R
C Counter C006 - Analog R
The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data
manipulation.
Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.

CIMON-Xpanel 610
Connect
through the
Ethernet
HUB

Direct
connection

27.38 SIEMENS S7 MPI
Simatic S7 PLCs via MPI protocol.
S7-200/300/400

Create
a new
Device Following picture shows the first step of creating a new device.

database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device type: ' SIEMENS S7 MPI '
After selecting the OK button of previous step, Serial Communication Configuration dialog box
will be popped up as
CIMON-Xpanel 612

In this window, select the Device Type as SIEMENS S7 MPI and appropriate communication
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.

Loca
l
I D
Give a station (node) number of Xpanel. This number does not duplicated with the one of
PLC. The node number can be the integer value between 0 and 126.
Net
wo
rk
Op
Designate the maximum station (node) number of connected network. This can be one of
following numbers. If the Xpanel is the unique master in network, the integer value of
(1,000+maximum station number) should be designated.
t
Create
a
station
connected PLC
stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following
rules.

CIMON-Xpanel 614
Name .
Station Type Choose the S7 MPI . (No other type can be selected.)
16Bit Data
Swap
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 /
BCD8 / UBCD8.
32Bit Data
Swap
INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced
by this option.
Using
Checksu
m
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not
(writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification message is popped up.
This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds after.
Address Notation

Analog [Symbol][DB Number,][Address] DB1,1
Digital [Symbol][DB Number,][Address].[Bit Number] DB1,2.7
DB Number, : decimal number (0..65535) followed by comma (,). It is used in data block (DB)
addressing only.
For other types of memory, this field must be omitted.
PI Peripheral Input PI001 PI001.7 Analog/Digital R/W
I Input I002 I002.7 Analog/Digital R/W
Q Output Q003 Q003.7 Analog/Digital R/W
M Memory M004 M004.7 Analog/Digital R/W
DB Data Block DB01,01 DB01,01.7 Analog/Digital R/W
T Timer T005 - Analog R
C Counter C006 - Analog R
The device T and C (timer and counter) must be defined as UBCD16 typed TAG for normal data
manipulation.
Following picture shows the data type configuration window of Xpanel database.
CIMON-Xpanel 616

SSW7 Adapter
The cable supplied with the adapter can be directly connected to the Xpanel
without any change.
If there is some need to make the cable by yourself, refer to the following picture..

27.39 SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between Xpanel and SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7-200 PLCs via PPI protocol.

Create
a new
Device

I/O Device Name: Give a device name. This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device type: ' SIEMENS S7 PPI DirectI '
After selecting the 'OK' button of previous step, Serial communication Configuration dialog box will be
popped up as
CIMON-Xpanel 618

In this window, select the 'Device Type' as SIEMENS S7 PPI Direct and appropriate communication
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC. Communication parameters should be configured as
shown
in the following table.

Baud Rate 9600 or 19200 (must be matched with the one of PLC)
Parity Even
Data Bits 8 Bits
Stop Bits 1 Bit
Comm.Type RS485
Local ID The Xpanel occupies the station ID '0' (zero) for its network address.
This Xpanel's address is fixed and cannot be changed.
Create
a
station
Move to the Station tab of 'Serial Communication Configuration' dialog box. In this dialog box, all the connected
PLC
stations can be configured and registered to the Xpanel. Each field can be configured with following rules.

CIMON-Xpanel 620
This name will be used in the database window accompanied with the Device Name .
Station Type Choose the S7 . (No other type can be selected.)
16Bit Data Swap This option swaps bytes of all word or double word sized data.
Almost all of the data type will be influenced by this option except INT8 / UINT8 / BCD8 /
UBCD8.
32Bit Data Swap This option swaps words of all double word sized data.
INT32 / UINT32 / BCD32 / UBCD32 / FLOAT type of TAG values will be influenced by this
option.
Using Checksum This field has no effect.
Comm. Error
Message pop Up If this item is checked, Xpanel displays a communication error notification message at
every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does not display the message at
data receive error. Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station)
Communication Setup : S7-200

Following picture shows the screen shot of STEP 7-Micro/Win.
The network address and communication speed (Baud rate) of PLC are configured in this dialog box.
Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configuration of Xpanel.

Address Notation

The address of TAG in Xpanel has the following format
Analog [Symbol][Address] VW064
Digital [Symbol][Address].[Bit Number] or
[Symbol][Address][Bit Number]
M012.3 or
M0123
I Input - I7.7 Digital R
Q Output - Q7.7 Digital R/W
M Internal Memory - M31.7 Digital R/W
SM Special Memory - SM85.7 Digital R/W
T Timer - T127 Digital R
C Counter - C127 Digital R
CIMON-Xpanel 622
IW Input IW7 - Analog R
QW Output QW7 - Analog R/W
MW Internal Memory MW31 - Analog R/W
SMW Special Memory SMW85 - Analog R/W
VW Variable Memory VW4095 - Analog R/W
TW Timer SV TW127 - Analog R
CW Counter SV CW127 - Analog R


Block Data Read O
Block Data Write O
String Real Tag O
Word Swap O
Dword Swap O
Block Data
Read
Block Data
Write
String Real Tag It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data of Xpanel
with PLC.
Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon 16Bit Data
Swap configuration.
Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data Swap
configuration.
27.40 YOKOGAWA Personal Computer Link
This Manual explains about the method of CIMON-Xpanel communication with YOKOGAWA PLC using
RS232C or RS422/485.

Create
a new
Device
To configure the communication device of YOKOGAWA PLC, Select 'Tools' - 'I/O device' in
the menu or icon in
tool-bar, and then I/O device configuration dialog box will be shown up. And then click [new
device] button.
I/O device selection dialog box is shown up, select a device name and a device type as the
following figure.
CIMON-Xpanel 624

window of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Device type: ' YOKOGAWA Computer Link Protocol '

Comm.Port COM1
must select COM1 .
When RS-232 communication type of COM1 port is used, 9P DSUB
connector is used.
And When RS-422/485 communication type of COM1 port is used, 5P plug
connector is used.
If you use COM1 port, you cannot use RS-232 and RS-422/485 together,
but you can use only one type.
CIMON-Xpanel 626
Baud rate 9,600
Parity bit None
Data bits 8 bits
Stop bits 1 bit
RTS/CTS OFF
implement. Because of RS-485 communication port of the Xpanel supports
Auto Toggle function so Xpanel doesn t use this function. This example
doesn t use RTS-CTS control.
Retry No. 3
If communication failed with the kind of field equipments, it will retry as the
number of this.
Time Out 30
If you input as the number of 30 then it s time out count will be 30 seconds.
Using Dial Up
Modem
Not Select
Create
a
station
Move to [Station] tab at the Serial Communication Configuration Dialog Box and click [Add

Station Name ST
you as DEV.ST .
Station Type DirectNet
Station No 1
other.
16Bit Data
Swap
32Bit Data
Swap
Using
Checks
um
Comm. Error
Message pop
Up
message at every Rx and Tx error.Otherwise(unchecked), Xpanel does
not display the message at data receive error. Only when there is data
transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically
Module Configuration

Tra
ns
mi
ssi
on
Sp
Remove side tab of Personal Computer Link Module and then configure Baud Rate with SW1.
The baud rate must be same as the speed which was configured in Serial Communication
Configuration .
CIMON-Xpanel 628
ee
d
Sw
itc
h :
SW
1
mode Baud rate (bps)
0 300
1 600
2 1200
3 2400
4 4800
5 9600
6 19200

The baud rate is set as 9600 bps by selecting Mode 5 in configuration in this example.
Dat
a
For
ma
t
Sw
itc
h
:
SW
2
You can configure about the communication in this switch.
This configuration must be same which was configured in Serial Communication Configuration .
No. Function OFF ON
1 Data Length 7 bits 8 bits
2 Parity None Yes
3 Odd parity Even Parity
4 Stop Bit 1 bit 2 bits
5 Check Sum None Yes
6 Termination Char None Yes
7 Protection None Yes
8
Data Length 8 bits
Parity None
Stop Bit 1bit
Check Sum Yes
Check sum will be used to protect communication data safely from the
transmission error.
Termination Char Yes (Attach <CR> at the end of the frame.)
Protection None

Wiring Diagram

RS-232C
: Null Modem

Xpanel connects three lines to PLC. PLC connects lines such as above figure. If you
don t connect lines
to PLC as the showing figure, it can t transmit data to other field equipments but can
receive data so that
not to be accomplished communication.
RS-422

RS-485

CIMON-Xpanel 630
When Xpanel is using RS-485, it connected with SDA and SDB but disconnect with
RDA and RDB.
Device Memory range

Device Sym F3SP20 /
F3SA20
F3SP30 /
F3SA30
F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35
Input X X00201 X61364 X00201 X61364 X00201 X71364 X00201 X71364 X00201 X71364
Output Y Y00201 Y61364 Y00201 Y61364 Y00201 Y71364 Y00201 Y71364 Y00201 Y71364
Internal I I00001 I04096 I00001 I08192 I00001 I04096 I00001 I08192 I00001 I16384
common E E00001 E02048 E00001 E02048 E00001 E02048 E00001 E04096 E00001 E04096
Link L L00001 L01024 L00001 L01024 L00001 L11024 L00001 L71024 L00001 L71024
Special M M00001 M00512 M00001 M00512 M00001 M02048 M00001 M09984 M00001 M09984
Data D D00001 D05120 D00001 D08192 D00001 D05120 D00001 D08192 D00001 D08192
File B - - - B00001 B32768 B00001 B32768
Link W W00001
W01024
W00001
W01024
W00001
W11024
W00001 W71024 W00001
W71024
Special Z Z00001 Z00256 Z00001 Z00256 Z00001 Z00512 Z00001 Z00512 Z00001 Z00512
Index V V00001 V00016 V00001 V00016 V00001 V00032 V00001 V00032 V00001 V00032
Common R R00001 R01024 R00001 R01024 R00001 R01024 R00001 R04096 R00001 R04096
Timer T TU0001 TU0256 TU0001 TU1024 TU0001 TU0256 TU0001 TU1024 TU0001 TU2048
TP0001 TP0256 TP0001 TP1024 TP0001 TP0256 TP0001 TP1024 TP0001 TP2048
TI0001 TI0256 TI0001 TI1024 TI0001 TI0256 TI0001 TI1024 TI0001 TI2048
TS0001 TS0256 TS0001 TS1024 TS0001 TS0256 TS0001 TS1024 TS0001 TS2048
Counter C CU0001
CU0256
CU0001 CU1024 CU0001 CU0256 CU0001 CU1024 CU0001 CU1024
CP0001 CP0256 CP0001 CP1024 CP0001 CP0256 CP0001 CP1024 CP0001 CP1024
CI0001 CI0256 CI0001 CI1024 CI0001 CI0256 CI0001 CI1024 CI0001 CI1024
CS0001 CS0256 CS0001 CS1024 CS0001 CS0256 CS0001 CS1024 CS0001 CS1024
Error Code

Error Code
(EC1)
Semantics Probable causes
01 CPU number Error CPU number is out of allowable value which range is 1~4.
02 Command Error No command. It can t execute command
03 Device Specification Error No device. It doesn t adequate use of WORD in the bit device.
04 Value outside the setting range When you write a Bit Value, you must use only 0 or 1.
While you write Word, it is out of 0000~FFFF.
05 Data count out of range The number of Bit/Word exceeded permitted range.
The number of data or device parameter is not same.
06 Monitor Error Monitor operates without BRS/WRS.
07 CPU Type Error It is not Basic CPU.
08 Parameter Error If it is not specified parameter by this time, it will be invalidated.
41 Communication Error Error occurred while it communicated.
42 Checksum Error Checksum dislike each other.
43 Internal Buffer Overflow Receiving data is over than allowable number.
44 Timeout while receiving characters ETX data receiving fail. Timeout is 5 seconds.
27.41 Fuji Micrex SX Ethernet
This document describes the Micrex SX Ethernet (Fuji Electric) communication driver for XPanel. This driver
supports the TCP/IP.
Supported communicationmodules of SX PLC are NP1L-ET1 and NP1L-ET2.

Create
a new
Device
CIMON-Xpanel 632

window of database
Select
a
device
type
I/O Devicetype : " FUJI Micrex SX "
After selectingthe OK button of previous step,
Ethernet Communication Configuration dialog box will be poppedup as shown in following
picture.


In this window, select the DeviceType as FUJI Micrex SX and configurethe proper Ethernet
Take note that the FUJI MicrexSX driver supportsTCP/IP protocol stack only.
Since XPanel communicateswith the PLC in loader command communication mode .
Initialize the Tx Frame When Timeout Occurs
This option provides a safety solution for communication troubled situation. If this option was
checked
and there was a communicationerror, the system would delete the remaining control frames
(data transmit frames fromXPanel to PLC)
which were not transmittedbut queued in communicationbuffer of XPanel.

Create
a
station
In this dialog box, all the connectedPLC stations can be configured and registered to the
XPanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 634

Sta
tio
n
Na
me
with the DeviceName .
Sta
tio
n
Ty
pe
Choose the type of connectedPLC among the NP1L-ETn .
Net
wo
rk
ID
Be ignoredin runtime.
So
ck
et
Por
t
No
The socket port number should be matched with the [reference number of local port
+251] or [reference number of local port+253]. The reference number of local port is
configuredin DWin300 as shown in the following figure.
In this example, the socket port number should be 507(256+251)or 509(256+253)
16
Bit
Dat
a
Sw
ap
No effect
32
Bit
Dat
a
Sw
ap
No effect
Usi
ng
Ch
ec
ks
um
No effect
Co
m
m.
Err
or
Me
ss
ag
If this item is checked, XPanel displays a communicationerror notificationmessage at
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message at data receive error. Only
when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the station) error, the notification
message is popped up. This message box will be closed automatically about 5 seconds
after.
CIMON-Xpanel 636
e
Po
p
Up

Following table shows the list of valid address symbols and its usage examples. The symbol character has
to be placed in the first position of address string.
Ad
dre
ss
For
ma
t
Analog [Symbol][WordNo] %MW1.6 or %MD1.6
Digital [Symbol][WordNo][.][BitNo] %MW1.6.12or %MX1.6.12
The WordNo and BitNo are representedby decimal number. (BitNo : 0..15)
Su
pp
ort
ed
Sy
mb
ols
Symbol WordNo Range Description
%IX %IW %ID 0 512 Input
%QX %QW %QD 0 512 Output
%MX1. %MW1. %MD1. 0 131071 Standard Memory
%MX3. %MW3. %MD3. 0 32767 Retain Memory
%MX10. %MW10. %MD10. 0 511 System Memory
The memory areas listed above are provided for general purposes.
The actual range of each area should be checked with the manual of connectedCPU type.
XPanel treats the word address(%?W_) and double word address (%?D_) as same.
addresses represent a single word memory.
The actual data type should be declaredin the Advance configurationtab in TAG databaseas shown in
the following picture.




2 Orange Orange 2
3 Green/W Green/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Green 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
CIMON-Xpanel 638
8 Brown Brown 8

2 Orange Green 2
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Orange 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8

Block Data Read O
Block Data Write O
String Real Tag O
Word Swap O
Dword Swap O
Block Data
Read
Block Data
Write
String Real
Tag
It makes the device as the serialized memory so you can communicate string data
of Xpanel with PLC.
Word Swap This function swaps bytes of all word or double work sized data. It depends upon
Dword Swap This function swaps word of all double word sized data. It depends upon 32Bit Data
Swap configuration.
27.42 ALLENBRADLEY DF1
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocao between XPanel and MicroLogix
PLCs.

Create a new
Setup

This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by the
Station Name .
CIMON-Xpanel 640
Select a
network type
I/O Device Name: Allen Bradley DF1

In this window, select the DeviceType as Allen Bradley DF1 and appropriate communication
parameters.
Those parameters must be matched with the PLC.
Communication parameters should be configuredas shown in the following table.
Baud Rate must be matched with the one of PLC
Parity None
Data Bits 8 Bits
Stop Bits 1Bits
Comm.Type RS232
CIMON-Xpanel 642
Create a station Move to the Station tab of Serial Communication Configuration dialog box. In this dialog box, all
the connected
PLC stations can be configuredand registered to the XPanel. Each field can be configuredwith
following rules.

DeviceName .
Station Type Choose the SLC500/MicroLogix .(No other type can be selected.)
Network ID This field has no meaning in this driver. (ignoredin runtime)
Using
Checksum
This field has no meaning in this driver.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked,XPanel displays a communicationerror notification
message
receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writinga TAG value to the station) error,
the
automatically
Communication Setup : RSLogix

Following picture shows the screen shot of RSLogix. The network address and communication speed
(Baud Rate) of PLC are configuredin this
dialog box. Error Detectionmust be selected to BCC and Driver is selected to Full Duplex.
Please note that those set data should be matched with the device configurationof XPanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 644

Address Notation

Following table shows the list of devices which can be referenced in XPanel database.

Symbol Description Word Notation Bit Notation Access
I Input File I:00.000-I:08.255
I:00.000/00-
I:08.255/15
R/W
O Output File O:00.000-O:08.255 R/W
S Status File S:0-S163 M31.7 R/W
B Bit File B3:0-B3:255 SM85.7 R/W
T Timer File T4:0-T4:255 T127 R/W
C Counter File C5:0-C5:255 C127 R/W
N Integer File N7:0-N7:255 - R/W
F Float File F8:0-F8:255 - R/W

27.43 METRONIX APD
This driver provides the software interface and communication protocol between XPanel and METRONIX
APD.

Cre
ate
a
ne
w
de
vic
e
CIMON-Xpanel 646

I/O Device Name
the Station Name .
Sel
ect
a
de
vic
e
typ
e
Select a device type : Metronix APD

In this window, select the Device Type as 'Metronix APD' and appropriate communication parameters.
Ensure that those parameters are matched with the device s configuration.
Cre
ate
a
sta
tio
n
following rules.
CIMON-Xpanel 648

Station Name
Give a name to the Device. This name will be used in the database window
Station Type Choose the APD-VS Series . (Another type can t be selected.)
Station No. This number must be matched with the one of Device.
Comm. Error
Message Pop Up
Address Notation

Device
Description
Word
Bit Access
UINT32 INT32
%MD
Menu Data
%MD000 ~ %MD999
%MD000.0~%MD000.31
~
%MD999.0~%MD999.31
R/W
AI
Servo State
AI000 ~ AI012
AI000.0~AI000.31
~
AI012.0~AI012.31
R
DO
Operation
- DO000~DO011 R/W
AO AO000 ~ AO012 - R/W
Menu data address configuration
[Ex] Current Sate Pd-001 -> %MD000
Current Speed Pd-002 -> %MD001
Command Speed Pd--> %MD002
Servo State Check address configuration
Address Description
AI0 Current Speed
AI1 Command Speed
AI2 Current Pulse
AI3 Command Pulse
AI4 Current Load
AI5 Peak Load
CIMON-Xpanel 650
AI6 I/O State
AI7 DC Volt
AI8 Speed Refer
AI9 Speed Feedback
AI10 Torque Refer
AI11 Torque Feedback
AI12 Servo State
Servo State Set address configuration : Digital
Address Description
DO0 Alarm Reset
DO1 Alarm History Clear
DO2 Menu Initialize
DO3 Current offset store
DO4 I/O State initialization
Speed Driving
Address Description Tag Type
DO5 Direction Digital
DO6 Write : Speed, Acc & Dec time, Time Digital
AO000 Speed Analog
AO001 Current offset store Analog
AO002 I/O State initialization Analog
AO003 Time Analog
Note 1.
Direction : Configure rotation direction of motor. (0 : CCW, 1: CW)
Speed : Configure driving speed. (unit : 9999.9 r/min)
Acceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by acceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Deceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by deceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Time : Configure driving time from start to stop. (unit : 9999)
Note 2.
n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address
then Speed Driving Command will be executed.
n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.


Position Driving
DO7 Write : Position, Speed, Acc & Dec Time Digital
AO004 Position Digital
AO005 Speed Analog
AO006 Acceleration Analog
Ao007 Time Analog
Note 1.
Direction : Configure rotation direction of motor. (0 : CCW, 1: CW)
Speed : Configure driving speed. (unit : 9999.9 r/min)
Acceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by acceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Deceleration time : Configure reaching time to regular speed by deceleration. (unit : 99.99)
Note 2.
n After you configure Direction, Speed, Acc, Dec and Time, write digital value to D06 address
then Speed Driving Command will be executed.
CIMON-Xpanel 652
n To show floating point data, configure data scale at database.
Gain tuning
DO011 Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range Digital
AO010 Speed Analog
AO011 Distance Analog
AO012 Tuning range Analog
n After you configure Speed, Distance and Tuning range write digital value to D06 address
then Position Driving Command will be executed.
Command Address Description Remark
Menu Data %MD000~%MD999 Menu Data R/ W
State Setting
DO0 Alarm Reset
W
DO1 Alarm History Clear
DO2 Menu Initialize
DO3 Current offset Save
DO4 I/O State Initialize
Servo State
Check
AI0 Current Speed
R
AI1 Command Speed
AI2 Current Pulse
AI3 Command Pulse
AI4 Current Load
AI5 Peak Load
AI6 I/O State
AI7 DC Voltage
AI8 Speed Refer
AI9 Speed Feedback
AI10 Torque Refer
AI11 Torque Feedback
AI12 Servo State
Speed
DO5 Direction
W
DO6 Write:Speed,Acc,Dec,Time
AO000 Speed
AO001 Acceleration Time
AO002 Deceleration Time
AO003 Driving Time
Position
DO7 Write:Pos,Speed,Acc,Dec
W
AO004 Position
AO005 Speed
AO006 Acceleration Time
AO007 Deceleration Time
Auto Driving DO8 Auto Driving W
Stop AO008 After stop, program information reset W
Emergency
Stop
DO9 Emergency Stop W
Time AO009
When driving start after stop, it makes
continuous driving
W
Starting
Point
Driving
DO10
Starting Point Driving by configured mode
at parameter.
W
Gain Tuning
DO11 Write : Speed, Distance, Tuning range
W
AO010 Speed
AO011 Distance
AO012 Tuning range

CIMON-Xpanel 654
27.44 FARA N70/700 PLUS
Overview
This ducument describes the FARA N70 / 700 PLUS communication driver for Xpanel.
Communication available PLC is : NX7, N70 PLUS, N700 PLUS
Create a new
Setup
tool-bar.

This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the Station Name .
Select a
network type
I/O Device Name: FARA N70/700 PLUS
Configuration dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the DeviceType as FARA N70/700 PLUS and configurethe
proper serial communicationparameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched
with the device's configuration.
dialog box, all the connected
PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be
configuredwith followingrules.
CIMON-Xpanel 656

This name will be used in the database window accompanied
Station Type Choose the type of connectedPLC among the 'FARA N70/
N700 PULS."
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect. This driver is always checking the
BCC.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked,XPanel displays a communicationerror
notificationmessage
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message
at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically
Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The
symbol character has to be placed in the first positon of address string. The address number follows
Ext. Input/Output R R000 - R127 R000.0 - R127.15
LINK L L000 - L063 L000.0 - L063.15
Internal Relay M M000 - M127 M000.0 - M127.15
KEEP Relay K K000 - K127 K000.0 - K127.15
Special internal
Output
F F000 - F015 F000.0 - F015.15
Word Register
Timer/Counter
W W000 - W3071
Switch Configuration
PIN No Switch Content Dip Switch 1
1
OFF Run by stored internal RAM
ON Run by stored at FLASH ROM
2
OFF RS-232C Communication(IBM-PC)
ON RS-485 Communication(For Programmer)
3 4
OFF OFF 9600 bps Board rate
ON OFF 38400 bps Board rate
OFF ON 19200 bps Board rate
ON ON 4800 bps Board rate
CIMON-Xpanel 658
[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]
27.45 Samsung BRAIN SPC Series
Overview
This document describes the Samsung BRAIN SPC Series communication driver for Xpanel.
Create a new
device
tool-bar.


This name will be used in the TAG configuration window of database accompanied by
the Station Name .
CIMON-Xpanel 660
Select a
network type
I/O Device Name: SAMSUNG BRAIN Series
Configuration dialog box will be popped up as shown in following picture.

In this window, select the DeviceType SAMSUNG BRAIN Series and configurethe
proper serial communicationparameters. Ensure that those parameters are matched
with the device's configuration.
dialog box, all the connected
PLC stations can be configured and registered to the XPanel. Each field can be
configuredwith followingrules.

This name will be used in the database window accompanied
Station Type Choose the type of connectedPLC among the 'SPC Series."
Using
Checksum
This field has no effect. This driver is always checking the
BCC.
Comm. Error
Message Pop
Up
If this item is checked,XPanel displays a communicationerror
notificationmessage
Otherwise(unchecked),XPanel does not display the message
CIMON-Xpanel 662
at data receive error.
Only when there is data transmit (writing a TAG value to the
station) error, the
notification message is popped up. This message box will be
closed automatically
Following table shows the list of valid address range used FARA PLC for each address area. The
symbol character has to be placed in the first position of address string. The address number follows
Ext. Input / Output R R000 - R127 R000.0 - R127.15
LINK L L000 - L063 L000.0 - L063.15
Internal Relay M M000 - M127 M000.0 - M127.15
KEEP Relay K K000 - K127 K000.0 - K127.15
Special internal
Output
F F000 - F015 F000.0 - F015.15
Word Register
Timer / Counter
W W000 - W3071
[XPANEL COM1 / COM2 RS232C]
Top Level Intro
Part
XXVIII
FAQ 665
28 FAQ
Is there any question about CIMON - Xpanel ? See our FAQs.

See :
Xpanel Page Update and Speed
Xpanel IP Setting
How to use Xpanel Printer
How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port under Windows Vista?
How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my device?
How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd vender program?
Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download
When Ethernet Loader is not operated
28.1 Xpanel Page Update and Speed
IN THIS TOPIC :
To quickly update a page(Fixed Background)
To quickly update a page(Draw Changed Object Only)
Reduce Page Size(Using 256 Bitmap)
To quickly update a page (Fixed Background)

If it arranges a lot of objects on the page in the work, update would be slower.
Considering the specificity, "Fixed Background" function makes the speed of update higher.
The "Fixed Background" function is registered to each page, and the page setting up the function of the
"Fixed Background" is handled as
the 'Object appointed with change and the 'Object not appointed with change are divided.
Object appointed with change is as follows.
Object for which Visible, Blink, V-Size, H-Size, V-Move, H-Move, Color and Rotate are specified.
When the change is specified for Group Object, All Object are handled as Group object appointed
with change
Touch and Entry Data are not handled by the change.
Tag Value, Date Time, String Value, Multi String, Trend Graph, Data Log and Alarm Summary are
handled as Object appointed with change .
CIMON-Xpanel 666
"Fi
xe
d
Ba
ck
gro
un
d"
Fu
nct
ion
Set
up
Select - Page for setting "Fixed Background" function in XpanelDesigner
Click - [Tools] -> [Page Setup]

Select - "Fixed Background" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button
FAQ 667
The upper page arranges the 'Tag Value Object' on Group object with the shape of a toothed wheel.
In case of the object not to set the "Fixed Background" , it has picture renewal cycle for about 0.5sec
because all objects are drawn again when data updates. However, in case to set the "Fixed Background" ,
the picture renewal cycle is shorten because only the 'Tag Value Object' is drawn without drawing all
Objects with the shape of a toothed wheel.
To quickly update a page (Draw Changed Object Only)
Reduce the number of Objects toQuickly update a Page.Generally, if Object appointed with change are
piled up by using Draw Changed Object Only ,
the last changed Object is displayed normally.

The number difference between the general case and the case of using Draw Changed Object Only

CIMON-Xpanel 668
For example, if three objects designated with change like upper page are changed at the same time, all
objects inside the yellow circle are drawn again.
In this case, 12 Object will be drawn. However, if Draw Changed Object Only is used, three objects will be
drawn again and the drawn time will be shorten to 1/4 time.
Caution when
using
'Draw
Changed
Object Only'
Avoid the piled-up the objects designated with change when using Draw Changed
Object Only

FAQ 669
For instance, there are three quadrilaterals designated with color change.
In case not to use Draw Changed Object Only , the color of three quadrilaterals
are changed each other.
However, in case to use Draw Changed Object Only , the lastly changed object
is on the top of them.
'Draw
Changed
Object Only'
Setup
Select - Page for setting "Draw Changed Object Only" function in XpanelDesigner

Select - "Draw Changed Object Only" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button
When using Draw Changed Object Only , Caution is as follows.
When there are Objects designated with V-Move, H-Move and Rotate, "Draw
Changed Object Only" function doesn't operate.
If objects that its Visible is decided by same tag are overlap, the under object is
always removed or covered due to the upper object.
In case to use 'Fixed Background' , it is filled with the background picture of the
area first value. If not, page background color would be filled.
Reduce Page Size (Using 256 Bitmap)

If the size of page file is big, there will be lots of errors at download and it will take much time to read the
page file.
Generally the page composed with basic objects doesn t take big size. However, if the page is using many
CIMON-Xpanel 670
images, the size of the page file will be bigger.
In the case of it, if you check the "Using 256 bitmap" in the Page Properties, it would change 24 bit image
of page to the 8 bit image at download and also
it would contract the size about 1/2~1/3.
Instead of it, pixel data is changed, so the shapes of editing and Xpanel could be different slightly.
"Using 256
Bitmap"
Function Setup
Select - Page for setting "Using 256 Bitmap" function in XpanelDesigner
Select - "Using 256 Bitmap" of Page Properties and click - [Ok] button
28.2 Xpanel IP Setting
IN THIS TOPIC :
When the project that Ethernet I/O Device is registered is operating
Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE
Using Ethernet Loader
When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating

When the project that the Ethernet I/O Device is registered in Xpanel is operating, refer to the following
pictures.
"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.
FAQ 671

Push the " SW Keyboard " button. For removing the SW Keyboard from screen, push the SW
Keyboard button again.

Push the " Comm. Config " button. -> Select - [Ethernet] in the I/O Device selection box
CIMON-Xpanel 672
IP Setting Window is displayed.
Change the IP Setting using ' SW Keyboard' and click the[OK] button of Communication Setup
window.

Click the[OK] button

Click the[OK] button to close the system
Using Network Setting Window of Windows CE

Close - Xpanel Program
When it is connectedwith ActiveSync, close -Xpanel Program by "Online ->Xpanel Program Stop
When it is not connected with ActiveSync, close - Xpanel Program by [Exit] button of Xpanel Config
window

Xpanel wallpaper is displayed.
FAQ 673

Touch the screen under to appear Taskbar . Execute the software keyboard by touching the icon at
the right corner of the task bar.

CIMON-Xpanel 674
Change the content of Settings window using software keyboard, and Click the[OK] button.
Close - [LAN91C111 Ethernet Driver] Settings window by button.
Close - [Network and Dial-up Connections]window by button.

Close the system by selecting 'Start -> Suspend' for storing the network settings permanently.
Using Ethernet Loader

* Ethernet Loader supports OS version 2.00 or late.
If the project is running, click the [Exit] button in the Xpanel config window.

Change -"IP" by using IP Input Keyboard
FAQ 675

* If "DHCP" is not checked,IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway can be changed.
For application the changed configurations, select the [Apply this new setting] button.

Click the[OK] button then it will go on.
28.3 How to use Xpanel Printer
This manual explains "Printer Setup" and "Print Out Setup".
Xpanel can connect USB Printer that is support PCL. (USB Host support model)
IN THIS TOPIC :
Xpanel Printer Setup Print Out Setup
Xpanel Printer Setup

"Xpanel Config" can be displayed by pressing three corners of touch area as follows.
CIMON-Xpanel 676

Push the " SW Keyboard " button. For removing the SW Keyboard from screen, push the SW
Keyboard button again.

Push the " Printer " button.

FAQ 677
Printer Select the printer type. Xpanel supports PCL Inkjet and PCL Laser printer
supporting PCL.
Port Select a port that the printer is connected.
USB Printer : If a printer is connected to the Xpanel via the USB host port,
select the " LPT1:" The LPT1 port is automatically detected and displayed
when the printer is connected.
Network Printer : If a printer is connected with the network,
select the " Network". In this case, the Net Path field must be configured as
following example.
Format : \ \ PC_name\ Pri nt er_name
Example : \ \ ki m40\ canoni r 2
Paper Size Select - Paper size of printer.
Draft Mode If this mode is not selected, the size of the output image decreases though the
image is clearly output
Color If you select PCL Inkjet , enable Print out with Color.
Print Range Select - All
Orientation Select - Print orientation
Margins Adjust - Print margins.
If setting is finished, push - [OK] button.
If the Port is chosen as Network , the Xpanel tries to connect the PC through network and pops-up
following logon dialog box.
CIMON-Xpanel 678

Enter the user name and password to the logon dialog box above, and then push the button.
Following dialog box is displayed to Xpanel.
If [Yes] is chosen, the password entered will be stored in disk permanently.
Otherwise (in case of[No] ), the Xpanel will ask the password whenever try to use the network printer.
Touch - [System Shutdown] of "Xpanel Config" window to save the setup data
(If the System Shutdown was not executed, the setup data will be canceled and the previous one will
be restored when the system is restarted.)
To continue, push [OK] button. Xpanel will be shutdown.
Print Out Setup

Xpanel provides the HardCopy() function for printing the screen image.
FAQ 679

Ma
ke
a
Pri
nt
But
ton
1. Select - Object to use print button from screen
a. Select - [Touch] in 'Object Config' and [Command Expression] in 'Action'
b. Input - HardCopy(); in Command. Click - [ OK]
HardCopy() function outputs a present screen to the selected printer.
2. Download the project to Xpanel
3. Push "Print Screen" area.
CIMON-Xpanel 680
4. After a while, print completion message box is displayed.

28.4 How can I connect Xpanel and XpanelDesigner via USB port
under Windows Vista?
V1.19 or later version of Xpanel operating system supports Microsoft Windows Vista.
The most recent Xpanel operating system image is provided with XpanelDesigner.
If your current XpanelDesigner does not include V1.19 or later version of OS image, you need to upgrade
your XpanelDesigner first.
Please check the web-page (http://kdtsys.com/kor) for the new version of XpanelDesigner.
And "Windows Mobile Device Center" is needed for PC instead of "ActiveSync" which is used under previous
Windows version.
"Mobile Device Center" is abailable at http://www.microsoft.com/.
FAQ 681
28.5 How can I display the engineering value from the raw value in my
device?
Xpanel provides two different method to calculate a scaled engineering data.
System designer can choose one of there two methods with the "Scale" option in TAG database.
If this option is checked, Xpanel performs 'Scale/Offset' method.
IN THIS TOPIC :
Scale / Offset Method Proportional Method
Scale / Offset Method

The 'Scale/Offset' method uses following formula for calculating the engineering value.
Veng = Vraw X Scale + Offset
Vraw Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.
Veng Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)
( Example 1) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the V
raw
from device is
32768,

CIMON-Xpanel 682
V
eng
= (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.8 = 0
As shown in above example, the engineering data configurations (Min Value and Max Value) do not
affect the raw value processing.
But, in case of proportional method (if the 'Scale' option was not checked), the engineering data Min/
Max value configurations are important factors.
See the next following page.
Proportional Method

The 'Proportional Method' process the law value twice by using following formulas.
Scale = (V
eng_max
- V
eng_min
) / (V
raw_max
- V
raw_min
)
Offset = V
raw_min
- V
raw_min
V
eng
= V
raw
X Scale + Offset
Vraw Read data from device. Not processed, raw value from device.
Veng Engineering data. (The data which will be displayed in Xpanel's screen)
Vraw_max , Vraw_min Raw data rage configurations
Veng_max , Veng_min Engineering data range configurations
First, it calculates the scale and offset values from min/max configurations.
The calculated scale and offset values are applied to the same formula as 'Scale/Offset Method' for
acquiring the final engineering value.
( Example 2) If an analog TAG was configured as following picture, and the V
raw
from device is
32768,

FAQ 683
Scale = (3276.7 - (-3276.8))/ (65535 -0) = 0.1
Offset = (-3276.8)-0 = -3276.8
V eng = (32768 X 0.1) - 3276.8 = 3276.8 -3276.8 = 0
Note that above two examples gave the same result.
28.6 How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB to/from Microsoft
Excel or other 3rd vender program?
The XpanelDesigner does not have a special menu for TAG DB exporting and importing.
However, the clipboard function of Windows can be used for the same purpose.
Use the "Copy" function of "Edit" menu while the TAG DB window is opened and some of TAGs in
DB are under selected state.
And next, activate the Microsoft Excel, and use "Paste" function of "Edit" menu. Following table can
be helpful to edit each TAG data in Excel worksheed.
Cell
TAG Type
Remark
Group Digital Analog String
A TAG name (including the group name)
B 0 1 2 3 TAG type code
C TAG Description
D Real/Virtual TAG Flag
0 = Virtual TAG
1 = Real TAG
CIMON-Xpanel 684
E I/O Device Name
F I/O Point Address
G Initial Value
H
I
Data Type
Code
(See note 1)
Length of
string
J 0 (Reserved)
K
L 0 (Reserved)
M
Scale factor
flag
0 = Normal
1 = Use the scale factor
N Eng. data Min.
O
Eng. data
Max.
P Raw data Min.
Scale factor when the scale
factor flag (M cell) was set
Q
Raw data
Max.
Offset value when the scale
factor flag (M cell) was set
R Last value latch flag
0 = Do not latch
1 = Do latch
S 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
T 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
U 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
V 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
W 0 (Reserved) 0 (Reserved)
Note 1) Data type code of analog TAG
Code Type Code Type
0 INT8 7 BCD16
1 INT16 8 BCD32
2 INT32 9 UBCD8
3 UINT8 10 UBCD16
4 UINT16 11 UBCD32
5 UINT32 12 FLOAT
6 BCD8
FAQ 685
28.7 Corrective Actions when font file delete is failed during download
It is possible if error font file is downloadedto Xpanel.
Corrective Action 1
1. Click - [Online]-> [Setup Link]. Select the link type of Xpanel.
2. Click - [Online]-> [Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel) ]
3. Uncheck - [DownloadThe Font File] of "Download to Xpanel(PC->Xpanel)"
4. Click - [Ok]
Corrective Action 2
1. Close -Xpanel Program by [Exit]button of Xpanel Config window
CIMON-Xpanel 686
2. Two touch the [My Device]of this screen.
3. Two touch the [Xpanel]
FAQ 687
4. Select the [Bin]folder. Delete the folder by touching [File] -> [Delete].
5. Select - [Ok]in the error windowwhile deleting it.
6. When it is completed,reset the Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 688
7. Close the warning massage by pressing [OK]buttonas follows.
8. Download project after connectingPC and Xpanel.
28.8 When Ethernet Loader is not operated
When Xpanel is not displayed in the Xpanel Found Window
1. It is possible to have a problem in the wire connection of communication cable. Please check the
communication cable like following pictures.
2 Orange Orange 2
3 Green/W Green/W 3
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Green 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8
FAQ 689
<Direct Cable: Host <-> HUB : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the hub>
2 Orange Green 2
4 Blue Blue 4
5 Blue/W Blue/W 5
6 Green Orange 6
7 Brown/W Brown/W 7
8 Brown Brown 8
<Crossover Cable: Host <-> Host : When Xpanel is connected with PC via the cable>
2. In case of the connection with another PC of network, Xpanel doesn t send its own IP information any
more.
After the end of Xpanel of another PC for 15~20 seconds, rebut Xpanel Designer and check its
condition of the connection.
3. In the condition of 1:1 connection with Xpanel, check the Obtain an IP address automatically in the IP
settings.
If it is set, its IP is assigned from DHCP server. if not, normal IP to PC would not be assigned and
Ethernet communication can t work.
The network setting of PC can be confirmed by the under method.
Click - [ Control Panel] -> [ Network Connections]
CIMON-Xpanel 690
Select - [Local Area Connection] -> [Properties] by using the right button of mouse.
FAQ 691
Click - [Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)]-> [Properties]
CIMON-Xpanel 692
In case of the direct connection with the equipment via the cross cable, IP address is not sent
automatically.
So, certainly, select Use the followingIP address and input IP address, Subnet mask and Default
gateway.
Input the value of Subnet mask and gateway same with address registered to Xpanel, and input
different value referring the value of Subnet mask met to the network.
Ex) When Ethernet setting of Xpanel is as follows,
IP address : 100.100.100.10 / Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 / Default gateway :
100.100.100.1
Register -PC as follows.
IP address : 100.100.100.xxx ->xxx is less than 255 except 0, 1, and 10.
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway : 100.100.100.1
FAQ 693
4. If Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel is closed, It will be not displayed in the item.
Do not close Ethernet Loader window when Xpanel is running.
If you close unfortunately,it can be restarted automaticallyby On/Offthe power of Xpanel.
5. The Xpanel informationframe can be interceptedby the firewall programset up in PC.
After closinga real time monitoring functionand firewall program, restart Xpanel Designer and check its
action.
6. Ethernet Loader is supportedin the Xpanel OS v2.00 or late.
After butting, you can check OS version at the System Log window of Xpanel Config.
CIMON-Xpanel 694
When program run fail or create fail message happens continually during project download
1. The connectionof the cable is normal but the network setup could not be matched.
Referring 3.clauses described at the upper picture, check IP setup between PC and Xpanel.
2. It is possible to close Ethernet Loader program of Xpanel by mistake.
Click the [Exit] button at the Xpanel config for closing Xpanel project and check the Ethernet Loader
program describedat the 4.clauses.
Ethernet connection test of PC and Xpanel
1. The network connectionwith Xpanel can be confirmedby an easy operationin PC.
2. Confirm the IP of the PC via IPCONFIG.
2.1 Select - [Start] -> [Run]on the PC.
2.2 Input cmd in the open of 'Run' windowand click the [OK]button.
2.3 Command windowis displayed.
FAQ 695
2.4 Input ipconfig in the Command windowand push the Enter' key.
2.5 If the cable is connected,IP information setting to the PC is displayed on the monitor.
If not, "Media disconnected"messageis displayed.
3. Ethernet communication connection test (Ping test)
3.1 Input "ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" in Command windowand push the Enter' key. "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is a
IP of Xpanel.
Ex) Ping 172.16.106.52
3.2 If the network is connectednormally,Request time is displayed on the monitor.
If not, "Request timed out" message is displayed.
Corrective Actions when Font File delete is failed during download

1. It is possible if error font file is downloadedto Xpanel.
2. Please take measures in the following order.
2.1 Close -Xpanel Program by [Exit]button of Xpanel Config window
CIMON-Xpanel 696
2.2 Two touch the [My Device]of this screen.
2.3 [Xpanel ]folder is displayed.
2.4 Two touch the [Xpanel]
FAQ 697
2.5 Select the "Bin" folder and remove folder by pressing button. Select - [Ok]in the error
massages while deleting it.
2.6 When it is completed,reset the Xpanel.
2.7 There will be the background picture and the warming massage not to find program.
2.8 Close the warning massage by pressing [OK] button and download project after connectingPC
and Xpanel.
CIMON-Xpanel 698
Index
- -
118
118
119
124
- -
283

288
- -
- 295
665
- -
140
- -
28
- -
665
- -
283
- -
185
185
181
- -
665
- -
- - 286
- A -
Access Privilege 304
AddMessage 354
AlarmCsvWr 352
AlarmPrint 351
ALLENBRADLEY DF1 639
Analog TAG 100
Apply from alarms 366
Apply scroll message using script 366
ASIC Protocol 379
- B -
Barcode Scanner 385
Blink 158
- C -
CIMON SCADA 296
ClearAlarmLog 354
ClosePort 342
Color 163
comm. monitor 57
comm.config 58
Command Script 315
Conditional Expression 315
Configuration Items 365
configuration tool 56
CONTINUE 320
- D -
Danfoss 390
Data Bridge 196
Index
699
Data Logger 189
Data Logging Configuration 189
database 93
Database Edit using EXCEL 104
Database Window 94
DataLog 332
date/time 64
DELTA TAU 402
Developing Environment Setup 41
digital tag 100
DirectNet 444
DO-WHILE 318
- E -
Edit Data Bridge Model 196
Editing recipe data using system memory 226
EntryData 167
Essential Safety Precautions 28
Ethernet 110
Ethernet loader 688
Example of using system memory about opened
page log. 219
exit 70
- F -
FAQ 665
FAQ_CorrectiveActions 685
FC300 390
FOR Statement 319
Frame Editor 135
FrameOpen 327
FR-E500 513
Fuji 631
- G -
General Safety Precautions 30
GetSecurity 349
GetSysMem 357
GetTime 328
GLOFA 449, 457, 464
GOTO 320
Group TAG 99
- H -
HardCopy 341
HITACHI Inverter SJ300/L300P 408
H-Move 161
How can I export/import the Xpanel's TAG DB
to/from Microsoft Excel or other 3rd vender
program 683
How to use Database 95
H-Size 159
- I -
I/O 109
I/O 109
IF-ELSE 318
Installation / Dimensions 34
Interfaces 37
Internal Functions 322
IP 670
- K -
KDT SYSTEM 417, 425
KDT Systems Xpanel Master 433
Keyence KV 439
keypad page 181
KOYO 444
- L -
LcdBacklight 360
LcdBrightDown 359
LcdBrightUp 359
Library 139
LOG Trend 261
LogOff 348
LogOn 347
LogOnWin 348
LS 457, 469
LS Master-K S PLC 484
LS Master-K S PLC Enet 501
LS Master-K S PLCCnet 489
LS Master-KH PLCCnet 495
LSIS 449, 464, 477, 509
CIMON-Xpanel 700
- M -
MakeCsv 330
MakeCsvUsb 331
MakeLogCsv 331
Melsec 1C 516
MELSEC 1E 531
Melsec 3E 526
Melsec 3E ASCII 537
Melsec A Series 543
Melsec FX Series 548, 553
Melsec Q Series 558
MELSEC_FX2N-1020GM 566
METRONIXAPD 645
MEWTOCOL-COM 581
misc,config 62
MITSUBISHI 513, 516, 526, 531, 537, 543,
548, 553, 558
MODBUS 571, 576
ModelConfiguration 209
- N -
NAIS 581
network 50
NumToStr 346
- O -
Object Properties 154
OMRON 586
OpenConfigWin 349
OpenPort 341
Operator 313
Overview 93
- P -
Package 32
Page Properties 131
PageOpenS 327
Peripherals 49
PMAC 402
Printer 681
printer : printer setup 65
Printer 675
Project setup and download 87
- R -
RcpConfig() 338
RcpCsvRd 336
RcpCsvWr 337
RcpDownload 333
RcpFileRead 335
RcpFileStore 334
RcpGetSysMem 355
RcpMemDown 335
RcpMemUp 335
RcpSetSysMem 356
RcpStop 334
RcpUpload 333
ReceiveByte 344
Recipe 208
Recipe Operator Interface 213
RemoveMessage 355
RETURN 321
RK512/3964R 600
Rotate 163
RunApp 329
RUNSCRIPT 322
- S -
SAIA S-BUS 592
Scope Trend 241
ScrCapture 340
screen captrure 64
Script 309
Scroll Message Setup 365
Scroll_Message 364
Security 302
SendByte 343
SendString 343
Serial 113
SetDate(R1,R2,R3) 361
SetSpeed(R1) 361
SetTime(R1) 361
SIEMENS 600
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet 605
SIEMENS S7 MPI 610, 616
Index
701
Sleep 341
SoftKeyboard 350
SPC Trend 247
Specification 33
ST Trend 254
Statements 317
StaticBeepCtrl(R1) 360
String Construction 276
String Editor 276
String TAG 103
StringTable 328
StrToNum 345
Structure of Program 309
Style 156
sw keyboard 65
SWITCH-CASE 319
SysMemFill 359
SysMemMove 358
system log 56
System Memory 217
System Overview 49
system shutdown 69
- T -
tag 93
TimeStr 329
Touch 165
touch calibrate 63
TouchCalib 353
Trend 234
TrendCsvWr 339
- U -
User Library 151
User LogOff 306
User LogOn 306
User Registration 302
Using Data Logging 193
Using System Memory Tag 217
- V -
Visible 157
Vista 680
V-Move 160
V-Size 158
- W -
WHILE 318
Wiring 40
- X -
XGT 469, 477
Xpanel 13
xpanel Designer 51, 72, 82, 83, 93
Xpanel Project download 72
Xpanel unit 52
Xpanel 295
XpanelDesigner 13
XY Trend 267
- Y -
YOKOGAWA 623
YT Trend 234
Endnotes 2... (after index)
CIMON-Xpanel 702
Back Cover

Xpanel

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Xpanel

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2006 KDT SYSTEMS Co.Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Cross Reference window enhanced to display tag address.

Added project convert function.

Added new Script function (SetDate, SetTime).

Complement function the alarm to remove log.

Complement function to check error of Alarm log file.

Cross reference window modified to display tag address.

Between Xpanel , project converting function added.

When project convert, Source project is backed up by another name

Added script function to change date and time in Xpanel.

Four kind function to remove alarm log have been added.

Complement function to check error of Alarm log file.

Added BLDC Motor controller communication driver

Improved performance Modbus Rtu communication driver

Improved performance DASA iM-Sigma communication driver

Você também pode gostar